User Manual: Computer Video Instrument

��User Manual
Computer Video Instrument
,r.
--�
e
I NTRO D U CT I O N
�,- -
The development o f the FAIRLIGHT CVI (C o mputer Video

Instrument) has made available to the enterta i n ment ind ustry,
prod uction compan ies and video artists, di gital effects and
crea tive production techniques previously unava ilable at a
realistic price.
The CVI is a digital live image processor and graphics genera tor
with paintbox facilities. These two main cha racteristics are
i n terrelated, so that you can combine live video and pain ted
images in a multitude of ways; using painted ima ges as
backgrou nds, foregrounds, or both, cap turing live images a n d
combining t h e m f o r a video photo-montage, d r a w i n g d i rectly o n
live video images and s o on.
The CVI has been designed to embody a high degree of

flexibility, allowing users to develop their own style of use. It is
a powerful visual instr ument, the key t o i t s simple control console
being a 'menu' driven system. Menus provide a series of choices,
the decisions therein determ ining particular e ffects.
Notice to CVI Distributors
CVIR'elJjsjoo 7: Title Library Bug 9 Ror 87

- "
Several CVI users have reported a problem with the Title Library using
Revision 7 software. Apparently, the machine can bomb out after an
extended title edit I library save session, leaving the contents of the
Q
library in total c aos. In one instance, the result of this was a machine
that would not J10wer up again AT ALL.
We wish to advise that this annoying bug is being looked into. It is very
difficult to reproduce at will. The proposal is to include a fix in Revision
8, the release date of which has not yet been determined.
�
TO AVOID THIS BUG:
�
(1) When creating large title libraries, use a separate computer, such as a
PC or Macintosh. This allows fOJ efficient title editing, as well a safe
offline storage.' The CVI Rev7 Manual Update describes how to include
ASCII escape sequences to provide font ,and attribute changes in titles.
�" ' -
(2) Use the RS232coinmands, Load Library (@LL) and Save Library (@SL), to
handle the library en masse. Thus, If the ra're bug ,shows up, all is not
lost. The machine Can be restarted and the library reloaded.
RESEnt NG A CRASHEDCU I:
When a CVI running-Rev7 software will not power up at all, i.e. because of
the bug in question or perhaps another bizarre reason, it is possible to
force a complete machine reset. This is accomplished as follows:
Whilst s i m ul t aneo us ly holding doWn t he FREEZE, PRESET, MENU

andSTOPbuttoos 00 the control panel, turn the power ON.
Hold these four ( left mos t ) buttons down until the Fairligh t
logo appears o�, tile display.
Once this is done; there is no going back. The title library, sequences,_
user-defined, brushes and textures, presets, and other as�orted goodies are
all reset to theirfactory,settJngs. The machine may then be considered to
'
be totaly refreshed arid ready to use once more.
CUSTOMER SERVICE SUPPORT

, ,
· Startea .
.2
, '
. Video Melius
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
.' 'I'''''' This manual is d ivided into four ma i n sections. I t is

'\
-
recommended that Section One, CVI DESCRIPTION be read

before first trying to use the CVI. The other sections are
designed to be read whilst working with unit to gain a knowledge
of the facil ities that it offers.
Section One - CVI Description

This is an introduction containing general informa tion about
the CVI, its layout and how to use it. Many people skip
in troductions, however there are aspects of the CVI which are
u nusual, and it is the intention o f this introductory section to give
an overall view of these. So, read on!
Section Two - Getting Started

The Paint Exercises section works through examples of some of
the paint effects available. These start with simple drawing and
colour change, gradua ting to title editing and cut-and-paste
operations. A CVI is required for these exercises.
The Video Exercises section explains, with examples, some of
the video effects available. These examples include image
colourizing, freezing, mirroring and disintegration. A CVI and
video camera (or recorded video tape) input are required a t this
stage.
Presets describes the characteristics of each Factory (ROM)
PRESET, including video and paint responses. This section also
incl udes photographs of examples of presets and a PRESET Quick
Selector. If the CVI operator works through these presets to
familiarize him/herself with effects, a CVI and video input are
required.
Section Three - Paint and Video Menus

Paint Men us gives a detailed description of each of the menus
in the PAINT category. I t contains all details of digital painting
tools. To get the most from your CVI, this section should be
worked through, after Paint Exercises has been read.
Similarly, Video Menus contains a detailed description of the
menus in the live VIDEO category. This section should also be
worked through, after Video Exercises has been read.
Section Four - Software Updates - Revision 58

This section contains information on enha ncements to the CVI
Software which have occurred since Revision SA Software was
released. Contact your dealer for more information.
I t also contains the details of the RS232C Computer I nterface
of the CVI. It describes the i nstructions and the signals that the
CVI uses for Remote Control and Data Storage.
Section F ive - References

A Glossary covers the more technical terms of the manual, a n d
t h e r e i s , of course, t h e Index.
'r
r
Console con trols ..................................................•....... 0
Slider con t rois ............................................................. 1
P ush b u t tons .....•.............................•............................ 3
Graph ics pad .....•.....................................•......•...•........ 6
Menus - Wh a t are t h ey? .......................................... 7
Stenci l s - Wh a t a r e t h ey .................................•••...•... 10
P r e s e t s - Wh a t a r e t h ey? ........................................ 12
Seq u e ncer - Wh a t is i t ? ........... ................................ 13
The C ursor - How to use i t ...................................... 14

Concept u a l mod e l 15
-
...........•.....................•... . ..........•......
Funct ion a l overview ................................................... 16
Conn e c t i n g the CVI •............................•••.••••.•..••••...... 18

CVI external con n e c t ions ...............................•..•....... 19
Options and adj u s tme n t s ........................................... 20
T u r n i n g on t h e C V I ................................................... 21
Configu r a t ion d i a g rams ............................................ 22

Ait, . .£ 4A Emi4 .
.MikM4M & _ Ri &A # ; :u ;;WA..,K ; At @£ Ai•.� ..;: & d .. 1 ,At
CONSOLE CONTROLS
The console controls consist of
10 Slider controls ---,

1 Graphics pad
1-�
€� "'v�
<:�
o lD o
��v�
�... ��
~ �"'
�'l'
�
[J
��
...v
[J
o�
",...
o
EJ
o
--------�C�O�MP�U�T�RlJMENT
16 Push buttons ---.......

SLIDER CONTROLS
Stretch &
r Hue: Saturation &
Value Translucency
Multi-
Function Pan Zoom
Colour Controls Control Rate Controls Controls Controls
I , n n n
"
.,c
,.
'
,J>'
"o
v-
,.
'
"C
"o\.
#
�,?,yI.
tr'"
' '''-
0"
rr""
�
,,P
.!:J
,. . - ,.-
o....
r\t-
'
�'<-
rr"
(...
...
<;,,
90 '<-
,c
"
,0
0"
I
COLOUR TIMING MOVEMENT
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
The slider controls form three groups:
Colour controls: Allow real-time control of colour, for both

colour modification (colourizing) o f live images, and painti ng.
The colour selection method follows the Hue, Saturation, Value
(H.S.V.) colour model.
The four cont rols in this group are:
i) HUE: This selects the actual 'col our' from the spectrum. The
slider is marked: RED YELLOW GREEN CYAN B LUE
MAGENT A RED, giving a full colour circle. It is a
contin uous scale, so positioning the slider between, sa y, RED
and YELLOW will yield ORANGE.
i i) S A TU R A T I ON: The satura tion of a colour is its 'purity'. For
insta nce, high saturation red is a bright red, decreasin g
saturation goes through var ious shades of pink, until a t
m i n i m u m saturation, the result i s white. This slider m a y b e
regarded a s add i n g 'whiteness' a s t h e control i s dec reased.
iii) VALUE: This control affects the brightness of the colour. Fu ll
brightness occurs when the slider is a t the top of its travel,
and moving the control down will darken the colour, u n til at
the bottom it will be black. Wi th value a t black , HUE a n d
SATURATION sliders will h a v e n o effect, as you c a n n o t
perceive colour in total da rkness.
iv) COLOU R DEP TH: This controls the degree in which the
H.S.V. colour in teracts with co lour al ready on the screen. In
simple terms it is like a translu cency control, or 'thick n ess' of
r colour, but its actual effect depends on the se lection made in
the COLOUR TYPE menu (or COLOUR I ZE TYPE menu for
colourizin g).
I CVI D ES C R IPTION - 1
SLIDER CO NTRO LS
Timing controls : These two sliders control the rate at which

e v e n ts occur i n the CVI.
i) RATE ONE: This controls the rate of change of random colour

a n d colou rizing functions. (COLOUR CONTROL and
COLOURIZE CONTROL menus).
ii) RATE TWO: This control determines the rate of glides
(SC R E E N CONTROL menu) and the rate of image 'grabbing',
c o n trolled by the FREEZE CONTROL menu.
Movement controls : These four sliders control the movement

o f digital images on the screen. Their functions are a ffected b y
the G l i d e , S l i d e and Pan:pen selections i n the SCREEN CONTROL
menu.
The four controls i n this group are:
i) HORIZONTAL PAN: Moves image horizontally.

ii) VERTICAL PAN: Moves image vertically.
iii) STRETCH: This control affects the aspect ratio (proportion of
vertical size to horizontal size) of the pixels. ( A pixel is a
'picture element', which is the smallest unit of colour that the
image is composed of.) On a still image this control will stretch
the picture, with a normal image occurring when the slider is
a t centre. Up from centre gives a vertical stretch. Down from
centre gives a horizontal stretch. O n a live image, this control
wi ll control the mosaic (Pixelation) effect.
iv) ZOOM: This control expands the p i xels. On a still image th i s
control zooms the picture, giving a 'close-up' effect. Cha n g i n g
th i s c o n t r o l with a live d i g i t a l i m a g e will result i n the mosa ic
effect. The normal position for this control is at the bottom
of i ts travel.
2 - CVI DESCRIPTION
I PUSH BUTTONS
r The push-buttons allow immediate control of a nu mber of

functions: There a re buttons for starting a process, selecting
presets, e n tering the menus system, a n d various other functio ns.
All of the buttons fea ture a light, indicating the current status (on
or off) of t h e function they control.
Ten b u t tons have the numerals 0 to 9 printed above them.
These buttons are used as n u mber buttons when selecting
PRESETS or MEN US.
'
,t
,"
Free2e
Button
0 D
�'b\.q.
<t1'...
Preset
Number
�.
..,4-
S .
[]
Preset
Select
....'"
Menu
Sele ct
[]
c§,�
�'
0 ,.$
�
,,<1' .... <1"
0
[[)]
Sto
But on
r
Drawing Colounze Drawing Texture Screen Pick Title Stencil
Control Control Enables Enable Wipe Colour Enable (Key)
Enables COntrol Controls
Colourize: push on/push off. Button number O.

Will re-colour the whole digital image in the colouri ze type
selected i n the COLOURIZE TYPE menu. Colourizing is a l terable
by the HUE, SATURATION, V ALUE, a n d COLOUR DEPTH
sliders.
See Section 3 - PAINT MEN US under COLOURIZE TYP E a n d
COLOURIZE CONTROL.
Draw colour: push on/push off. B u t ton nu mber 1.

E nables you to use the stylus a n d GRAPHICS PAD to d r a w 'on
screen'. Mus t be used i n conjunction w ith DRAW or D R AW
LOCK bu ttons.
Draw stencil: push on/push off. Button number 2.

E n ables a stencil (matte or key) to be d r a w n on the stencil p l a ne,
w i th stylus a n d GRAPHICS PAD, provided that the DRAW o r
DRA W LOCK buttons are a l s o on.
I CVI DESCRIPTION - 3
PUSH BUTTONS
Use texture: push o n/p ush o f f. B u t t o n n u mber 3.

Enables t h e t e x t u re selected to be used for d r a w i n g a n d some
Colour wipes.
See Secti o n 3 - PAINT MENUS u n der TEXTURE.
Wipe colour: Push once to w i pe. B u tton n u m ber 4.

Ac t i v a tes c u rr e n t Colour wipe selection.
S e e S e c t i o n 3 PAI NT MEN US u n d e r COLOUR W I P ES
- .
Wipe stencil: Push o n ce to w i pe. B u tton number 5.

Ac t i v a t es current STENCIL WIPE selection.
S e e Section 3 PAINT MEN US under STEN CIL W I P ES.
-
Pick colour: P u sh once to pick colour. Button number 6.

Stylus and GRAPHICS PAD selects desired colour from colours
already in the still image, allowing colour matching.
Title: Push once to title. Button number 7.

E n a bles you to displa y the title that you edited on the TITLE
EDIT menu.
See Section 3 PAINT MENUS u nder TITLE EDIT menu.
-
Use stencil: Push on/push off. Button number 8.

Ena bles you to activate on screen whatever stencil is selected from
the STENCIL SOURCE menu.
See Se c tion 3 VIDEO MENUS under STENCIL SOURCE and
-
DISPLAY CONTROL.
Invert stencil: Push once to invert. Button number 9.

Ena bles you to 'flip' the stencil, so that areas where the stencil
was off become on, and vice versa. Thus protected areas, and
areas with differing display selections in the DISPLAY
CONTROL menu, will be exchanged.
See Section 3 VIDEO MENUS under DISPLAY CONTROL.
-
Draw: Hold down to draw.

This button enables the drawing of lines and shapes on the sc reen
as long as it is pressed. Use i n conju nction with the DRAW
LOCK button.
See Section 3 PAINT MENUS under PAINT METHOD.
-
This button doubles as a previous MENU or PRESET selector when

i n MENU mode or PRESET select mode. You may thus step
backwards through the PRESETS.
4 - CVI DESCRIPTION
PUSH BUTTONS
r Draw lock: Push to lock DRAW on, push again to u n l ock.

This button ena bles continuous d ra w i n g of lines a n d s h a pes on the
screen. Use i n conjunction with the DRAW button.
See Section 3 - PAINT MENUS under PAINT METHOD.
This bu tton doubles as a next MEN U or PRESET selector when i n
MEN U m o d e or PRESET select mode. You may thus step forwards
through the PRESETS.
Sto p: Push once to stop a p rocess.

This button stops any special process from happening, and returns
the CVI to a neutral condition. The STOP button w i l l haIt the
following processes: Colour Wipes, S tencil Wi pes, S e t u p selections
a n d some Paint Methods.
If a MENU i s displayed, STOP button w i l l return you to t h e
screen i mage.
Menu: Push to enter MEN U mode.

When pushed, the last menu that was displayed will re-appear on
the screen. Press the STOP b u t ton to return to screen image.
See Section 1 - INTRODUCTION under MENUS.
The menu button also stops replaying of Sequences.
Preset: Push to enter PRESET selection mode.

This button enables the selection of PRESETS.
To select a particular PRESET, press PRESET button, then a two
digit number (00 to 99) from the n u mber buttons. If the req u i red
preset is n umbered between 0 and 9, you may either press 0 then
the required digit, or press the digit followed by the STOP button.
To select the next preset, press PRESET then the 'next' button
(DRA W LOCK).
To select the pre vious preset, press PRESET followed by t h e
'previous' b u t t o n (DR A W ) . The 'next' a n d 'previous' functions
remain constant, even when MENUS are displayed.
A list of the factory PRESETS i s a t the end of Section 2. To
save the current control console setup a s the curre n t PRESET,
press PRESET then FREEZE. See also Section 3 under P RESETS
CONTROL menu.
I f you press the PRESET button by mista ke, press i t again to
cancel it.
Freeze: Pus h on, push off.

This button con trols the FREEZE f u nction i n combination w i th
the FREEZE CONTROL men u. If the button light i s o n , t h e l i v e
i mage w i l l be frozen, if o f f , t h e image w i l l r e s p o n d to the F r eeze
Con trol selection.
See Section 3 - VIDEO MEN US u n d e r FREEZE CONTROL.
Press i n g PRESET then FREEZE w i l l save the curre n t c o n t rol
r console setup and the c u r r e n t menu selections a s the curr e n t
PRESET.
CVI DESCRIPTION - 5
GRAPHICS PAD
This the 'heart' of the CVI system.
Th e inbuilt GRAPHICS PAD is a touch sensitive pad which

detects the posi tion of a stylus (supplied 'pen') or fingernail on
the surface. This position is used by the CVI for several
functions: It allows easy selection of options in the men us, a n d
allows the drawing of images and 'stencils' on the screen.
Be fore commencing to draw or paint a n image you should make
the appropriate selections in the PAINT menus, or select a
PRE SET which has the requi red facilities stored.
A cursor will appear on screen, in a position corresponding to
the stylus' posi tion on the GRAPHICS PAD. The form of this
cursor varies with different functions.
For painting, the cursor will show the Colour, B rush S h a p e, and
C o l o u r Ty p e cu rrently selected. When the colour and position of
curso r are determined, press either the DRAW or D RA W LOCK
button and move the stylus on the pad to draw images.
See Section 3 PAINT MENUS for details of painting options.
-
Drawing will occur when the stylus is held firmly on the

GRA P HICS PAD. When you lift pressure the line or brush stroke
you are doing will cease. Apply firm pressure and there is less
chance of errors, in either drawing m o d e or menu mode.
NOTE: Do not use a pen or ballpoint pen with ink on the

GRAPHICS PAD indelible staining may occur. Also, do, not
-
use any object with a sharp point: the pad surface may be
scratched.
6 - CVI D ESCRIPTION
M E N US
What a re they?
'Me n u s' are the scree ns full of words a n d symbols, i n white
lettering on a blue backgr o u n d , t h a t appear when the ME N U
button i s pressed.
The menus are a means of making selections w i t h i n the system.
They take the place of a large array o f switches, b u t tons, k n obs,
a n d p a r a p h e r n a l i a t h a t would o t h e r w ise be necessary to con trol a
mach i n e w i t h t h e scope o f t h e CVI.
T h e y are d ivided i n t o two broad, a n d somewha t i n ter-re lated
categories: P A I NT menus and V I D EO m e n us.
1) P A I NT menus are used p r i m a r i l y t o select opti o n s in t h e

g e n e r a t i o n a n d p a i n t i n g of s t i l l i m a ges, a n d ste n c i ls.
2) The VIDEO menus a re p r i m a rily i n te n d e d for t h e c o n t rol of

live vi deo i mages com i n g from c a m e ra or video tape.
T h e re i s a considerable degree o f overlap, as l ive and s t i l l

i m a g e s can be combi n e d i n a la rge n u mber of w a y s , a n d t h e r e a re
a number of functions which a re equally useful for both
ca tegories.
T h e menus are i n i t i a l l y e n tered by pressing the MENU b u t t o n .
This will d i splay t h e last menu t h a t w a s u s e d . Me nus a r e b l u e a n d
w h i t e 'pages' that a p p e a r o n the s c r e e n . F o r purposes of p r i n t i n g,
they appear i n black and white in this manual.
Mos t menus h ave the t i t l e a t the very top of the d isplay a n d a
numbered list of i tems t h a t may b e selected.
The re are two methods of selecting i tems within the menus, t h ese
a re:
1 ) The PEN and GR APHICS PAD

Apply firm pressure with s t y l u s o n GRAPHICS PAD and notice
t h e cursor appear on me n u . With the stylus, move cursor to item
number t h a t you wish t o select.
Lift the stylus from the pad, w i th the cursor o n t h e relevant

number: a white square w i l l a p pear a r o u n d that number�
s i g n i f y i n g selection of the item.
2 ) The PUSH BUTTONS

Choose any item in the menu b y pressin g the respective n u m bered
but t o n on the CVI control console. A white square will a p p e a r
a r o u n d the item n u mber t h a t you have selected i n the menu.
NOTE: The function o f t h e nu meric bu ttons changes when a

menu i s not d isplayed. For example, button reverts to '9
INVERT STENCIL.
C V I DESCRIPTION - 7
MENUS
A t t h e top o f every menu is a long horizon tal box with the name
o f the menu.
ODD
.#'
To t he ri g h t of the n a me are t hree s y m b o l s. When t h ese s y m b o l s

are selec ted b y t h e s t y l u s , or their eq u i v a lent b u t t o n s p u s hed , t h e
fo l l o w i n g w i l l occ ur:
o Exi ts MENU mode, a nd re t urns to the i mage. S a me effect

as pressing t he STOP b u t t on w h i le in MENU mode.
Ret u rns to t he previously d i s p l a yed men u. S a me effect a s

pres si ng t h e DRAW b u t t o n w h i le in MENU mode.
D Goes to the next menu. Same ef fect as pressing DRAW

LOCK button while in MENU mode.
Mos t menus also fea t u re a quick sele ction ba r at t h e bottom of t h e

pa ge.
--...
This 'q uick selec tion ba r' enables you to gain instant access to
any of the PAINT or VIDEO menus. Simply position the cu rsor
o v e r the n u mber of the required menu (either PAINT 0-9 or
V IDEO 0-9) and lift the stylus. If you can't remembe r the
req u i red n u mber, position the cursor over either PAINT or VIDEO
(depending on whether the required menu was a paint or real-time
f u n c tion), and lift the stylus. The PAINT MENUS or VIDEO
MENUS selections will be displa yed, which list the menus by
n a me in both categories.
The n u mber of the currently displa yed menu is high-lighted by
a thick w a l l box.
ODa
PAINT
8 - CVI DESCRIPTION
M E N US
For example, if you have a n image displayed and you w a n t to

select Spatter paint type t o use on that image:
i) Press MENU b u tton. If this

is the first time you ha ve
used the menus since
powering o n t h e CVI, the
following PAINT MEN U will
appear:
ii) To select PAINT TYPE move

cursor to Quic k selec t PAINT
2 or press b u t t o n n u mber 2,
(DRA W STEN CIL)/B
1 0 P AINT me n u s
1 0 V IDEO m e n u s
iii) W e now have d i s p l a y e d t h e

PAINT TYPE menu.
i) To return to screen image

move cursor here or p ress
STOP b u t ton
ii) To select Spa t t e r move

c u rsor here or press b u t ton 1
(DR A W COLOUR)
Paint Men u 2 displayed
CVI DESCRIPTIO N - 9
STENCILS
What are they?

A stenci l is a way of dividing the screen into two regions: the
reg ion where the stencil is On and the region where it is Off.
This divisi on allows opera tions to be made on one region of the
image without af fecting the other. A stencil is similar in concept
to a matte or key.
A stencil can be used to display two different types of picture
o n the sc reen a t the sa me ti me: one i n the On area and one i n the
Off a rea. The stencil itself is not d isplayed, but i t is used to
det ermine where on the screen the two types of picture are shown.
A stencil can a lso be used to protect a region i n the field store.
Once again, the stencil is not displayed but rather used as a mask
to protect a region in the field store either from drawing on the
GRAPHICS PAD or from freezing of an incoming live pictu re.
The CVI has a n internal stencil which is stored alongside t h e
colo urs of the field store. T h e internal stencil may be turned On
or Off a t each pixel loca tion. You can draw into the stencil pla n e
us i n g the GRAPHICS PAD, or y o u can wipe or change the
conte n ts of the stencil plane using the WIPE STENCIL button a n d
t h e options in t h e STENCIL WIPES menu (See Section 3 Paint
-
Me nu 8).
Any change that you make to the stencil will a ppear on the
screen as changes in the areas where the two types of picture are
displayed. For exa mple, assume that you have selected to display
th e live analog video input where the stencil is O n, and the still
con tents of the field store where the stencil is Off. (See Section 3
- DISPLAY CONTROL Menu). If the internal stencil is initially
clear (that is, Off at every pixel on the screen) then the CVI will
display the still image from the field store across the whole
screen. If you start to turn the stencil On, either by drawing or
wiping the stencil pla ne, then the live input will be displa yed on
top of the field store picture in the areas where you have turned
the stencil on. If you invert the stencil by pressing the INVERT
STENCIL button, then the On and the Off areas will swap. The
still picture will now be displayed in the areas prev iously
occu pied by the live input, and v ice versa.
NOTE: That the USE STENCIL button must be pressed for

a stencil to be active. If i t is not pressed then just the
selection for stencil Off will be d isplayed everywhere. In this
exa mple invert the stencil and just the stencil O n selection
will be shown.
The Internal stencil zooms, stretches and pans along w i t h the

Field Store pixels. This allows you to zoom up on a stencilled
area, or move it around.
110 - CVI DES CRIPTION I

STE NCILS
The CYI can generate a 'live' stencil using the Chromakey

feature. (See Section 3 - STENCIL SOURCE menu). The
chroma key stencil is generated continuously from the incoming
video signal, and is turned On where the picture is blue and Off
i n a l l other areas. The on and off areas from the chromakey
stencil can be used to display two different pictures as with the
internal stencil. For example, i f the i ncoming picture is of a
person dancing i n front of a blue wall then the chromakey stencil
can be used to replace the 'blue wall' areas of the picture w i t h
some o t h e r image, s u c h as a picture f r o m the field store. T h e
person then appears to be dancing against a backgro und f r o m the
field store.
The chromakey stencil is not stored in the CYI, but rather used
continuously for live stencil effects. The size, position and s hape
of the chroma key stencil are determined entirely from the
i ncomi n g v ideo signal - they are not affected by PAN, ZOOM or
STRETCH. This allows the backgrou n d to a chroma keyed figure
to be manipul ated independently of the foreground.
The In ternal and Chromakey stencils can be used
simultaneously to generate a mu lti-plane effect known as U n der
over. The CYI can also use a stencil generated by a n External
source, or a stencil Cascaded from a second CYI. (See Section 3 -
STENCIL SOURCE menu for details.)
The shape of the stencil can be displayed at any time simply by
selecting Show stencil in the menus. (See Section 3 - Paint Menu
4). When the DRAW STENCIL button is pressed the areas where
the stencil i s turned on w ill be i lluminated. This allows you t o see
the shape of the stencil area before you use i t or as you draw it.
CVI DESCRIPTION - 11
PRESETS
What are they?

One of the notable things about the CVI is the use of PRESETS.
What are these beasts?
We ll, a PRESET is something like a 'snapshot' of the CVI at a

particula r insta nt. A PRESET contains in formation about the
position of the ten SLIDER controls, the sixteen PUSH BUTTONS,
and most of the MENU settings. When the CVI is first turned on,
100 PR ESETS (00 to 99) conta in control information corresponding
to the PR ESETS described in Section 2 - PRESETS. This same
con dition can be reproduced by you simply by selecting the
appropriate PRESET.
NOTE: That a PRESET does not contain any pictorial

information. The resultant screen image will be the same
process used to generate the photo in the PRESETS QUICK
SELECTOR section, but applied to whatever video image is
presented to the CVI's inputs.
The PRESETS ha ve several functions:

I) To make it very easy to achieve advanced effects which
other wise would require a series of MENU selections.
2) To allow changing of effects without having to select items in
the MENUS. This is essential to live performance, as the
sudden appearance of a blue MENU image would generally be
an undesirable interruption.
3) To facilitate fast and accurate control of the CVI in demand i n g
situat ions, and e v e n situations which a r e not s o demanding.
4) To allow the recording of MENU selections and control
posi tions that create an effect that you may like and wish to
repeat a t some later stage.
T h is last point brings us to the next feature of PRESETS:

although the PRESETS start out containing 1 00 selected effects,
these PR ESETS can be changed or replaced with your own
cre ations at any time. (See Section 3 - PRESETS CONTROL
menu.) The CVI will then remember your PRESET until
instructed otherwise. You can re-create the effect simply by
selecti ng the PRESET that you stored it in.
The CVI will even remember your effect if you turn the power
off. So you can create an effect, store it as a PRESET, and come
back a month later - it will still be there. The original PRESETS,
as shown in Section 2, can be rega ined at any time. (See Section 3
- PRESETS CONTROL menu.) Ho wever, your PRESET will be
overwr itten, unless you either copy your PRESET to a di fferent
PRESET number, or save it to vid eo-tape/video-cassette. (See
Section 3 - SAV E AND RECALL menu.)
It is also easy to create a series of PRESETS that follow on
from one-another. This is use ful in live shows and post
production work, where a co-ordinated transition from one
situation to another may be requ ired. (See Section 3 - PRESETS
CONTROL menu under Program mode.)
112 - CVI DESCRIPTION I

SEQUE NCER
r What is it?
The CVI's SEQUENCER records a history of actions, and allows
accurate repe tition o f these. I t also allows 'ed i t i ng' or
mod i fication of this history, permitting you to hone a 'sequence'
of effects to perfection. The SEQUENCER also records a h istory
of a n y 'pa i n t ing' motions made. Th us, i f some uncorrectable
mistake is made in the process of 'painti ng' an image, the
sequence can be replayed u p till t h e point t h a t the mistake was
made, a n d the painting contin ued from there. This recor d i n g of a
p a i n t i n g i n progress is also useful as a form of animation.
The SEQUENCER does not record actual images, b u t r a t h e r the
process of making t h e i mage. I f t h e image is a modification of a n
i mage acqui red v i a the video input, this o r i g i n a l image w i l l h a v e
to b e duplicated f o r identical results. The f i r s t action i n a
sequence should be the clea r i n g of the screen i n some w a y , usually
using a Colour o r Stencil Wipe. I f this is not done, replaying the
sequence will result in the building o f t h e new image on t o p of
the old. To this end, the SEQ UENCER always records t h e c u r re n t
PRESET as the f i r s t step o f a sequence to give a consistent
starting point.
When a sequence is recorded, the CVI will remember i t until it
is changed, o r a new sequence is recorded. The CVI w i l l even
remember i t after the power i s swi tched off. If, however, y o u
desire to record a new sequence, b u t s t i l l b e able to regain t h e old
one later, the old sequence should be digitally saved onto video
tape using the SAVE AND RECALL menu, or to a Compu ter
using RS232. (See Section 3 - SAVE AND RECALL Men u , and
Section 4 - RS232 PORT CONTROL.)
Full details on how to operate t h e CVI's SEQUENCER are
given in Section 3 SEQUENCER Men u .
-
I C V I DESCRIPT I O N - 13 I
THE C U RSO R
H ow to use it
When operating the CVI, one of the most frequently used
con trols is the cursor. It is a versatile tool that i s used for a
v a rie ty of different operational functions. As a result i t differs
in appearance for each of t hese. The cursor i s u t ilised through
t h e stylus a n d GRAPHICS PAD, and a l lows you to determine the
position and colour of the various screen functions.
With the exception of the menu selection � , s tencil=> and

title cu rsors, a l l cursors are used with the PAINT METHODS.
Brush-shaped cursors are used with Draw or D o ts PAINT

MET HOD with the DRAW and DRAW LOCK buttons on. You
ca n position the Brush shape and determine its Colour prior to
p a i n ting, using the stylus and GRAPHICS PAD and the colour
con trols.
Word a n d pulsing-line cursors also allow positioning a n d colour

selection prior to using specific PAINT METHODS such as
c irc l �=> , rect.=>, fill=>, etc. The tip of the arrow points to the
pixel where painting will take place. Position is determined by
l i f t i n g the stylus off the GRAPHICS PAD at the desired point.
In certain examples, dependent o n the PAINT METHOD being

used, pulsing-line cursors are then used to determine the size and
position of shapes such as circles, ellipses, lines and recta n gles.
T h e shape is drawn when the stylus is, again, lifted from the pad.
NOTE: That some PAINT METHODS require multiple

operations of the stylus and GRAPHICS PAD to determine
position a n d size, and to paint shapes. To abort a PAINT
METHOD, press the STOP button before lifting the stylus from
the pad . .
The cu rsor can be used to position the desired starting point

before a n y painting begins. The c u rsor c a n be a brush shape, a
word or a pulsing line and will have the colour and translucency
c h a r a cteris tics set by the colou r con trols.
It is possible to zoom in for very accurate work when using the
cursor.
114 - CVI DESCRIPTION I

CO NCE PTUAL MODE L
The CVI i s capable o f generating visual effects ranging from

simple pain ted images to complex, t h ree-d i mensional PAINT and
VIDEO combina tions. Within the CVI there are effectively four
planes of in formation.
These will b e referred to as:

ANALOG - incoming v i d eo information not processed by
the CVI.
DIGIT AL - incoming v ideo i n forma tion converted to digital
form.
FIELD STORE - digital information that can upd ate a t one
field intervals.
STENCIL - a plane that has a 'keyi ng' and protection
function.
The FIELD STORE has two ways of receiving its i ma ges. It

can be constantly updated by incoming live video, which can then
be digitally controlled to create effects, or i t can be p a inted on by
the use o f COLOUR WIPES o r by using the GRAPHICS PAD.
Pai nted images can also be digitally cont rolled to give effects.
The STENCIL can be used as a keying and protection device
w i t h both pain ted and live video images. I f a wipe of h a l f
p i c t u r e area is created on the STENCIL p l a n e , t h i s 'half p i c t u re
area' stencil can be used to achieve combinations o f a n y t w o
images from the ANALOG, DIGITAL o r FIELD S T O R E planes.
This stencil can also be used to protect an a rea of t h e FIELD
STORE from updating. If using the FIELD STORE with l i v e
video, the STENCIL p l a n e can b e u s e d to protect a n area f r o m
u p d a t i n g as determined by the FREEZE CONTROL menu.
Similarly, i f using the FIELD STORE when painting, t h e
STENCIL plane c a n be u s e d t o protect p a i n ted a r e a s f r o m
updating i n the f o r m o f f u r t h e r PAINT functions.
STENCIL areas can be activated b y using the USE STENCIL
button a n d i n verted by selecting t h e I N VERT STENCIL b u t ton.
Stencil
Analo g Plane
Monitor
FUNCTIONAL O VE R VIEW
The following block dia g rams show the main aspects of the
CVI. For simplicity, functions and their destinations are shown
o n l y on the most general level as a n overview of system operation.
NOTE: All layout diagrams h ave areas of overlap,

e n h a ncing system capabil ities.
Physical Layout
r-- CONTROL
SLIDERS
�
-
CONTROL CONSOLE
EIJL1ctllLD
� COMPUTER
0
0 VIDEO
. MEMORY r----.
To MODltor
PUSH ,... ....
B UTTONS
�
f-
GRAPHICS
1 VIDEO INPUT 1 :
I
PAD
VIDEO INPUT :z
I
I AUDIO INPUT I
I
CASCADE INPUT I
Paint Layout
BRUSH SHAPE
COLOUR TYPE
COMPUTER
PAINT TYPE 0 VIDEO
SYMMETRY
.1 DRAWING 1 � MEMORY -----.
RECTANGLES
CIRCLES I 1 .wt
S TENCIL To
MODI tor
TEXTURES
etc etc
100
J TITLIN G I PRESETS
SIZE I I
FORMAT
MENU
SELECTION
116 - CVI DESCRIPTION

FUNCT I ONA L OVE RV I EW
Video Layout
1 2
I VIDEO
I I VIDEO
I
,
COMBINE
.. &
VIDEO
ANALOG
MEMORY/ .. To Monitor
DIGITAL
STENCIL
VIDEO
CONTROL VIDEO
COMPUTER
0
COLOURIZE
CHROMA KEY
FREEZE CONTROL
.4J11:
AUDIO
etc etc
100 MENU
PRESETS SELECTION
Stencil Layout
VIDEO 1
CHROMA
KEY
VIDEO 2
VIDEO
MEMORY I---__� To Monitor
DRAWING
STENCIL
PLANE
INVERT
STENCIL
MENU
USE
SELECTION
STENCIL
STENCIL ON/OFF
STENCIL SOURCE
STENCIL WIPE
CVI DESCRIPTIO N - 17
CONNECT I N G THE CV I
When you receive your CVI, i t should have the following i tems:
1 CVI ELECTRONICS UNIT

1 CVI CONTROL CONSOLE WITH 2 METRE
CONNECTING CABLE
I STYLUS
I MANUAL
I POWER CORD
There are a lso available optional longer connecting cables, in

l e n g th s of 5, 1 0 and 20 metres. Contact your distributor.
The CVI has been designed to b e compatible w i t h a wide range
o f video configurations, from home video equipment through low
b a n d U-matic to broadcast compatible high-band situations. I t c a n
be used for post-production effects generation, l i v e effects d u r i n g
v id e o t a p i n g, fully live operation a t concerts, or f o r s t i l l i m a g e
g e n e r a t i o n a n d modification.
To accommodate the wide range of applications there a r e a
l a rge n u mber of connectors on the back of the CVI. For simpler
a p p l ica tions, most of these can be ign ored. Select the
configuration w h ich most suits your requirements from the
co n ne c t i o n diagrams i n this section. These are provided only as
a n i n dication of how the CVI could be connected. Different
con f i g u r a tions are possi ble and will depend on the installation
and a p plication. If i n doubt about t h e correct configuration for
yo ur i nstalla tion, a n experienced video technician or engineer
should be consul ted.
The CVI synchronizes to the VIDEO I i n put, which should
either be a normal composite video signal, o r colour black. The
C V I does not act as a time-base corrector, b u t neither does i t
r e q u i r e o n e . T h e output w i l l be in sync w i t h the VIDEO 1 i n p u t,
a n d t h e i n p u t to VIDEO 2 must be externally gen-Iocked where
used.
NOTE : The I n ternal PAL/NTSC coder is not Broadcast

rated. To use the CVI in a broadcast situation, an external
Coder a n d SPG must be used, i n combination w i t h the CVI's
RGB ou tputs. A suggested configura tion is given i n this
section.
NOTE : RGB MO NITO RS - The CVI can be u sed with RGB

moni tors for optimum picture quality. Ensure that the
mo nitor accepts analog RGB in puts as there are a number of
R GB moni tors for personal computers with dig ital RGB i n p u ts.
These m o n itors ca n o n l y d i sp la y ei g h t colours a nd so are not
com pat i ble with t he CVI.
NOTE: PAL phase on the CVI composite video o u t p u t is n o t

l o c k e d to the i n p u t PAL p h a s e o n CVI-03P R e v 4 a nd R e v 4 A
PAL v i deo boards. T h e u s e of the optional chroma l o c k board
C V I-07P is recommended, especia l l y when the CVI is used in
conju nction w i th a video m i xer.
118 - CVI DESCRIPTION

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
r Power
VIDEO I &
�
system sync - VIDEO I in Video out -
{
input
/
Red I in Red out
Video
RGO I
Green I in Green out outputs
inputs
Blue out ..
Blue I in
Sync out
{
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 2 in
input
Red 2 in
RGB2
- Green 2 in
inputs
Blue 2 in
Stencil
External Stencil Key out
out
Key in in
CVI Digital Digital .. CVI

- cascade out cascade
cascade cascade in
External
- Subcarrier in
suiJcarrier
Microphone
- Audio in
or line
Camera
r trigger or
other switch
-
Remote
switch in
Expansion RS232C
port port
� �
r
Optional Communications
expansion to external
modules computers
CONNECT I N G T H E CVI
T h e r e are a number of option NTSC �

s w i tches a n d adjustments availabl e.
�
BRIGHT
These can be accessed by unclipping CONT
t h e front panel of the ELECTRONICS D E CO D E R I
UNIT ( t u r n the 4 screws on the front

j
IIUE
a q u a rter t u r n a n t i-clockwise). The SAT
adjustments are a long the edge of the AUDIO

SENSITIVITY
V i d e o board.
�
Il R I G Il T
When the CVI leaves the factory, i t

COST
w i l l be s e t f o r composite video o n DECODER 1
V I DEO I a n d VIDEO 2 inputs. Change
�
IIUE
s w i tches 1 5 a nd/or 1 6 to use RGB �AT
i n p u ts. SUBCARRIER FINE
A l l i n p u ts will initially have 7 5 PHASE ADJUST
SWI
W 3
OFF ON
O h m termina tion selected. I t i s not _ ON
n ecessa ry to use termination p l u gs. If S W I /8 I 'i. o u r c � c o m p o s i t e I I
�:
Video input RGB Video
SW I /7 V i d e o i n p u l I s o u r c e c o m p os i l e Il G B 1 \'ideo 2
y o u w i s h to loop-through on a n y ' SWI/6 S u b c a r r i e r sou rce E :\: I s u b c l i P (1)
I n lernal
SWI/5 Subcarrier phut coarse adj. o Degrees 180 deg (l)
i n p u t, t u r n off the appropriate SWI/4 U n used
S I/ Subcarrier input lerminate 75 o h m s
termination switch. SWI/l Stencil input terminate 75 ohms
S lI' l f I Audio input I c ud f a n g e l.on lIigh
_ ON
�:
SWl/8 Video I I npul l e r m i n a l e 750hms
SWl/7 Video 2 I n put l e r m i n a l e 75 o h m s
SWl/6 Red I Input terminate 75 o h m s
SWl/5 G re e n I Inpul t e r m i n a t e 75 o h m s
SWl/4 Blue 1 Input terminate 75 ohms
S lI' l / J Red 2 Inpul lerminale 75 ohms
SW2/l G re e n 2 I n fl u l l e r m i n a l e 75 ohms
SWl/ l Blue 2 I n fl u l l e r m i n a l e 7S ohms
�
SW2
RVI
RV2
)
B r i g h l ness
Cont rast
F o r composite inputs only
PAL
i .e . no effect on RGB inputs
RV3 Colou r
5 a t u ration
Audio Input
RV4
Gain
Composite video out 8ubc arrier
phase fine adj ustment.
5 \\, 1
OFF ON
_ ON
5\\' 1 / 8 V ideo i n p u t 1 source composite RGB 1 Video I
�!
(1)
SWI/7 V i d e o jOn p u t 1 s o u rce c o m p o s i l e RGB 2 Video 2
5 \\' 1 / 6 Subcarrier source Exl sube I / P I n lerna 1
5 11'1 / 5 S u b c a r r i e r p h as e coarse adj. o Degrees 1 80 deg (2)
5 11' 1 / 4 U n used
5WI/3 Subcarrier input terminate 7S ohms
SWI/2 Stencil input terminate 75 o h m s
5 \\, 1 / 1 A u d i o i n p u t level range lo" High
_ ON
5W2/8 V ideo I I n p u t t e r m i n a t e 75 ohms
�j
5W2/7 V i d eo 2 I n p u t terminate 7S o h m s
SW2/6 Red I I n p u t termi n a t e 75 o h m s
5W2/5 G reen I I n p u t t e r m i n a t e 75 o h m s
5W2/4
5W2/3
5W2/2
Blue I
Red 2
Input terminate
I n p u t term i n a t e
G re e n 2 I n p u t t e r m i n a t e
75 0 h m s
75 ohms
75 o h m s
�
SW2/ 1 Blue 2 Input terminate 75 o h m s
5W2
1 20 - CVI DESCRIPTION
TU RN I NG ON T H E CV I
I f this is the first time your CVI has been used, and i t is n o t
yet connected, t h e n you s h o u l d r e f e r S e c t i o n 1 - CONNECTING
THE CVI. Once connected, i t may be turned on by pus h i n g the
power switch on the front left-hand side ELECTRONICS UNIT.
The electronics unit ma y be installed in a differen t room from the
CONTROL CONSOLE.
I II
•
• ,
<---
o o
o
�II IIIII III
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D C -oI=e:-
When t h e power is t u rned o n t h e CONTROL CONSOLE w i l l

light up. The PRESET N UMBER indicator will read 0 0 , and
lights i n the BUTTONS a n d SLIDERS will come on. The image
on the screen will be t h e Fairlight logo overlayed on t h e incoming
video signal (or black, i f there is no signal inpu t). T h is is factory
PRESET 00. See Section 2 - PRESETS.
The CVI w i l l remember PRESETS and SEQUENCER
information when the power i s turned o f f. These will be as they
were . when the power was on, with the exception o f P RESET 00,
which will always turn on i n the 'logo' condi t ion.
The CVI will not remember actual picture i n format i o n w h e n
p o w e r is o f f . I f you w i s h to keep a still i mage f o r later work, t h e
CVI m a y be l e f t o n as p o w e r consumption is only 40 wat ts.
Alternatively, the image may be saved digitally onto video-tape or
video-cassette. See Section 3 - SAVE A N D RECALL.
I CVI DESC R IPTIO N - 21

CO N F I G U RAT I O N D I AG RAM S
Low-band live field operation
VIDEO OUT VIDEO 1 IN
Composite
monitor
, - - - - - -- - - -,
I
I
I
I
I I GEN-LOCK VIDEO OUT - VIDEO IN
I
I VIDEO OUT LOOP VIDEO OUT
I
VIDEO 2 IN
OUT
I
I VCR or VTR
I
I Professional Video
Camera
IL _ _ _ _ _ ____ �
I LJ DO D DLlDLJ D D D D D __ """'"----
CVI
CO N F I G U RAT I O N D I AG RAMS
Low- band live stud io use
-
r----'-_ ��C� RA�CCU CABLE
�E�
AM
D
....�
... J
o o
Composite
CCU Mon i tor
o o
Professional Video
Camera
VIDEO O U T - VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
VCR or VTR
o 00 0 EJOLJEJ EJ EJ LJ EJ EJ ----"""-
CVI
I CY I DESCRIPTION - 23 I
CO N F I G U RATION D I AG RAMS
Recommended configuration for slide creation
CAMERA CCU CABLE /
0 o RGB
CCll Monitor
·0 o
P r o fessional Video 0
r.l
Camera 8 RED OUT RED IN
I
-
>
� 0 III
GREEN OUT GREEN IN
I
I -
I I I
III
...
� 0 0
r.l BLUE OUT - BLUE IN I
8
>
\ I
o DO D DDDO D D DDtJ
CVI
------"",,-
� Camera
All screen images in this manual were taken using this

configuration. Better results may be obtained using a film
recorder where available, but ensure that the recorder handles at
least 4096 colours, and that it is compatible with standard RGB or
composite video.
.� � -,
o �
c:: t:!
>-3 t':I 00 <
0 o ....
c 1=1-
"'l nI
o
� 0 c
...
'<
...... "'C'
t:! C
t':I ...
0
n
o
..........
::s
0 ::l
1_ 3 LQ OQ
iz,· \ O'
[J . D'O' � C
L O O P OUT EXT . VID EO IN ...
Cl, l l� i I S»
0 ...
II 0:0 1 ' ,
[] \ SUB CARRIER o·
::s
01
1rrF?
Cl · I I� · : '.. RED OUT - RED IN
C),- SYNC
�
...
CJ <" l nn I, G REEN OUT - G REEN IN 00 C"
"'d ...
B LANKING
1:lLI C1 o
� S»
< i ..... BLUE OUT - BLUE IN
B:-, 1 [iii iiiiQD
DO:- I Q.
1-1 n n
D Ii.....c:IJ I- 0 BURST GATE
1=1- S»
I:
ft» en
� ,' n-aJ- "'l ...
C)\ , IIJD 'I , PAL ID ENT
n
\ (PAL ONLY)
o
3
"'C'
A I I 0 0 S»
...
_.
C"
-
tD
n
r--
0 0 S»
-<
-
� "'C'
"'C'
t:::I -
� n'
00
S»
n ...
_.
::t' <:
- o
"CI 8 ::s
t':I en
-.., o
o o
z c::
>-3
N
'Jl
CON FI G U RATI ON DIAG RAMS
Possible configuration for

VCR o r VTR VCR or VTR post- production facility
using composite video
REF
SYNCS
Time Base Time Base IN
Co r r e c t o r Co r r e c t o r
REF
SYNCS
IN
0 0
REF 0 0
SYNCS Video Mixer

( B LACK BURST) 0 0
0 0
PREVIEW
VIDEO OUT VCR or VTR
OUT
OR
�o �
o
o o
IiIl
�
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO 1 IN > �
VIDEO IN
(/
CVI �
::>
�
::>
�
::>
//
0 0 0
SYNCS � t:I IZI
I I
EXT. REF SYNC etc. � IZI
0
VIDEO IN
Composite
o o o 0 Monitor
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL �
.. '
o SPG o o C o de r 0
1 26 - C V I DESCRIPTION
CO N F I G U RATI O N D I AG RA M S
L ive o peration at concerts: minimum system
Composite Proje c t i o n
Mo n i to r TV
Eo<
::>
o
o
r...:l
Q
Professional Video :>
Camera
RED O U T - RED IN
z G REEN OUT - G REEN IN

....
BLUE OUT - BLUE IN
VIDEO OUT SYNC OUT - SYNC IN
o DO D D DOO tJ D D D D --'
CVI
I CVI D E S C RIPTION - 27
�
00
Possible c onfi g urati on for la rger scale live p e rfo r m an c e or studio use
n
<:
i0oi
VIDEO OUT - VIDEO 1 IN
t:;j
�
00
�
RD E OUT - RED 1 IN
.1.... : ri_ Jd
n
�"" r"f'"
" G REEN OUT - G REEN 1 IN
r
i0oi
"'r:I
- CCU CAMERA CABLE
o-j
- I�
ill BLUE OUT - BLUE 1 IN
\..J-u
0
Z
=s
1
)J
Professional Video
I
til 0 Camera 0 Projection
�
'"
l\/0
> =
CCU TV
00
0
\
;:II
� 0 o r VCR
i
Cl
;:II
�
I
0 Eo<
c:: l"l ::l GENLOCK IN
Z -< 0 VIDEO IN
t::j 0
SYNC RED OUT - RED 2 IN
�
'"
Q GREEN OUT - GREEN 2 IN
>
f
-- CCU CAMERA CABLE
BLUE OUT - BLUE 2 IN
1=-'11
111
\....r----u �
r ,
,
, I
I
OUT
..
I ,
I ,
Professional Video I I
L J GENLOCK IN
Camera
!.-
r RED OUT - RED IN
, ,
I CCU ...-
_
I , SYNC
PERFORMER S I I GREEN OUT - GREEN IN
I
DELAY -, I
L rJ
I
LINE BLUE OUT - BLUE IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN - VIDEO OUT
9000s
SYNC OUT
approx.
•
SYNC IN
, r .,
., • .. 1 ..
SYNC
-
(BLACK BURST )
Video Mi xer
UUUHI U
LJ LJ O OI:JOotl tJO OIJ!J
CVI
__ """'_
_D� L I
Projection
VIDEO OUT
TV or
RGB monitor
J (J (
CON F I GURATI O N DIAG RAM S
Exa mple of live configuration u sing two CVI ' s

allowing cascade operation a n d live mixing between effects
D
VIDEO 1 IN
Composite
SYNCS
Monitor
G EN L O C K
LOOP
VIDEO 2 IN
THROUGH
o DO 00000 00000
Composite
_____
Mo n i t o r
D I G ITAL
D
CAS CADE OUT
VIDEO 1 IN
SYNCS
G ENLOCK
VIDEO O U T
D I G ITAL
/'
SYNCS
��HUHH �
o 00 OOOOD,D OOOEJ _____
CVI
SPG
"'" SYNCS VIDEO I N
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
Time base
Proj e c t i o n
corrector VIDEO IN
TV
VIDEO
V C R o r VT R MIXER
VIDEO VIDEO
OUT OUT
I CVI D ESCR IPTIO N - 29

CO N F I G U RATI O N D I AG RAM S
U se of advanced sync with external coder

to match vid eo picture position with ca mera source
0 o
OPTI ONAL
SPG
0 o
EXT REF
SYNC etc
VID EO IN
VID EO OUT
OPTIONAL
0 o
EXT REF
V I D E O IN
( camera
or TBC
)
V i d eo S o u r c e
Co d e r
0 o
(from mixer etc .)

VIDEO OUT ...
Z
IXl
I VIDEO OUT
Eo<
::>
LOOP VID EO 1 0
THROUGH IN IXl
OR
o DO D DDDD D D DDD -----'

CVI
VIDEO OUT
UNMODIFIED
VIDEO OUT
o o
Delay line
o o
The C V I input to output delay is approximately 0.7

microseconds for RGB to RGB, 0.95 m i c ro sec o nd s for RGB to
composite, and 1 .3 microseconds for composite to composite video.
A variable delay line is recommended.
A delay of one field is also present for some effects.
Compensating for this is not recommended, as the field delay is
not preset in all effects.
CO N F I G U RAT I O N D I AG RA M S
Stand-alone system
Composite
Monitor RGB
or Monitor
VCR
�
Z Z
Z
fil fil 0
.... ....
Q fil �
Eo< fil � Z
� � 0
..:I ><
III
r 0
0
I I I
I:Il
I
fil
OR E-< Eo< Eo< Eo<
� � � �
Q 0 0 0 0
> Q Z fil 0
....
fil fil � Z
� fil ..:I ><
� III I:Il
0
.
...
�UU H U U
LI LI D [JDLlLl O O O O [J O
�UH H U U
LI 00 O D O O LJ O OOOO
CVI CVI
The CVI may be used without video inputs. I n this mode, only
the PAINT facilities are available.
I CVI DESCRIPTIO N - 31
CO N F I G U RAT I O N D I AG RA M S
U se with domestic video equipment
e[m
DOD
CCC
Domestic
Video
Camera
TV Set
VID EO OUT
AERIAL
VID EO OUT - VID EO IN
VID EO 1 IN
RF OUT
��. � � ��
LJ D O D Or:JODOEJ[][]O �
VCR or VTR
CVI
1 32 - C V I DESCRIPTION I
CO N FI G U RAT I O N DIAG RAM S
Ta pe to ta pe dub with CVI p rocessing
VCR or VTR
VID E O OUT
TV S e t
AERIAL
VID E O
INPUT
VID EO 1 IN VID E O OUT RF O UT
VCR or VTR
.
D DDotJtJtl[]Db
.." � ," .
\=, [] DO � "
CVI
I CVI DESCRIPTION - 33 I
r
Paint exercises ............................................................ 1
Video exercises ........................................................... 7
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
C o l o u r presets ............................................................. 33
Quick s e l e c t i o n presets .............. ......................... ....... 41
T h i s section is designed to take y o u quickly th rough some of

the CVI PAI NT faciliti es. It is in tended to introduce the range of
possi bili ties that the CVI offers i n the PAINT mode. For a
pr ecise description of all pai n t facili ties, see Section 3 PAINT -
ME NUS. It is necessary a t this point to have a CVI connected and

rea dy to use. For connection deta ils, see Section I -
CONNECTING THE CVI.
Functions may be combined in numerous ways to produce new

and unique ef fects and i t is beyond the scope of this ma nual to
show all possibilities. However this section should give you a
gene ral acquai n tance with PAINT. The enqui ring mind will soon
discover how to crea tively combine the availa ble fun ctions.
Please rea d the text closely and follow the instructions.
PA I N T E X E RC I S ES
1) Wi th t h e power Off, move the following control panel slid ers:
i) HUE, SATURATION and VALUE up to maximum

ii) HORIZONTAL PAN, VERTICAL PAN to mid-position
iii) STRETCH to mid position
i v ) ZOOM down to mi n i mum.
2) Turn the power On. O n the left-hand side of the control

panel, t h e PRESET nu mber will be 00. Observe the monitor
screen. You should see the r a inbow-coloured Fa irlight logo.
Beh i n d this i s a live image from camera (if you have con nected a
video camera).
3) Move the following sliders: HORIZONTAL PAN, VERTICAL

PAN, STRETCH and ZOOM. See how the Fairlight logo moves
and changes i n shape. These are the move ment controls. Return
the controls to their neutral posi tions (listed i n 1 above) to stop
a n y motion.
4) With y o u r finger n a i l or the stylus provided, draw o n the

GRAPHICS PAD. A bright orange line should appear on the
screen responding to your movements. While d ra w i ng, move the
HUE s l i der. All colours from the spectrum should be seen. Move
the PAN a n d ZOOM sliders. See how i t is possible to colour the
smallest areas (pixels). R e t u r n the PAN sliders to their central
positions to stop sliding movements.
5) The DRAW and D R A W LOCK bu tton should be l i t . Press the

DRA W LOCK button. The DRAW and DRAW LOCK lights
shoul d exti nguish, and d r a w i n g will stop. Instead , a Cursor in the
shape of the brush will a p pear. While still drawing on the pad,
hold down the DRAW button. Drawing will appear on the screen
for as long as you hold down the DRAW button. This method
allows you to re-position the cursor without messi ng u p your
drawing. P ress the D R A W LOCK bu tton. DRAW a n d DR A W
LO CK buttons s h o ul d l i g h t a n d d r a w i n g w i l l be continuous.
6) Continue d rawing and move the SATURATION slider. This

adds wh i teness to the colour selected by the HUE slider. If HUE
is on red, then moving SATURATION will gradually change the
col our from red to pink to w h ite. A d d i n g w h i teness gives the
softer, pastel colours. Push SATURATION slider back u p to top.
I GETTING STA RTED 1 1 -

PAI NT E X E RC I S ES
7) Mo ve the VALUE slider. This adds blackness to the colour

selected by the HUE slider. If HUE is on green, then moving
SATURATION will gradually change colour from green to khaki
to black. Adding blackness gives more earthy, tertiary colours.
8) By now, your screen is probably full of experimental squiggles.

To clea r the screen, select the next preset, PRESET 0 1 . To do
this,
i) press PRESET button

ii) press DRAW LOCK button (doubles as next PRESET
selector)
The screen should be completely black ready for more drawing

and preset nu mber should show 0 1 .
If y o u wanted t o return to the previous preset, 00,

ii) press DRAW button (doubles as previous PRESET selector)
We will stay with PRESET 01 for the moment. The PRESETS

change selections in the MENUS and console controls. PRESETS
do this for you instantly and accura tely for any possible
combination of menu selections. It is not necessary to display any
menu, as lo ng as you know the effect of the PRESET. There are
1 00 factory PRESETS stored in the CVI and a list of them
a p pears a t the end of this section.
9) Drawing now will produce random coloured car sha pes. Rate
of randomness is set by the RATE 1 slider. At minimum setting,
colour w i ll change slowly as you continue drawing. Notice that
by drawing fast, the car sha pes are not joined. This is the Dots
Pain t Method and simulates tapping ra pidly on the GRAPHICS
PAD. The car is the current Brush shape.
Try a different Brush shape.
P ress MENU button.
The blue and wh ite menu is displayed. This particular menu
should be the PAINT MENU, the main menu for paint effects. If
some other menu has already been selected, press the MENU
button until the PAINT MENU is displayed. Touching the
G R A P HICS PAD now produces a little round ball. This is the
Cu rsor a n d can be moved around to make selections.
Move the cu rsor onto the number 1 opposite B rush shape and
l i f t your st ylus Off the GRAPHICS PAD. The display will change
to t he BRUSH SHAPE menu. Here are 54 d ifferent Brush shapes
to ch oose from. Position the cursor over the Brush shape desired
and lift the stylus from the GRAPHICS PAD. The chosen Brush
shape will appear in the large box at the top left-hand corner.
12 - GETTING STARTED I
PA I N T E X E RC I S E S
Press STOP button

The MENU will be replaced by the previous drawn image and
any new drawing will be with the new Brush shape
To clear all drawing press PRESET then STOP. This re-selects
the current PRESET, in this case 01.
10) Select PRESET 04. To do this:

ii) press button number 0 (doubles as COLOURIZE)
iii) press button nu mber 4 (doubles as WIPE COLOUR)
This method means any PRESET number may be chosen in any

order.
Wipe the screen to White by pressing the WIPE COLOUR
button.
PRESET 04 uses a thin Brush shape and Opaque colour type.
We're going to use a Translucent colour type instead of Opaque.
Press MENU button.
Along the bottom of the screen are two rows of numbers.
These are quick menu selectors and correspond to the l O P AINT
menus and 1 0 VIDEO menus.
Move cursor onto the upper number 0 and lift the stylus. This
will select the COLOUR TYPE menu. Select Translucent by
moving the cursor to the number 2 and lifting. Easy, isn't it?
Push STOP button to return to image.
Push SATURATION and VALUE sliders up to top position.
Push COLOUR DEPTH slider to slightly above the midway notch
position and draw. Notice how transparen t drawing becomes and
how, if you draw over the same spot repeatedly, the area becomes
darker. The HUE, SA TURA TION and VALUE sliders change the
colour of the Translucent paint� If COLOUR DEPTH is set to 0
then the paint becomes totally transparent and no drawing is
visible. As COLOUR DEPTH slider is moved toward the + sign,
colour drawn is more solid until it finally becomes opaque.
11) We'll draw connecting straight lines by selecting Rubber band

in the PAINT METHOD menu. Press the MENU button. Move
cursor onto quick select Paint Menu O.
P A I NT
VI D E O
When PAINT METHOD menu is displa yed, select Rubber band

by moving the cursor onto the number 2 opposite Rubber band,
and lift the stylus. Press the STOP button to return to the drawn
image.
I GETTING STARTED - 3 I
PAI NT E X E R C I S ES
i) Position cursor to the point where you want the straight

line to start. Lift the stylus. This is the starting point.
ii) Press the stylus on the GRAPHICS PAD again. A thin

pulsating line will join the two points. Move the cursor
arou nd. The thin line will follow your movements, like a
stretched rubber band.
iii) L i ft the stylus. A straight line will be drawn using the

programmed B r u s h shape. The end of that line will be
the starting point of the next line, if you draw again.
iv) To set a new starting point, press the STOP button.
v) You may notice that some d iagonal lines have somewhat

jagged edges. These can be smoothed out. Return to the
PAINT METHOD menu 'a nd move the cursor to the
DEJAG box, which should light up. Return to the image
by pressing STOP. Repeat steps i) to iv) again. The
edges of the lines will be blended into the backgrou nd,
giving a much smoother appearance. Note that the lines
are drawn more slowly when DEJAG is active.
1 2 ) Another paint method is Rectangle, whereby a rectangle of

any size may be drawn. Return to menu (press MENU button).
PAINT METHOD menu should be displayed, as it was the last
menu used. Select Rectangle.
i) Press stylus on GRAPHICS PAD. A cursor saying rect.=>

will appear and follow your stylus movements. Posi tion
the arrow tip where you want a corner of the rectangle to
a ppear. Lift the stylus.
ii) Press stylus on GRAPHICS PAD again. A pulsating

dotted rectangle will appear, varying in length and width
as the stylus is moved.
iii) Lift the stylus. A rectangle will be drawn. This p rocess

may be repeated continually. Good for rapidly
constructing bar graphs, etc.
13) Le t's cover (wipe) the screen with a repeating pattern, a

text ure.
i) Press MENU bu tton. Using the quick select bar at the

bottom of the screen, move cursor onto Paint Menu 7 -
COLOUR WIPES, that is, here.
PA I NT EXERC I S ES
r ii) We should now see the COLOUR WIPES menu. T h i s

m e n u chooses w h i c h method w i l l 'wi pe' t h e display. Move
cu rsor onto the n u mber 2 opposite Texture and lift the
stylus. This selects Textureas a colour w i pe. Which
texture?
iii) Us i n g the quick select bar a t t h e bottom of the screen,

move cursor onto Pa int Me nu 3 - TEXTU RES
iv) The TEXTURES menu has 54 Textures fro m which to

choose. Posi tion the c u rsor over texture desired and l i ft
the stylus from the GRAPHICS PAD. Chosen Texture
will a p pear i n the l a r g e b o x in the top left-hand corner.
v) Press STOP button to re-display screen i mage. Now press

WI PE COLOUR button. Chosen Texture
will wipe the
screen from left to right. Move the HUE, SATURATION
an d VALUE slid ers as the wipe progresses for different
colour shades. P r ess the STOP bu tton to stop t h e w i pe.
1 4) Various areas of the screen may be defined as being

different to normal drawn areas. These areas are known as
stencils and are useful if you w a n t protect an area of screen, for
instance to change the background but not the stenci l led a rea.
Another possi bility is to copy o n e stencilled area to a d i f ferent
part of the screen. The CVI will allow live video to be seen
through a stencilled area surrounded by still i mage. Also, ch roma
keyed a reas may be used as a stencil. Stencils can be defi ned in
several ways but the one we will use is the Internal
stencil sou rce
where you draw the stencilled area.
Whenever the DRAW STENCIL button i s lit, you a re drawing
o n the stencil pla ne. To w i pe t h e stencil, press the WIPE
STENCIL button.
1 5) We are now going to copy o n e part of an image to another.
i) Press the WIP E STENCIL button. The screen display will

not change.
ii) Ensure DRAW STENCIL button is lit. I f it i s not, press

it, and i t will light. Drawing now will define a shape in
the stencil plane as well as p a i n t i n g onto the field store.
iii) Draw a small, identifiable o bject i n one corner of the

screen. Select PRESET 06 a s in step 10 previously. The
effect you now observe is called a Colour wipe and is
u s e f u l for c r ea t i n g b a c k grou nds. Mov e t h e H U E ,
SATURATION and VA LUE sliders for band ing effect.
I GETT I N G STARTED 5 \ -
PAI N T E X E R C I S ES
iv) N o t ice how your drawing remains intact. This is because

i t is drawn both into the stencil plane and the field store.
The stencil protects your drawing from the Colour wipe.
Press the WIPE COLOUR button again for another wipe.
See COLOUR WIPES Men u in Section 3.
v) Now select PRESET 07. The area that is stencilled

becomes brighter.
v i) Press stylus on GRAPHICS PAD. A cursor saying from=>

appears. Posi tion from=> with the stylus such that the
a rrow tip points into your previously drawn stencilled
object. Lift stylus.
vii) Press stylus on GRAPHICS PAD again. A cursor saying

to=> appears. Position to=> with stylus such that the
arrow tip points t o another part of screen. Lift styl us.
v i i i ) Dra w n object will be copied to new posi tion.
i x ) Repea t steps vi) to viii) to make further copies of the

original object.
16) F in a l l y . we can title our masterpiece.
i) Press MENU bu tton and select Paint Menu 9 TITLE -
EDIT.
ii) A n alphanumeric style keyboard should now be seen.
Mov e cursor onto any of the 62 characters and l i ft stylus.
Chosen character will appea r i n the titling area. It may
be necessary to clear the title area. Just hit the CLEAR
box twice on the screen. Notice that lower and upper case
L
letters a re available v i a SHIFT and OCK . RUBOUT
deletes the last character i n your title.
iii) When titling is fi nished. press STOP button to return to

display.
i v ) Press TITLE button. Now press stylus on GRAPHICS

PAD. A cursor saying title will appear. Mov e the word
where you want the title to appear. Lift the stylus.
Your title will be printed on the image.
There are many other PAINT facilities available. For a full

d e s c r i p t ion of each of these. see Section 3 under PAINT MEN US.
1 6 GETTIN G STARTE D I
-
V IDEO EXE RCIS ES
If you h ave rea d the previous s e c t i o n - P A I NT E X E R CI S ES -

then y o u're read y for VIDEO EXERCISES. We w i l l work t h rough
s o m e exa mples, and see how P A I NT and V I DEO overla p. The
a bili t y to select PR ESETS and MENUS i s a ssumed.
A c a mer a or other so u r c e of video i mage must be connec ted to
the C V I for the video effects. It is a lso desira ble to have a
ch r o m a - k e y blue b a c kgro u n d , to e n h a nce m a n y live effects. In
fact, all references to live i m a ge in this section a ssume the use of
c h r o m a - key. The CVI can be used to es tablish c h ro m a - k e y leve ls
by u s i n g P R ESET 99. See Section 3 SETUP Men u. If you in tend
-
u s i n g c h r o m a key, the following may be hel p f u l .
Chroma-Key Setup Suggestions

Have t h e a r t ist's m o d e l i n f r o n t of a med i u m blu e f l a t , non
reflec tive background (usu ally a wall o r sc reen).
E n s u r e a d e q u a t e lighting, such t h a t no s h a d ows fall o n t h e
b a c k g r o u n d . This would require a t lea s t two f l o o d l i g h t s e i ther
side of the subject. However, too much floodlighting can result in
'hot spo ts' o n the chroma key background. These areas c a n n o t be
keyed out, so t he floodlights would have to be re-a rranged.
The subject should not wear any blue clothing as it will
'disappear' on screen. This can be used, however, to create
e f fects.
Use PRESET 99 and the HUE, S ATURATION and VALUE
sliders on t h e control console to ' k e y out' t h e blue background .
See Section 3 SETUP Menu.

-
Several video e f fects require the video image to be movi ng, in

order to see the effect.
General Overview
The CVI can accept up to two video i nputs, the cascaded

ou t p u t and stencil o u tput of a nother CVI, audio input for music
control of effects, and remote control trigger. Therefore, many
permutations of live CVI e ffects exist which are not covered in
this section. However, enough effects will be discussed here to
enable you to discover new t h ings to do with the CVI w h i c h even
we haven't thought of yet.
IGETTING STARTED - 7 I
VIDE O EXE RC I S E S
Basic live video effects include:

'-
* free z i n g and strobing of live images

* re al-time colourizing from subtle to extreme
* i m a ge mirroring and overlap
* l i ve image behind, in front o r between still images
* m u l t i p l e video feedback-type i mages (feedback is not used)
* chroma-key effects and i nversions
* combinations of digital and unaffected analog i mages
* m u l t i p l e exposure, mosaic, ghost, shatter, slow sca n, smear,
t e x t u re, trailing effects
* k e y wipe, disintegrate between video I and v ideo 2
,
* music controlled colours, colo uri zing, strobing

* i n stant PRESET switching between combin ations of effects
* cascading of two o r more CVI's for mul tiplying effects
* SEQUENCER for controlled effects switching
* c o n trol by another compu ter
Please rea d the text closely and follow the instructions.
1) When the CVI is first switched on, the Fairlight logo appears
o n t h e stencil plane with live video behind it. Press t h e WIPE
STENCIL button. This should leave just live analog v ideo.
2) S e l e ct PRESET 30. This effect on live video is called

pixelatioll o r the mosaic effect. Try the ZOOM and STRETCH
s l i d ers.
3) N o w press the FREEZE button. The live video image should

be f r o ze n . I t can now be treated with PAINT effects such
c o l o u r i ng, cu t-and-paste etc. ZOOM and STRETCH now work i n
a d i f fe r e n t way.
4) S e l e c t PR ESET 3S. This is a strobe effect, a n ex tension o f t h e

F R E E Z E but ton effect.
Adjust the RATE 2 slider and see the strobe rate cha nge.
P r e s s t h e ME NU b u tto n and select V id eo Me n u 3 - FREEZE
C O N T R O L , o n t he quick select m e n u ba r .
O b s e r v e t h a t S t r o b e has been selected (by PRESET 38).

I f y o u h a v e a n a u d i o s o u rce c o n n e c t e d to t h e A u d i o i n p u t of
t h e C V I , t h e n s e l e c t M u s i c control and press S TO P b u t t o n t o e x i t
m e n u . T h e l i v e i m a ge is f r o z e n . I m a g e w i l l s t r obe i n t i m e w i th
s t r o n g p u l s es i n t h e i n p u t a u d i o s i g n a l . You m a y n e e d to a d j u s t
t h e a u d i o s e n s i t i v i t y . See S e c t i o n 1 u n d e r O P T I O N S a n d
A D J U STMENTS.
/S - GETTING STARTED I
V I D E O E X E RC I S ES
5) A n extensive range of colourizings can be used on live images.

Select any PRESET n u mber between 2S and 29 and move the
HUE, SATURATION and V ALUE slid ers. Press the COLOURIZE
button repeatedly to switch between normal and colourized image.
The COLOUR DEPTH slider determines the degree of colourizing.
If the COLOUR DEPTH slider is set to a central position the
image is u n a ffected. Video Menu S selects COLOURIZE TYPE.
6) Images may be reflected about the horizontal and vertical

axes. Select PRESET 33 and a djust HORIZONTAL a n d
VERTICAL P A N sliders. Observe how a x e s o f reflection m a y be
adjusted on the screen. Video Menu 2 - SCREEN CONTROL
selects mirrors.
7) Select PRESET 34. This is a slow scan or smea r from left to

right across wh ich slowly f reezes the i mage across the screen. The
video i mage should be moving for this effect to be n oticeable.
P a i n t Men u 8 STENCIL WIPES determines Hor i z o n t a l or V e r t i cal
-
wipe.
8) Select PRESET 39 and draw. Still i mage is u n c h a n ged except

drawn areas are brighter. This i s the stencil bei ng shown. Notice
DRA W COLOUR button is n o t lit. We are just d r a w i n g a stencil
without a f fecting the field store. Press INVERT STENCIL
button. This flips stencilled area (brigh ter) w i th non-stencilled
area. You can now 'undraw' parts of the previous stencil.
Alternatively, you can select Stencil Erase from Paint Menu 4 to
erase the d r a w n areas of stencil. Draw a la rge stencil a rea for the
next step.
9) Select PRESET 40. Notice the INVERT STENCIL button

flashing. The stencil is being swapped with live image a t a rate
determined by RATE 2 slider setting. To carry this effect
further, press MEN U butto n a n d select Paint Men u 3 -
TEXTURES. Select a n y Texture. Select Paint Menu 8 STENCIL -
WIPES. Choose Texture. Return to image by pressing STOP. Now

press WIPE STENCIL. Textured stencil image now follows l i ve
image movements. I f RATE 2 slider is near fastest rate, we see a
live image w h i ch is normal i f still, a n d text ured if moving.
PRESET 41 does the same thing.
V I DEO EX E RC I S E S
10) Select PRESET 44. A grid-type texture wipes the screen.

This i s a m i x t u re of live digital colo uri zed video i n the stencil
a rea (the grid texture) and live a n a log v ideo between the grid.
A n a log video is totally unaffected by the CVI, however stencils
can be put in front of it. Go to Video Men u 0 DISPLAY-
CONTROL. Here are twenty na med boxes, each of which selects a

p a r t i c u l a r screen display setup of the CVL Each box selection
w i l l choose one image plane (live a n alog, live digital or field
store) to be displayed in the Stencil on areas of t h e screen and one
i m a ge plane to be displayed i n the Stencil off areas. In PRESET
44, t h i s m e n u is set to Dig./ Analog, which selects live digital video
( w h i c h c a n be colourized) for stencil On and live analog video
(not colourized) for stencil Off. The INVERT STENCIL button,
i f l i t , swaps the On and Off stencil areas. See Section 3 -
D I S P L A Y CONTROL Menu for more information.
The ZOOM control can expand the stencil areas without
a ff e c t i n g t h e analog areas. The R ATE 2 slider controls ZOOM
speed. If RATE 2 is at minimum, ZOOM has no effect. Press
I NVER T STENCIL to swap a n alog and digital.
1 1 ) Select PRESET 45, colourized flip. The live image is

f l i pp i n g between u naffected analog video and colourized digital
v ideo a t a rate set by the RATE 2 s lider.
1 2) Select PRESET 50. Just a frozen image (in the field store)
a ppears, but something's behind it. Draw a hole and there is
a na l o g video. Press INVERT STENCIL and you can 'undraw' the
hole. ZOOM u p on the drawn hole.
13) Select PRESET 51. The digital image will gradually freeze
in a mosaic of dots. Slight movement gives a blurred effect.
P r ess the WIPE COLOUR button. Random dots of colour will be
d r a w n u n t i l you press the STOP button. The HUE,
S ATURATION and VALUE sliders and COLOURIZE button can
change the colour of new dots. These disintegrate functions are
found i n the STENCIL WIPE and COLOUR WIPE Paint Menus
respecti vely.
11 0 - GETTING STARTED I
V I D EO E X E R C I S ES
r N OTE: The following video effects require a blue

c h romakey background to the camera model. Also the
chromakey levels must be set correctly. See the Chroma key
Setup Suggestions a t the start of this Section.
14) Select PRESET 55. Note that chroma key is required. As the
colour wipes down the screen, move the HUE, SA TURA TION and
VALUE sliders for colour bands. This PRESET displays a live
analog image in front of sti l l background. Move the ZOOM and
STRETCH controls to change background, leaving live image
unaffected. Press COLOURIZE button and move HUE,
SA TURA TION and VALUE sliders for arresting colour changes.
Press INVERT STENCIL for the "invisible man" effect.
15) Select P RESET 58. Initially, there is just live image. Press
the FREEZE button. Now a frozen image appears behind live
image. This utilizes Single freeze in Video Menu 3 FREEZE
-
CONTROL. Preset 59 takes this further by continually freezing

behind the live image, resulting in a trailing effect. PRESET 60
continually freezes at a rate set b y RATE 2 slider.
16) Select P RESET 6 1 . This carries on from PRESET 60 a n d

u s e s Slide in Video Menu 2 - SCREEN CONTROL. Slide allows
continuous panning of the continually frozen image, so that the
image 'wraps around' the screen. HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL
PAN sliders work differently when S l ide is on. Rather than just
pan, they control the rate of change of pan. Mid-position of these
sliders has a small dead-spot to help stop the image moving.
Pa nning can be very slow, or fast enough to give the impression
of stopping, much like the wagon wheels in old cowboy films.
Try moving the ZOOM slider for a big effect. PRESETS 62 and
63 selected i n successio n take this slide/pan/zoom combination to
new levels.
17) Select P RESET 74 for a good ghostly i llusion. RATE 2 slider

determines the rate of Strobe, selected in Video Menu 3 -
FREEZE CONTROL. The ghost image is a result of having Ghost
selected i n Video Menu 0 - DISPLAY CONTROL for both the
Stencil o n area and the Stencil off a rea, that is the whole screen.
Ghost gives a double-exposure between the live analog image and
the field store. Also, a Solarize colourizing is selected in Video
Menu 5 - COLOURI ZE TYPE.
IGETTING STARTED - 11 1
VIDEO EXE RCISES
1 8 ) Select PRESET 83. This is the Colour tunnel of music behind

l i ve video. An external audio input will trigger the colour tunnel.
Colours respond to pitch and volu me of sound.
19) PRESETS 84 to 93 require two video inputs and allow a

va riety of screen juxtapositions for both video sources. If VIDEO
I N P UT 2 is not connected, black will show up on the screen where
VIDEO 2 is selected.
20) PRESET 91 wipes from left to right from VIDEO INPUT 1

to VIDEO INPUT 2. PRESET 92 wipes from top to bottom from
VIDEO INPUT 2 to VIDEO INPUT 1 . PRESET 93 disintegrates
dot-w ise from VIDEO INPUT 1 to VIDEO I N P UT 2. These are
useful transi tions between video jnputs.
2 1 ) See the beginning of this section for suggestions on physical

setup of chroma-key. Select PRESET 99 for setting u p CVI
i n ternal chroma-key levels. Normal setup of sliders is HUE
around mid-posi tion, SATURATION around 1 / 3 from top, and
V ALUE around mid-position. Adjust sliders finely until the blue
background becomes pale ora n ge but the subject is unaffected.
See the descriptions of PRESETS 98 and 99 in the following pages.

P R ESETS
The following is a description of the characteristics of each

factory (ROM) P RESET, including live VIDEO and PAINT
responses, if applicable.
P R ES ET 00:
D RAWI N G ON L IVE VI D EO
This PRESET is used for the Fairlight logo when you first
turn the power ON, and any changes made to this PRESET will
not be retained if you turn the power all.
This PRESET allows drawing over a live analog video i mage.
This setup can be used as a consistent reference poi nt if PRESETS
have been cha nged, as the original contents are always restored
when the power is turned on. When the power is first turned On,
the Fairlight logo is drawn opaque. The rainbow-type colour is
called Hue-Sat.
Video input to VIDEO I or RGB I inpu ts. Dra wing on
GRAPHICS PAD uses a flat paint, opaque colour, and a medium
round brush. Change the H.S.V. sliders to alter colour.
Both the logo and the orange CVI lettering are on the stencil
plane and the field store.
Press USE STENCIL button to either display or not display the
stencilled painted areas. Press INVERT STENCIL button to either
have the logo and lettering as the stencil or everything except the
logo and the lettering as the stencil. Press WIPE COLOUR button
to wipe the field store to white. The areas of the field store
shown by the stencil go from coloured to white. Press WIPE
STENCIL to erase stencil.
ZOOM slider will zoom drawing.
P R ES ET 0 1 :
D RAWI N G CARS, N EGATIVE C O L O U R I Z E
Screen is i nstantly cleared to white, but because negative
colourize is used, screen appears black. Drawing produces r a ndom
coloured cars. These have a negative, solarized colourization and
shaded brush.
Rate of colour randomness is governed by the RATE 1 slider.
Press COLOURIZE button to get positive colourized cars on a
white b ackground. Move PAN sliders to move cars. Press WIPE
COLOUR button to clear drawing from screen. Press FREEZE
button to get live digital image. Press FREEZE button again to
freeze image into field store.
IG ETTING STARTED
..
- 13\
P R E S ETS
P R ES ET 02:
T I T L E ON L IVE V I D EO
Title is written to stencil and field store over live image. Of
course, a title must be present i n the TITLE EDIT Menu - Paint
Menu 9 . Use the cursor and GRAPHICS PAD to position the title
on the screen. Press TITLE button to repeat titling. Press WIPE
COLOUR and WIPE STENCIL to erase title and any drawing.
P R ES ET 03:
I N STANT W I P E TO COLO U R
Instantly clears the screen to blue. The colour can be changed
by altering the H.S.V. sliders and pressing WIPE CLOUR button.
Drawing on GRAPHICS PAD produces random coloured D o t s .
Press FREEZE button to get live ' digital image. Press FREEZE
button again to freeze image into field store.
P R ES ET 04 :
S MA L L B R U S H
Drawing with a small brush on the field store. Colour is
initially brown, but may be altered using the H.S.V. sl iders. Turn
off the DRAW LOCK button, and use the DRAW button for
greater positioning control. The stencil is drawn a t the same time,
therefore defining the area dra wn for further operations.
P R ES ET 05:
F O L IAG E
Drawing is with a flat paint, using a spikey brush shape, good
fo r si mula ting foliage. Drawing is put into the field store. The
sten cil is drawn a t the same time, therefore defining the dra wn
area for fu rther operations.
P R ES ET 06 :
C O L O U R WI P E U S I N G STE N C I L
Wipes the background to flat colours, lea ving any stencilled
area uncha nged. In the previous PRESET, drawing was on the
stencil. This PRESET uses a Wi p e d own colour wipe, which takes
approxima tely three seconds to complete. This allows the colours
to be changed during the wipe, giving colour graduations. The
ini tial colour is blue. Move the SATURATION slider slowly down
during the wipe, to give a gradua tion to white.

PR E S E TS
P R ES ET 07:
COpy
Copies of a stencilled area can b e made. The stencil ma y be
composed of unconnected a reas, and be as complex as required.
Stencilled a rea is highlighted a s being brighter than background.
Area pointed to by from=> cursor is copied to to=> c u rsor. See
Copy in the PAINT METHOD m enu for futher information.
Note that i f from=> cursor points to a stencil On a rea, then the
picture i n that stencilled a rea is copied. If from=> c u rsor points
to background, then background is copied instead. So, take care
in positioning cursor.
To see stencilled area Stencil show must be selected in
COLOUR CONTROL,Paint Menu 4. Press DRAW STENCIL
button to see the stencilled a reas stand out. Stencilled areas will
be highligh ted.
P R ES ET 08:
U N D ER-OVER ·
Slices chroma-keyed live v ideo between the foreground (stencil
On) a n d the background (stencil Off). Live video must be
chroma-keyed for this PRESET. Set up chroma-key using
PRESET 99. Also, a stencil must be d rawn.
P R ES ET 09 :
U N D ER-OVER S L I D E CO L O U R I Z E
Similar to PRESET 0 8 , but slices live action between a slowly
sliding, colourized, foreground and background. Live action must
be chroma-keyed for this P RESET. Move H.S.V. and COLOUR
DEPTH sliders to alter colourizing . Change PAN sliders to alter
slide rate. Press COLOURIZE button to return to normal colours.
P R ES ET 10:
STARS WITH PAI NT C RAWL O N L IVE V I D EO
Instantly clears the stencil, then a l lows drawing of stars, with
Paint crawl, over live video input. Analo g video from VIDEO 1
input passes unchanged to the output but with the addition of
coloured stars. The stencil is d rawn a t the same time as colour,
defining the stars to be 'in front of' the l i ve video. Independentl y
move the H.S.V. sliders smoothly from top to bottom and back for
changes in Paint crawl colours. Move PAN, STRETCH and ZOOM
sliders for more effect.
IGETTING STARTED lsi -

P R E S ET S
P R ES ET 11:
R ECTA N G L E S . H UE-SAT.
Rectangles are drawn with a large rectangular Brush shape
using the Hue-Sat paint type. Video input is seen if FREEZE
b u t ton pressed.
P R ES ET 12 :
C U T AN D PASTE
Large round Brush shape copies one area to another. Small
images may be built up, or correct colour may be restored to an
a rea. Best to use a large brush. To copy larger a reas, use the
Copy function in the PAINT METHOD menu. Move the. brush
over the area to be copied. Lift the stylus from GRAPHICS PAD.
The brush now contains the cut-o'u t image and it can be pasted
elsewhere. Move the cursor to appropriate position. Area is
copied when stylus is lifted from GRAPHICS PAD. Tap on
GRAPHICS PAD for a series of pastes. To select a new area to be
copied, press STOP button, and re-position cursor. Change Brush
shape for other effects. Build u p a n image from overlapping cuts
and pastes.
PRESETS 1 3 to 1 7 are part of a graph drawing routine.
PRESETS 1 3 t o 1 7 are part o f a graph drawing routine.

N OT E :
P R ES ET 13:
W I P E DOWN
This PRESET performs a Colour wipe downwards. Good for a
background. Move H.S.V. sliders as wipe proceeds to get different
colou rs. Press STOP button to stop wipe at any time.
P R ES ET 14:
G R I D T EXTURE WI P E
A grid texture in red is wiped across the field store. Move H.S.V.
SLIDERS a s wipe proceeds to change colours.
P R ES ET 15:
R ECTAN G L E
A rectangle can be drawn in bright green with a medium square
B rush shape. Position cursor to appropriate area for rectangle.
1 6 and 1 7. Press STOP button to re-position rectangle axes before

This will be the surround for the graph to be drawn in PRESETS
drawing.

PR ES ETS
P RESET 1 6 :
R U B BE R BAN D I NG
Li nes c a n be d r a w n , connected together such t h a t t h e e n d of
o ne line joins u p wi th the sta r t of next line. This PRESET forms
the basis of the gra p h l ines. Press STOP button to define a new
s t a r t i n g point.
P RESET 1 7 :
U NDER-OVE R , C O LO U R I ZED
Live a n a lo g video i s inserted between stencil led foregroun d
a n d field store background. Image is then colouri zed with
Solarize type. Chroma key for VIDEO I must be correctly setup
or field store background w i l l be b l a n ked out by video. Select
Chroma key from STENCIL SOURCE - Video Men u 1 to put l ive
video i n front of field store.
P R ES ET 1 8 :
R ECTA NG L ES W I T H PA I NT C RAW L O N LIVE
V I DEO
Screen is clea red to white a n d rectangles a r e d r a w n in with a
thick brush and Pai n t crawl. Move H.S.V. sliders for c h a n ges in
Pai n t crawl colours. Move PAN, STRETCH and ZOOM sliders for
more effect. Press FREEZE b u tton to get recta ngles over live
digital image. P ress FREEZE again t o p u t digital i mage into field
store.
P R ES ET 1 9 :
C I R C LES , M OTT L E D
Screen i s clea red t o w h i te, Circles are drawn i n medium blue,
with a Mo t t l ed paint type and medium round Brush shape. Press
WIPE COLOUR to clear screen .
P R ES ET 20:
C H ROMA K EY OVE R S LI D I NG ST i l l
Live chroma keyed analog is i n front of field store sliding
image. Press FREEZE button to contin uosly freeze l i v e image
i n to the background. Press FREEZE again to stop it. This
destroys original background. Press INVERT STENCIL button for
the original "in visible man" (or woman) effect. Move
HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN sliders to stop or change
sliding.
IGETTING STARTED 171 -

P R ES E TS
P R ES ET 2 1 :
ZOOM U P - RAN DOM CO LO U R
This PRESET i s a precursor to PRESET 22. Random colours
are generated while zooming up. I f FREEZE button is pressed,
then ZOOM slider is moved right down to smallest size, shrinking
recta ngles can be seen. For best effect, wait unt i l PRESET
zoomi ng is finished before going to next PRESET. H.S.V. sliders
have no effect since Random colour is used. Move RATE 1 slider
to change rate of Random colour. Move. RATE 2 slider to change
rate of zoom.
P R ES ET 22:
B O I L I N G BAC K G RO U N D
This PRESET is meaningless if not preceded by PRESET 2 1 .
Random coloured solid rectangles continuously expand from the
background, with live ana log video in front. Press INVERT
STENCIL button to have expanding recta ngles coming from the
video image. Move the ZOOM and STRETCH sliders for
different size rectangles. Move HORIZONTAL a n d VERTICAL
PAN sliders to mid-position to stop the sliding. Actual content of
background can now be seen.
P R ES ET 2 3 :
F I L L I N G G R I D W I T H RAN DO M COL O U R
Wa i t u n t i l Wipe stencil and Wipe colour functions are
comple ted. Using GRAPHICS PAD place a rrow tip on f ill=>
cursor between grid li nes. Lift stylus from pad and area selected
will fill with randomly selected colour. Go to COLOUR
CONTROL - Paint Menu 4 and change selection from Random to
Hue, Sat., Value. Now fill grid with colours of your own choice,
using H.S.V. sliders.
P R E S ET 24:
CH R O M A K EY E D I MAG E OV ER CO LO U R F I L L E D
GRID
Ch roma keyed image a ppears i n front o f colour filled grid
created in PRESET 23. Title the i mage using TITLE button. I f
t h e r e is no title in TITLE EDIT - Paint Menu 9, t h e n "No Title"
will a ppear. Drawing on GRAPHICS PAD produces arrows with
Paint crawl.

PR E S E TS
'r NOTE:
Presets 2 5 t o 29 a r e colouriza tions.
P R ES ET 25:
CO LOU R I Z E - S P ECT R U M
Colourizes the live image with the Spectrum selection. Move
H.S.V. and COLOUR DEPTH sliders to a l ter colourizing.
COLOUR DEPTH moved toward + results i n more extreme
positive colourization. COLOUR DEPTH moved toward - has a
more e xtreme negative colourization. COLOUR DEPTH i n mid
position returns to normal colours (no colouriza tion). Press
COLOURIZE to return to normal colours.
P R E S ET 26:
COLOU R I Z E - N U C L EA R ATTAC K
Contour colourizing. The H.S.V. sliders determine the a mount of
posterizing (colour removal) i n the corresponding colours i n the
video image. If COLOUR DEPTH is set midway to zero, there is
no colourizing because there is no depth. Press FREEZE to freeze
the image. Press COLOUR IZE to return to normal colours.
PRESET 27:
COLOU R I Z E - S E P I A TON E
Monochrome colourizing reminiscen t of old photos. H.S.V. sliders
control which colou r is monochromed. Saturation slider on
minimum results in straight black and white.
P RESET 28: .
COLOU R I Z E - POST E R I Z E
Uses the Contour Colourize Type, removing some colour
content and accentuating slight colou r changes of image.
P R ESET 29:
COLOU R I Z E - N EGATIVE
Uses t h e Solarize Colourize Type, and performs a stra ight
colour negative on the image.
P R ES ET 30:
P I X E LATION
Live digital image is pixelated by the ZOOM slider. STR ETCH
slider can pixelate the horizontal or vertical aspects o f the image.
Press FREEZE button and DRAW LOCK button to draw on
frozen image.
IGETTING STARTED - 19\

PRESETS
P R ES ET 3 1 :
HO R I ZONTA L M I R R O R
may be frozen, zoomed, stretched, colourized, etc.

H O R IZONTAL PAN slider controls axis o f reflection. Image
P R ES ET 3 2 :
V E RTI CA L M I RROR
S a me as PRESET 3 1 except VERTICAL PAN slider controls
a x is of reflection.
P R ES ET 3 3 :
Q UAD M I RROR
Horizontal and vertical mirrors simultaneously. PAN sliders
c o n t rol position.
P R E S ET 34:
S LOW SCAN AC ROSS
T h i s one grabs a vertical line of image a t a preset rate across
the screen and stores it. Press STOP button t o terminate scan.
P R ES ET 3 5 :
S LOW S C A N DOW N
S a me as PR ESET 3 4 except down the screen.
P R ES ET 36:
ZOOM OUT I MAG ES
Precursor to PRESET 37. Live image is grabbed as i t zooms
o u t . Move ZOOM slider to see grabbed images. These a r e delayed
1 ,2,3 ... video fields behind the original. For best results, have live
i ma g e move as PRESET is zooming.
P R ES ET 37:
BOI L I N G I MAG ES
P RESET 36 images are continuously panned across screen at a
preset rate, giving the impression o f movement. This PRESET is
m e a n i ngless if not preceded by PRESET 36. Mov e HORIZONTAL
and VE RTICAL PAN sliders to midway position to stop moveme n t
a n d see a c t u a l still grabbed images.

P R E S E TS
P R ES ET 38:
STROB E
This strobes the live i mage a t a rate determined by t h e RATE
2 slider. Freeze the i mage permanently by pressing t h e FRE EZE
button. Press FREEZE again to return to s t robe effect.
P R E S ET 39:
S I N G L E F R EEZ E, STE N C I L D RAWI N G
This PRESET i s associated with PRESET 40. P ress FREEZE
button to u pdate the live i mage. Drawing on the stencil i s shown
as a brightened area. This doesn't affect the image. Press DRAW
STENCIL bu tton to n o t show stencil. Turn DRAW LOCK bu tton
Off to accuratel y posi tion cursor before drawing. Press I N V ERT
STENCIL bu tton to erase stencil.
P R ES ET 40:
S H ATTE R - D RAW N STE N C I L
Image i s grabbed a t a rate set b y RATE 2 slider. Observe the
INVERT STENCIL bu tton. T h e stencilled area drawn in P RESET
39 is flipped w i th the non-stencilled area at a rate set by RATE 2
slider. Zooming makes the stencilled area bigger.
r
P R ES ET 4 1 :
S L I D E SHATT E R - TEXT U R E
A Texture i s o n t h e stencil plane. R ATE 2 slider controls
delay b e tween l i ve digital image and stencilled image. Live i mage
must move for noticeable effect. Change Textu re, Paint Men u 3
and return to i mage by pressing STOP b u t ton. Press WIPE
STENCIL button to implement texture change.
P R ES ET 42:
S L I D E S HATT E R - C H EC K E R BOA R D
Same principle a s PRESET 4 1 , b u t w i t h live analog image,
checkered texture stencil image and a horizontal slide. Mov e
HORIZONTAL PAN to change slide rate. Move ZOOM slider f o r
m o r e effect.
P R ES ET 43 :
S E P IA TON ED P HOTO TA K I N G
t""
Live analog image is frozen and colou rized sepia. Rate o f
photo taking is con trolled by RATE 2 slider. Mov e ZOOM a n d
\
STRETCH sliders f o r pixelation effects. Ensure RATE 2 slider is
n o t o n minimum, o r ZOOM and STRETCH will not function.
Pressi n g FREEZE b u t ton w i l l stop updating sepia photo.
IGETTING STARTED 21 1 -
P R E S E TS
P R ES ET 44:
PA RTIAL C O L O U R I Z E - G R I D
Grid lines over live video. Wherever the grid occurs, the live
i m a ge is colourized to the negative. Move ZOOM and STRETCH
for d i fferent effects. WIPE STENCIL will re-draw the grid.
I N VER T will flip between the normal and colourized areas.
P R ES ET 45:
CO L O U R I Z E F L I P
Shatter between live image and colourized i ma ge. RATE 2 sets
s h a tter rate. FREEZE leaves colourized image un-updated.
P R ES ET 46 :
PA RTIAL COLOU R I Z E - H EARTS
Heart s haped brush draws a negative colou rization of the live
i mage. ZOOM expands drawn area. INVERT STENCIL flips
colourized area with normal area. FREEZE will freeze live video
in drawn area. Press WIPE STENCIL to clear drawn area.
P R ES ET 47:
S LA P ST I C K
Press FREEZE to grab live video i mage. RATE 2 slider
con trols rate of change. Image alternates between grabbed still
i ma ge and l ive, analog image.
P R ES ET 48:
PA RT IAL COLO U R I Z E - C H EC K E R B OA R D
S l i d i n g texture on the stencil colourizes live image i n a
checkerboard pattern. Use ZOOM, STRETCH, WIPE STENCIL,
I N V E R T STENCIL, USE STENCIL. FREEZE will capture image
to field store.
P R ES ET 49:
PA RTIAL CO L O U R I Z E - D IAG ONALS
S l i d i n g diagonal texture colourizes live image t o a red negative.
STRETCH changes angle of diagonal. HORIZONTAL and
VERTICAL PAN sliders determine d irection and rate of slide.
H.S.V. sliders change colourizing.
122 GETTING STARTED I

-
PR ES E TS
P R E S ET 50:
H O L E - D RAW N ST E N C I L
Live video is seen through w h e rever you d raw. INVERT
STENCIL flips images. Press WIPE STEN CIL to start again.
P R E S ET 5 1 :
SLOW F R EEZE A N D D I S I NTEG RAT E
Live d i g i t a l image freezes slowly i n to a disintegra ted ima ge.
P R ES ET 5 2 :
S L I D E STI L L I MAG E T O V I D EO
Still image slides slowly to left. VI DEO I i n p u t appears
behind.
P R E S ET 53:
CO L O U R BAC KG R O U N D
Puts a flat colo u r behind l ive image. Ensure chroma key levels
are set u p correctly. Move H.S.V. sliders for other colou rs.
P R E S ET 54:
P I X E LAT E F L I P
Alternates between pixelated d igital a n d non-pixelated a n a log
image. RATE 2 slider controls alternation rate. Use ZOOM and
STRETCH to alter pixelation. Press FREEZE to capture pixelated
image.
P R ES ET 5 5 :
I MAG E OVE R COL O U R W I P E
Colour wipe down the screen behind live analog image. Ensure
correct chroma key levels. Move H.S.V. sliders for a grad ual
colour change as wipe proceeds. Press COLOUR WIPE for a nother
backgrou n d wipe. Press INVERT STENCIL for the invisible
person. Press USE STENCIL to u n-displa y (but not clear)
background.
P R E S ET 56:
U N D E R- OV E R STE N C I L D RAW I N G
Content o f background i s d r a w n t o foreground. i n front o f l ive
image. Press FREEZE. L i v e image is frozen to backgrou n d . a n d
t h e same stencil uses frozen i m a g e a s foreground. Pressing
INVERT STENCIL reverses this situa tion and lets you u n d ra w the
stencil.
P R ES ETS
P R ES ET 5 7 :
U N D ER-OVER CATC H - U P
Background is updated with live video at a rate determined by
the RATE 2 slider. Live image must move for effect to be seen.
Drawing puts background (which follows live image) to
foreground with live image sliced in between. Press COLOURIZE
for a colourized image catchiqg up to the normal image. Press
INVERT STENCIL for normal background following invisible
live image. Use ZOOM and STRETCH to advantage. Press
FREEZE to capture digital image. Normal analog image still
comes th rough.
P R ES ET 58:
P U S H TO F R EEZ E
Pressing FREEZE grabs the current chroma keyed image and
stores it into the background. Each subsequent press of FREEZE
stores a nother live image. Press WIPE COLOUR to clear
background. ZOOM and STRETCH work well he re.
P R ES ET 59:
TRA I L
Current chroma keyed image is continually and rapidly
grabbed or frozen as in PRESET 58. This results in a trail of
images. A rapidly moving live image shows this effect well.
Pressing FREEZE stops the trail. Pressing it again starts the trail.
ZOOM a n d STRETCH complement this PRESET.
P R ES ET 60:
TRA IL - STR O B E
Same a s PRESET 59, but grab rate is set b y the RATE 2 slider.
This results in a strobed trail of i mages. A rapidly moving live
i mage shows this effect well. Pressing FREEZE stops the trail.
Pressing it again starts the trail. ZOOM and STRETCH.
P R ES ET 61 :
TRAI L - S L I D E
Same as PRESET 60 except slide is maximum, spreading out
frozen ima ges. Each image is one field behind the actual live
image. Adjust HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN sliders for
slidin g. Try ZOOMING up, pressing FREEZE, and ZOOMING
back. The trail records the zooming.
124 - G ETTING STARTED I

PR E S E TS
P R ES ET 62 :
T RA I L - S L I D E , Z O O M
This i s a precursor for PRESET 6 3 . Grabs images a s i n
PRESETS 6 0 and 6 1 b u t a u tomatically. Captu res around o n e h a l f
second of live video. F o r b e s t effect, have live image m o v i n g a n d
wait until PRESET z o o m is f i n i s h e d before g o i n g to PRESET 6 3 .
P R ES ET 63:
B O I L I N G K EY E D I MAG ES
This PRESET needs PRESET 62 a s a p rerequisi te. Mu l ti-grabs
of zoomed live i mage a r e s l i d i n g at a certain rate set by
HORI ZONTA L and VERTIC A L PAN. Move these sliders to mid
posi tion to stop sliding and see actual still image 'gra bs'. By
sliding a t a set rate, these grabs superimpose and a n i mate. ZOOM,
STRETCH a n d COLOURIZE a r e useful here too.
P R ES ET 64:
OV E R LAP M I R R O R
Similar t o PRESET 3 1 , but live a nalog i s i n fron t o f
reflections. HORIZONTAL PAN slider positions right mirror.
Press FREEZE t o capture reflections and see left mirror.
P R ES ET 6 5 :
OVE R LAP M I R R O R W I T H T RAI L AN D STRO B E
Same a s PRESET 64 except image is continuously frozen a nd
stored. RATE 2 con t rols h o w fast strobing occurs. FREEZE stops
all updating.
P R ES ET 66:
C O L O U R T RAI L
Chroma k e yed image is frozen a n d stored to background as a
random colour, h ence the H.S.V. sliders have no effect. Rate of
colour change is con trolled by RATE 1 . If at minimum, c h a n ge is
very slight. Select Hue,sat.,valuei n the COLOUR CONTROL
men u, and live image will wipe t h e background with colour
selected by t h e H.S.V. sliders. Use ZOOM, STRETCH and
COLOURIZE for more effect.
P R ES ET 6 7 :
M I R RO R S , CO L O U R T RA I L
Similar to PRESET 66. Live chroma k eyed image is n o t
displa yed, only t ra i l i n g random colours. A ll this i s mirrored.
FREEZE w i l l stop t h e image u p d a t i n g. Select Music from the
COLOUR CONTROL menu a n d try the audio i n p u t.
IGETTING STARTED - 2S I
PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 68:
OV E R LA P M I R ROR - N EGATIVE C O LO U R I Z E
S i m i l a r to P RESET 64, but colourized.
P R ES ET 69:
D O P P E L GAN G E R
Live a n a log image is keyed over shifted live digital i ma ge.
D i g i t a l image can be positioned with the PAN sliders. ZOOM and
STRETCH.
P R ES ET 70
T RA I L C RAWL
C u r r e n t chroma keyed image is contin ually frozen as in
P R ESET 59, but the trail is composed, of crawli n g colour. Move
H.S.V. sliders for changes in colour. Press FREEZE once to stop
upda te of trail. Press FREEZE again to con tinually update.
P R ES ET 7 1 :
CATC H - U P
Live analog image chroma keyed over strobed digital image.
Digital i mage is always 'ca tching up' to the analog image. RATE
2 slider sets how fast the catch-up is. FREEZE will halt the
catch-up. INVERT STENCIL will show digital i mage through the
stencil created by the analog image.
P R E S ET 72:
CATC H - U P COLO U R I Z E
Same as PRESET 7 1 , but using a Range colou rization.
P R ES ET 73:
G H O ST - S I N G L E F R EEZE
Double exposure between frozen digital image and live video.
Pr ess FREEZE to update frozen image. ZOOM, STRETCH and
COLOURIZE.
P R ES ET 74:
P E R S I ST E N C E OF V I S I O N
Simila r to PRESET 73, but digital image i s continually frozen
at a ra te set by RATE 2. Digital image is also Solarize colourized,
w i t h nega tive COLOUR DEPTH. P ress FREEZE to see still
d i g i tal image. This PRESET characterizes the human eye effect
of vision persistence.

P RESETS
P R ES ET 7 5 :
S O F T P I X ELS
A double exposure between live and digital image, with ZOOM
slider set to around 1 /4 from full zoom. Similar to looking
through a patterned glass window. STRETCH controls pixels too.
COLOURIZE and FREEZE.
N OTE:
Presets 76 t o 80 a r e the p resets used t o duplicate the scene on
the CVI demonstration video tape with the ballerina dancing
between frozen images of herself and a blue and white checkered
background. A blue chroma key background and correct ch roma
key levels are essential for this.
P R ES ET 76:
D I G ITAL I MAG E
Press FREEZE to capture image. This will be used to generate
a stencil. P ress PRESET button followed by DRAW LOCK for
next PRESET. PRESET 76 is also good for drawing "crawling
worms" over digital image.
P R ES ET 7 7 :
C O L O U R D ETECT
Previously frozen image will be stencilled out from the blue
background. P ress on GRAPHICS PAD. The stencil=> cu rsor will
appear. Position cursor to blue a rea and lift from pad. A stencil
wipe w i l l commence across the screen taking about 6 seconds.
Everywhere that is blue-ish will have the stencil turned Off.
Thus, the frozen i mage will be cut out and put in the Stencil on
a rea. Due to the Under-over selection i n the STENCIL SOURCE
menu, the cut out stencil will be over (in front of) live analog
image.
P R ES ET 7 8 :
C L EA N U P STEN C I L
I f lighting levels are not set up adequately, or some parts of
the image are indistinct (eg., h a i r stran ds), break-through of blue
may occur. Some touching up of the stencil may be necessa ry.
This PRESET lets you clean u p and erase the stencil. Firstly,
move HORIZONTAL PAN to mid posi tion (to stop slide). Now,
just draw wherever stencil needs it. Turn DRAW LOCK o f f to
assist i n positioning cursor before dra wing, then press DRAW for
temporary drawing. Use the smallest Brush s h a pe for fine detail.
PAN and ZOOM sliders can facilitate stencil clea n u p too. Also
try the Stencil Draw/Erase selector i n Paint Me nu 4.
IGETTI N G S T A R T E D - 27 1
PRESETS
P R ES ET 79:
U N D E R -OV ER BAC KG R O U N D W I P E
S tenc il i mage slides i n front o f live image and a background
colou r wipe down the screen occu rs. Move the H.S.V. sliders while
w i pe is prog ressing for d i fferent colours.
P R E S ET 80:
U N D E R-OV E R TEXTU R E W I P E
A ch eckered texture is added to the ba ckground. Move ZOOM
and STRETCH sliders for additional control. You can draw in
t h e b a ckground with randoIn coloured arrow Brush shape, usi ng a
S p i n symmetry. Press DRAW STENCIL to pu t arrows onto the
s tenc il, in front of the live image.
P R ES ET 8 1 :
M U S I C STRO B E
Sound controlled strobe effect freezes the live image. Thus an
i ma g e can be continually frozen in time with music beats or
pulses. Adjust the AUDIO SENSITIVITY control in the
elec tron ics unit for optimum resu l ts.
P R ES ET 82:
M U S I C TRAI L CRAWL
Similar to PRESET 70, except colour is deri ved from audio
i nput as a mixture of bass (RED), middle (GREEN) and treble
( B L UE) frequencies. Adjust AUDIO SENSITIVITY. Press
FR EEZE to freeze Trail crawl. ZOOM and STRETCH.
P R ES ET 83:
M U S I C C O LO U R TU N N E L
Music controlled Colour t u n n e l emanating from centre screen,
behind live i mage. ZOOM and STRETCH give differe nt
i mpressions. INVERT STENCIL makes Colour tunnel come
through chroma keyed ima ge. Press USE STENCIL then IN VERT
ST ENCIL to get rid of live video.
The following PRESETS require live chroma keyed video for

V I D E O 2 inpu t.

PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 84:
I NT E R N A L KEY - V I D EO 1 AN D 2
Area drawn on stencil plane defines w h a t is VIDEO I a n d
w h a t is V I D E O 2. I n i t i a l l y , V I D E O I is displayed as analog video.
Now draw on the GRAPH ICS PAD. VIDEO 2 should sta r t to
appear. Press INVERT STENCIL to flip one with the other. See
STENCIL SOURCE menu, Digi tal and Analog path.
HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL P A N can adjust posi tion of
stencil.
P R ES ET 8 5 :
C H ROMA K EY - VI D EO 1 OVER 2
VIDEO I takes the d i g i tal path, VIDEO 2 t h e ana log. Adjust
chroma key levels correctly. INVERT STENCIL only allows
VIDEO 2 through where VIDEO I i s chroma keyed.
P R ES ET 86:
C H RO M A K EY - VI D EO 2 OVER 1
Same as PRESET 85 except video paths are reversed, a n d hence
the source of ch roma key i s Video 2.
P R ES ET 87:
C H R O M A K EY - 1 OV ER 2, C O LO U R I Z E D
Same a s PRESET 8 5 except chroma keyed VIDEO 1 i s negative
Monochrome colourized. Press COLOURIZE for normal c o l o u rs.
P R ES ET 8 8 :
C H R O M A K EY - 1 OV ER 2 , MOSA I C
Same a s PRESET 8 5 except VIDEO 1 i s zoomed up, g i v i n g a
mosaic effect. Use ZOOM and STRETCH.
P R ES ET 89:
VI D EO 1 /2 F L I P
A l ternately displays VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 at a rate set by
the RATE 2 slider. Equivalent to PRESET 84 and cont i n u a l l y
pressing the INV ERT STENCIL b u t t o n . If the t w o images a r e
s i m i l a r (eg., faces) then a t a certa i n flip rate, the images tend to
merge.
IGETTING STARTED 29 \ -
P R ES ETS
P R ES ET 90:
D O U B L E EXPOS U R E
A v i d e o mix between VIDEO 1 (analog path) and VIDEO 2
( d i g i t a l p a th). Press INVERT STENCIL to display VIDEO 1 only.
P R E S ET 91 :
W I P E A C R O S S , 1 TO 2
A S t e n c i l wipe across the screen from VIDEO 1 (digital) to
V I D EO 2 (ana log). Press WIPE STENCIL for another wipe.
Rega i n VIDEO 1 by pressing INVERT STENCIL. Wipe may be
stopped a t any time by pressing STOP. Re-position stencil with
H O R I ZONTAL PAN.
P R ES ET 92 :
WI P E DOWN , 2 TO 1
S t e n c i l w i p e down the screen from VIDEO 2 (digital) to
V I D E O 1 (ana log). Press WIPE STENCIL for a nother wipe.
Rega i n VIDEO 2 by pressing INVERT STENCIL. Wipe may be
stopped at any time by pressing STOP. Re-position stencil with
V E RTICAL PAN.
P R ES ET 93:
D I S I NTEG RATE, 1 TO 2
VIDEO 1 (digital) disintegrates pixel by pixel to VIDEO 2
( a n alog). P ress WIPE STENCIL to do it again. Press STOP to h a l t
d i s i n tegration. Regain VIDEO I by pressing INVERT STENCIL.
P R E S ET 94:
T EST PATTERN
A l lows correct al ignment o f video monitor.
P R ES ET 95:
V I D EO 2 T H R O U G H
VIDEO 2 straight through analog and digital paths for setting
u p le vels. Initial image is analog. Press INVERT STENCIL to see
d i g i t a l image.

PRESETS
P R ES ET 96:
VI D EO 1 T H R O U G H
VIDEO 1 straight th rough a nalog a n d d igital paths for setting
u p levels. I n i t i a l image is a n a log. Press INVERT STENCIL to see
d i g i t a l ima ge.
P R ES ET 97:
C O L O U R BARS
A l l ows correct colo u r a l ignment of v i d eo moni tor a n d CVI.
P R ES ET 9 8 :
C H R O M A K EY S ET U P , VI D EO 2
Set up correct chroma key levels for VIDEO 2 i n p u t . Chroma
key levels for VIDEO 2 a r e in dependent of VIDEO 1 .
T o set levels, use H.S.V. sliders. These sliders change function
here a n d control red, green a n d blue content of ch roma key
respectively. When levels a r e set correctly, blue backg r o u n d w i l l
appear in the compleme n t of b l u e, a p i n k y-or a n ge c o l o u r . If
keying a face, for exa mple, set H.S.V. s l i ders to mid-position.
Adjust HUE (red content) so t h a t face (skin tone) is normal colour
without chroma key speckles. Next adjust VALUE (blue content)
so that a l l of blue background just turns pi nk-oran ge. Don't
position fader a n y more than necessa ry for this. Adjust
SATURATION (green content) so that all of background still just
stays pink-orange.
It may be necessa r y to repea t these steps a few t i mes to fine
tune the chroma key levels. Once levels a re set, you may forget
a bo u t them, u nless l i g h t i n g conditions change, o r the CVI is
turned off.
P R ES ET 99:
C H R O M A KEY S ET U P , VI D EO 1
Set up correct ch roma key levels for VIDEO 1 i n p ut. Chroma
key levels for VIDEO 1 are independent of VIDEO 2 .
See the setup steps for PRESET 98.
Q U I C K S E L ECTI O N P R E S E TS
E � c h PRESET has a number and a short description. A more

c o m plete description of the cha racteristics of each preset is given
i 11 S e c tion 2 - PRESETS.
00: DRA WING ON LIVE VIDEO

0 1: DRA WING CARS: COLOURIZED NEGATIVE
02: TITLE ON LIVE VIDEO
03: I N S T A N T WIPE TO COLOUR
04: SMA LL BRUSH
05: FOLIAGE
06: COLOUR WIPE USING STENCIL
07: COpy
08: UNDER-OVER
09: UNDER-OVER SLIDE COLOURIZE
10: STARS WITH PAINT CRAWL ON LIVE VIDEO
1 1: RECTA NGLES, HUE-SAT.
12: CUT and PASTE
13: WIPE DOWN
14: TEXTURE WIPE-GRID
15: RECTA NGLE
16: RUBBER BANDING
17: UNDER-OVER, COLOURIZED
18: RECTANGLES WITH PAINT CRAWL
19: CIRCLES, MOTTLED
20: CHROMA K E Y OVER SLIDING STILL
2 1: ZOOM OUT, COLOUR RECTANGLES
22: BOILING BACKGROUND
23: FILLING GRID WITH RANDOM COLOUR
24: CHROMA KEYED IMAGE O V E R COLOUR FILLED
GRID
25: COLOURIZE - SPECTRUM
26: COLOURIZE - NUCLEAR A TT ACK
27: COLOURIZE - SEPIA TONED
28: COLOURIZE - POSTERIZED
29: COLOURIZE - NEGATIVE
30: PIXELA TION
31: HORIZONTAL MIRROR
32: VERTICAL MIRROR
33: Q UAD MIRROR
34: SLOW SCAN ACROSS
35: SLOW SCAN DOWN
36: ZOOM OUT IMAGES
37: BOILING IMAGES
38: STROBE
39: S I N GLE F R E E Z E STE NCIL DRAWING
40: S H A TTER - DRAWN STENCIL
41: SLIDE SHATTER - TEXTURE
42: S L I D E SH ATTER - CHECK ERBOARD
43: SEPIA TONED PHOTO TAKING
44: PAR TIAL COLOURIZE - GRID
45: CO LOURIZE FLIP
46: PARTIAL COLOURIZE - HEARTS

Q U I C K S E LECT I O N PR ES ETS
47: SLAPSTICK
48: PARTIAL COLOURIZE - CHECKERBOARD
49: PARTIAL COLOURI ZE - DIAGONALS
50: HOLE - DRAWN STENCIL
51: SLOW FREEZE A N D DISINTEGRATE
52: SLIDE STILL IMAGE
53: COLOUR BACKGROUND
54: PIXELA TE FLIP
55: IMAGE OVER COLOUR WIPE
56: UNDER-OVER STENCIL
57: UNDER-OVER CATCH-UP
58: PUSH TO FREEZE
59: TRAIL
60: TRAIL - STROBE
61: TRAIL - SLIDE
62: TRAIL - SLIDE, ZOOM
63: BOILING KEYED IMAGE
64: OVERLAP MIRROR
65: OVERLAP MI RROR WITH TRAIL AND STROBE
66: COLOUR TRAIL
67: COLOUR MI RRORS, TRAIL
68: OVERLAP MI RROR - NEGATIVE COLOUR IZE
69: DOPPELGANGER
70: TRAIL CRAWL
71: CATCH-UP
72: C A TCH-UP COLOURIZE
73: GHOST - SINGLE FREEZE
74: PERSISTENCE OF VISION
75: SOFT PIXELS
76: DIGIT A L IMAGE
77: COLOUR DETECT
78: CLEAN UP STENCIL
79: UNDER-OVER BACKGROUND WIPE
80: UNDER-OVER TEXTURE WIPE
81: MUSI C STROBE
82: MUSIC TRAIL CRAWL
83: MUSI C COLOUR TUNNEL
84: INTERNAL KEY - VIDEO 1 AND 2
85: CHROMA KEY - VIDEO l OVER 2
86: CHROMA KEY - VIDEO 2 OVER 1
87: CHROMA KEY - l OVER 2, COLO URI ZED
88: CHROMA KEY - l OVER 2, MOSAIC
89: VIDEO 1 /2 FLIP
90: DOUBLE EXPOSURE
91: WIPE ACROSS, 1 T O 2
92: WIPE DOWN, 2 TO 1
93: DISI NTEGRA TE, 1 TO 2
9 4: TEST PATTERN
95: VIDEO 2 THROUGH
96: VIDEO 1 THRO UGH
9 7: COLOUR BARS
98: CHROMA KEY SETUP, V I DEO 2
99: CHROMA KEY SETUP, VIDEO 1
V I D EO EXE RC I S ES
If you h a v e read the prev ious section - PAINT EXERCISES -

then you're ready for VIDEO EX ERCISES. We w i l l work t h rough
some e x a m p l es, and see how PAINT and VIDEO ov e r l a p. The
a b i l i t y t o s e l ect PRESETS and ME NUS is assu med.
A c a m e r a or other sou rce o f v i d e o i m age m u s t be connec ted to
the CVI for the video effects. It i s a l so d e s i r a b l e to have a
c h r o m a - k e y blue backgrou nd, to enha nce m a n y l i ve effects. In
fact, a l l refe rences to l i v e i m age in t h i s sec tion assume the use o f
c h r o m a - k e y . T h e CVI can be used to e s t a b l ish ch r o m a - k e y l e vels
b y u s i n g PR ESET 9 9 . See Sec t i o n 3 - SETUP Men u . If you intend
using chroma key, the fol l o w i n g may be he l p f u l .
Chroma-Key Setup Suggestions
H a v e the a r t i st's mod e l i n front of a med i u m b l u e fla t, n o n

refl e c t i v e background (usua l l y a w a l l o r screen).
E n s u r e a d equate l i g h t i n g , such that no shadows fa l l o n the
b a c k g r o u n d . This would require a t least two flood l i g h ts ei ther
side o f the subject. However, too much flood l ig h t i n g ca n result in
' h o t spots' on the chroma key background. These a reas can not be
keyed out, so the floodlights would h a ve to be re- a r ran ged.
The s u bject should n o t wear a n y blue clothing a s it will
'disappear' on screen. This can be used, however, to create
effects.
Use PRESET 99 a n d the HUE, S A TURA TION a n d VALUE
sliders o n the control console to 'key out' the b l u e background.
See Section 3 - SETUP Men u .
S e v e r a l v i d e o e f fects require the v i d e o image to be movi ng, i n
order to s e e the effect.
Gen e r a l Overview
The CVI can accept u p to two video i n puts, the cascaded

o u t p u t and stencil o u t p u t of another CVI, audio i n p u t for music
control of effects, and remote control trigger. Therefore, many
permutations of live CVI effects exist which a re not covered in
this section. However, enough effects will be discussed here to
enable you to d iscover new t h i n gs to do w i th the CVI which even
we haven't thought of yet.
V I DEO E X E RC I S E S
B a s i c l i v e video effects i n c l u de:
* f r e e z i n g and strobing of live images

* real-time colourizing from subtle to extreme
* i mage mirroring and overlap
* l i v e i mage behind, in front o r between still i mages
* m u l t i p l e video feedback-type i mages (feedback is not used)
* c h roma-key effects and i n versions
* combinations of digital a n d u n affected a nalog images
* m u l t i p l e exposure, mosaic, ghost, shatter, slow scan, smear,
t e x t u r e , trailing effects
* key, w i pe, disi ntegrate between video 1 and video 2
* music controlled colou rs, colourizing, strobing
* i n s t a n t PRESET switching between combinations of effects
* cascading of two or more CVI's for multiplying effects
* SEQUENCER for controlled effects switching
* control by another computer
Please read the text closely and follow the instructions.
1) Whe n the CVI is first switched on, the Fairlight logo a ppears
on the stencil plane with live video behind it. Press the WIPE
STENCIL button. This should leave just live analog video.
2) Select P RESET 30. This effect on live video is called

pixelatioll or the mosaic effect. Try the ZOOM and STRETCH
sl i d e rs.
3) N o w press the FREEZE button. The live video image should

be frozen. I t can now be treated with PAINT effects such
c o l o u r i ng, cut-and-paste etc. ZOOM and STRETCH now work i n
a d i f f e r e n t way.
4) Select PRESET 38. This is a strobe effect, a n extension of t h e

F R EEZE b u t t o n effect.
Adjust the RATE 2 slider and see the strobe rate change.
P r e s s t h e ME N U button and select Video Me nu 3 - FREEZE
C O N T R O L , on the quick select menu bar.
O b s e r v e t h a t S t r o b e has been selected (by P R ES ET 3 8 ).
If you h a v e a n a u d i o s o u r c e connected to t h e A u d i o i n p u t o f
t h e C V I , t h e n s e l e c t Music control a n d p r e s s S T O P bu tton to e x i t
m e n u . T h e l i v e i m a ge i s f r o z e n . I ma g e w i l l s t r o b e i n t i m e w i t h
s t r o n g p u l s es i n the i n p u t a u d i o s i g n a l . Y o u m a y n e e d to a d j u s t
the a u d i o s e n s i t i vity. See Section 1 u n d e r OPTIONS and
A D J U S T M E N TS .
' .8 GETTING STARTED I

-
V I D E O EXERCI S ES
5) A n extensive range of c% urizillgs c a n be used on live i mages.

Select any P RESET number between 25 and 29 and move the
HUE, SATURATION and VALUE sliders. Press the COLO URIZE
button repeatedly to switch between normal and colo u r i zed ima ge.
The COLOUR DEPTH slider determines the degree of colourizing.
If the COLOUR DEPTH slider is set to a central position the
image is u n a ffected. Video Men u 5 selects COLO URIZE TYPE.
6) I mages may be reflected a b o u t the horizontal a n d vertical

axes. Select PRESET 3 3 a n d adjust HORIZONTAL a n d
VERTICAL PAN sl iders. O b s e r v e how axes of reflection may b e
adjusted o n the screen. Video Men u 2 - SCREEN CO NTROL
selects mirrors.
7) Selec t P RESET 34. This is a slow sca n or smea r from left to

right across wh ich slowly freezes the image across the screen. The
video image should be moving for t h i s effect to be noticea ble.
P a i n t Me n u 8 - STENCIL WIPES determines Horizontal or Vertical
wipe.
8) Select P RESET 39 and draw. Still image is unchanged except

drawn a r e a s a re brigh ter. This is the stencil being shown. Notice
DRA W COLOUR button i s not lit. We are just drawing a stencil
without affecting the field store. Press INVERT STENCIL
button. This flips stencilled a rea (brigh ter) with non-stencilled
area. You can now 'undraw' parts of t h e previous stencil.
Alternatively, you can select Stencil Erase from Paint Men u 4 to
erase the drawn areas of stencil. Draw a large stencil area for the
next step.
9) Select P RESET 40. Notice the INVERT STENCIL b u t t o n

flashing. The stencil is being swapped with live i m a g e a t a r a t e
determined by R A T E 2 slider setti ng. To carry t h i s effect
further, press MEN U button a n d select Paint Men u 3 -
TEXTURES. Select a n y Texture. Select Paint Men u 8 STENCIL -
WIPES. Choose Texture. Return to image by pressing STOP. Now

press WIPE STENCIL. Text u red stencil image now follows l i ve
image movemen ts. If RATE 2 slider is near fastest r a te, we see a
l i ve image which i s normal i f still, a n d textured i f moving.
PRESET 4 1 does t h e same t h i ng.
V I D E O E X E RC I S E S
10) Select P RESET 44. A grid-type texture wipes the screen.

This is a mixture of live digital colourized video in the stencil
a rea (the grid texture) and live a n alog video between the grid.
Analog video is totally u n affected by the CVI, however stencils
can be put i n front of it. Go to Video Men u 0 DISPLAY
-
CONTROL. Here are twenty named boxes, each o f which selects a

pa rticular screen display setup o f the CVI. Each box selection
will c hoose one image plane (live a n alog, live digital or field
store) to be displayed in the Stencil on areas of the screen and one
image plane to be displayed i n the Stencil off areas. In PRESET
4 4 , this menu is set to Dig./ Analog, which selects live digital video
( w h i c h can be colourized) for stencil On a n d live a n a log video
(not colourized) for stencil Off. The INVERT STENCIL button,
i f l i t , swaps t he On and Off stencil areas. See Section 3 -
DISPLA Y CONTROL Men u for more i n formation.
T h e ZOOM control can expand the stencil areas without
a ffect i n g the analog areas. The R ATE 2 slider controls ZOOM
speed. If RATE 2 is at minimum, ZOOM has no effect. Press
I N V E R T STENCIL to swap a n a log and digital.
11) Select PRESET 45, colourized flip. The live image is

flipping between u n affected ana log video and colourized digital
v i d e o a t a rate set by the RATE 2 slider.
1 2 ) Select P RESET 50. Just a frozen image (in the field store)
a p p e ars, but something's behind it. Draw a hole and there is
a na l o g video. Press INVERT STENCIL and you c a n 'undraw' the
hole. ZOOM u p on the dra w n hole.
13) Select PRESET51. The digital image will gradually freeze

in a mosaic of dots. Slight moveme n t gives a blurred effect.
Press the WIPE COLOUR button. R andom dots of colour will be
d r a w n u n t i l you press the STOP bu tton. The HUE,
S ATURATION and VALUE sliders and COLOURIZE button c a n
c h ange t h e colour of new dots. These disintegrate functions a r e
found i n the STENCIL WIPE and COLOUR WIPE P a i n t Men u s
r e s p e c t i vely.

V I D EO E X E R C I S E S
N OTE: The following video effects require a blue

chromakey background to the camera model. Also the
chromakey levels must be set correctly. See the Chromakey
Setup Su ggestions at the start of this Section.
1 4) Select PRESET 55. Note that chroma key is required. As the

colour wipes down the screen, move the HUE, SA TURA TION and
VALUE sliders for colour bands. This PRESET displays a live
analog image in front of still background. Move the ZOOM a nd
STRETCH controls to chan g e back g round, leavin g live image
una ffected. Press COLOURIZE bu tton and move HUE,
SATURATION and VALUE sliders for arresting colour changes.
Press INVERT STENCIL for the "invisible man" effect.
1 5 ) Select PRESET 58. Initially, there is just live image. Press

the FREEZE button. Now a frozen image appears behind live
image. This utilizes Single freeze in Video Menu 3 FREEZE -
CONTROL. Preset 59 takes this further by continually freezing

behind the live image, resulting in a trailing effect. PRESET 60
continually freezes at a rate set by RATE 2 slider.
16) Select P RESET 61. This carries on from PRESET 60 and

uses Slide i n Video Menu 2 - SCREEN CONTROL. Slide allows
continuous panning of the continually frozen image, so that the
image 'wraps around' the screen. HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL
PAN sliders work di fferently when Slide is on. Rather than just
pan, they control the rate 0/ change of pan. Mid-position of these
sliders has a small dead-spot to help stop the image moving.
Panning can be very slow, or fast enough to give the impression
of stopping, much like the wagon w heels i n old cowboy films.
Try moving the ZOOM slider for a big effect. PRESETS 62 and
63 selected in succession take this slide/pan/zoom combination to
new levels.
1 7) Select PRESET 74 for a good ghostly illusion. RATE 2 slider

determines the rate of Strobe, selected i n Video Menu 3 -
FREEZE CONTROL. The ghost image is a result of having Ghost
selected i n Video Me nu 0 - DISP L A Y CONTROL for both the
S t e n c i l o n area a n d the S t e n c i l off area, that is the whole screen.
Ghost gives a double-exposure between the live analog image and
the field store. Also, a Solarize colou rizing is selected in Video
Men u 5 - COLOURIZE TYPE.
IG E T T I N G S T A R T E D - 11 1
VI D E O EXE R C I S ES
1 8) Select PRESET 83. This is the Colour tunnel of music behind

l i ve v ideo. A n external audio input will trigger the colou r tunnel.
Colours respond to pitch and volume of sound.
19) PRESETS 84 to 93 require two video inputs and allow a

variety of screen juxtapositions for both video sources. I f VIDEO
I N PUT 2 is not connected, black will show up on the screen where
VIDEO 2 is selected.
20) P RESET 9 1 wipes from left to right from VIDEO INPUT 1

to VIDEO I NPUT 2. PRESET 92 wipes from top to bottom from
VIDEO INPUT 2 to VIDEO INPUT 1 . PRESET 93 disintegrates
d o t-wise from VIDEO INPUT 1 to VIDEO INPUT 2. These are
useful transi tions between video �nputs.
2 1 ) See the begi nning of this section for suggestions on physical

setup of chroma-key. Select PRESET 99 for setting up CVI
i n terna l chroma-key levels. Normal setup of sliders is HUE
a r o u n d mid-position, SATURATION around 1 /3 from top, and
V ALUE a round mid-position. Adjust sliders finely until the blue
background becomes pale ora n ge but the subject is unaffected.
See the descri ptions of PRESETS 98 and 99 in the following pages.

P R ES E TS
T h e following is a description o f the characteristics of each

factory ( ROM) FRESET, including live VIDEO a n d PAINT
responses, i f applicable.
P R ES ET 00:
D RAW I N G O N L IV E V I D EO
This P RESET is used for the Fairlight logo when you first
not be retained i f you turn the power all.

turn the power ON, a n d a n y changes made to t h is PRESET will
This PRESET allows dra wing over a live analog video i mage.
This setup can be used as a consistent reference point if PRESETS
have been changed, as the original contents are always restored
when the power is turned on. When the power is first t u rned On,
the Fairlight logo is drawn opaque. The rainbow-type colour is
called Hue-Sat.
Video input to VIDEO 1 o r R G B 1 i n p u ts. Drawing on
GRAPHICS PAD uses a flat paint, opaque colour, and a med i u m
round brush. Change the H.S.V. sliders to a l ter colour.
Both the logo and t h e orange CVI lettering are on the stencil
plane and the field store.
Press USE STENCIL button to either display or not d isplay the
stencilled painted areas. Press INVERT STENCIL button to either
have the logo and lettering as the stencil or everyt h i n g except the
logo and the lettering a s the stencil. Press WIPE COLOUR b u tton
to wipe the field store t o w h i t e . The a reas of the field store
s hown by the stencil go from coloured to white. P r ess WIPE
STENCIL to erase stencil.
ZOOM slider will zoom dra wing.
P R ES ET 01 :
D RAW I N G CA RS, N EGATIVE COLOU R I Z E
Screen i s instantly cleared t o white, but because nega tive
colourize is used, screen appears black. Drawing produces ra ndom
coloured cars. These have a negative, solarized colourization and
shaded brush.
Rate o f colour r a ndomness is governed by the RATE 1 slider.
Press COLOURIZE button to get positive colourized cars on a
white background. Move P A N sliders to move cars. Press WIPE
COLOUR bu tton to clear drawing from screen. Press FREEZE
b u t ton to get live digi t a l image. Press FREEZE button again to
freeze image into field store.
IGETTING STARTED 13\

"
-
P R E S ETS
P R ES ET 02:
T I T L E O N L IVE V I DEO
Title is written to stencil a n d field store over live image. O f
course, a title must b e present in t h e TITLE EDIT Menu - Paint
Menu 9. Use the cursor and GRAPHICS PAD to position the title
on the screen. Press TITLE button to repeat titling. Press WIPE
COLOUR and WIPE STENCIL to erase title and any drawing.
P R ESET 0 3 :
I N STAN T W I P E T O COL O U R
Instantly clears the screen to blue. The colour can be changed
b y a l tering the H.S.V. sliders and pressin g WIPE CLOUR button.
Drawing on GRAPHICS PAD produces random coloured Dots.
Press FREEZE bu tton to get live ' digital image. Press FREEZE
b u t ton again to freeze image into field store.
PRESET 04:
S MA L L B R U S H
Drawing with a small brush on the field store. Colour i s
i n i t i a l l y brown, b u t m a y b e altered u s i n g t h e H.S.V. sliders. Turn
off the DRAW LOCK button, and use the DRAW button for
greater positioning control. The stencil is drawn at the same time,
ther efore defining the area drawn for further operations.
P R ES ET 05:
F O L IAG E
Dra wing is with a flat paint, using a spikey brush shape, good
for simulating foliage. Drawing is put into the field store. The
stencil is drawn at the same time, therefore defining the drawn
area for further operations.
P R ES ET 06:
CO L O U R WI P E U S I NG STE N C I L
Wipes the background to flat colours, leaving any stencilled
a rea u nchanged. In the previous PRESET, drawing was on the
stencil. This PRESET uses a Wi p e down colour wipe, which takes
approximately three seconds to complete. This allows the colours
to be changed during the wipe, giving colour graduations. The
i n i ti a l colour is blue. Move the SATURATION slider slowly down
d u ring the wipe, to give a graduation to white.

P R E S E TS
P R ES ET 07:
COpy
Copies of a stencilled a r e a can b e made. The stencil m a y be
composed of unconnected a reas, a nd be as complex as required.
Stencil led a rea is highlighted as being brighter than background.
Area pointed to by from=> cursor is copied to to=> cursor. See
Copy i n the PAINT METHOD menu for futher information.
Note that i f from=> cursor points to a stencil On area, then the
picture i n that stencilled area is copied. If from=> cursor points
to background, then background is copied instead. So, take care
in positioning cursor.
To see stencilled area Stencil show must be selected in
COLOUR CONTROL,Paint Menu 4. Press DRAW STENCIL
button to see the stencilled areas stand out. S tencilled areas will
be highlighted.
P R ES ET 08:
U N D E R- OVER ·
Slices chroma-keyed live video between the foreground (stencil
On) a n d the background (stencil O ff). Live v ideo must be
chroma-keyed for this PRESET. Set up chroma-key using
PRESET 99. A lso, a stencil must be drawn.
P R E S ET 09:
U N D ER-OV E R S L I D E CO L O U R I Z E
Similar to PRESET 08, b u t slices live action between a slowly
sliding, colourized, foreground and background. Live action must
be chroma-keyed for this PRESET. Move H.S.V. and COLOUR
DEPTH sliders to alter colourizing. Change PAN sliders to alter
slide rate. Press COLOURIZE button to return to normal colours.
P R ES ET 10:
STARS WITH PAI NT CRAWL ON LIVE VI D EO
Instantly clears the stencil, then a l lows drawing of stars, with
Paint crawl, over live video input. Analog video from VIDEO I
input passes unchanged to the output but with the addition of
coloured stars. The stencil is drawn a t the same time a s colour,
defining the stars to be 'in front of' the live video. Independently
move the H.S.V. sliders smoothly from top to bottom and back for
changes in Paint crawl colours. Move PAN, STRETCH a n d ZOOM
sliders for more effect.
P R E S ETS
P R E S ET 1 1 :
R ECTA N G L ES , H U E-SAT.
Rectangles are drawn with a large rectangular Brush shape
using the Hue-Sat paint type. Video input is seen i f FREEZE
button pressed.
P R E S ET 12:
C UT AN D PASTE
Large round Brush shape copies one area to another. Small
i ma ges may be built up, or correct colour may be restored to an
a rea. Best to use a large brush. To copy larger areas, use the
Copy function in the PAINT METHOD menu. Move the. brush
over the area to be copied. Lift the stylus from GRAPHICS PAD.
The brush now contains the cut-o·ut image and it can be pasted
elsewhere. Move the cursor to a ppropriate position. Area is
copied when stylus is lifted from GRAPHICS PAD. Tap on
GRA PHICS PAD for a series of pastes. To select a new area to be
copied, press STOP button, and re-posi�ion cursor. Change Brush
s h a p e for other effects. Build u p a n image from overlapping cuts
a n d pastes.
PRESETS 1 3 to 1 7 are part of a graph drawing routine.
N OT E :
PRESETS 1 3 to 1 7 are part o f a graph drawing routine.
P R ES ET 13:
WI P E DOWN
T h i s P RESET performs a Colour wipe downwards. Good f o r a
b a c kground. Move H.S.V. sliders as wipe proceeds to get different
colou rs. Press STOP button to stop wipe at any time.
P R ES ET 14:
G R I D T EXTU RE WI P E
A grid texture in red is wiped across the field store. Move H.S.V.
SLIDERS as wipe proceeds to change colours.
P R ES ET 15:
R ECTAN G L E
A rectangle can be drawn in bright green with a medium square
Brush shape. Position cu rsor to appropriate a rea for rectangle.
This will be the surround for the graph to be drawn in PRESETS
1 6 and 1 7. Press STOP button to re-position rectangle axes before
drawing.

-
PR ES ETS
P R ES ET 16:
R U B B E R BA N D I N G
L i nes c a n be drawn, connected toge ther such th a t the end of
one l i n e joins u p with the sta r t of next l i ne. This P R ESET forms
the basis of the graph l i nes. Press STOP button to define a new
starti n g point.
P R E S ET 1 7 :
U N D ER-OV E R . C O L O U R I Z E D
L i v e a n alog video is inserted between stencilled foregr o u n d
a n d field s t o r e background. Image is then colou r i zed with
Solarize ty pe. Chroma key for VIDEO I must be correctly setup
Chrom key from STENCIL SOURCE Video Men u 1 to put l i ve

or field store background w i l l be blanked out by v i deo. Select
a -
video i n front of field store.
P R ESET 1 8 :
R ECTA N G L ES W I T H PAI N T C RAWL O N L IVE
VI D EO
Screen is clea red to w h i te a n d rectangles are drawn in w i t h a
P t
thick brush a n d a i n crawl. Move H.S.V. sliders for changes i n
Paint crawl colours. Move P A N , STRETCH a n d ZOOM sliders for
more effect. Press FREEZE b u t ton t o get recta ngles over live
digital i mage. Press FREEZE again to p u t digital i m a ge into field
sto re.
P R ES ET 1 9 :
C I R C L ES . MOTT L E D
Screen i s cleared to wh ite, Circles are d rawn in med i u m b l u e,
with a Mo t t l e d paint type a n d med i u m round Brush shape. Press
WIPE COLOUR to clear screen.
P R ES ET 20:
C H ROMA K EY OV E R S L I D I N G ST I L L
L i v e chroma keyed a n alog is i n front of field store s l i d i n g
i m a g e . P r e s s FREEZE button t o continuosly freeze l i ve image
i n to the background. Press FREEZE again to stop it. This
d estroys original background. Press INVERT STENCIL button for
the original "inv isible man" (or woman) effect. Move
HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN sliders to stop o r change
s l i d i n g.

PR E S E TS
P R E S ET 2 1 :
ZOO M U P - RA N DO M COL O U R
This PRESET is a precursor to PRESET 22. R a n d o m colours
are generated while zooming up. I f FREEZE button is pressed,
then ZOOM slider is moved right down to smallest size, shrinking
recta ngles can be seen. For best effect, wait un ti l PRESET
zooming is finished before going to next PRESET. H.S.V. sliders
have no effect since R a n d o m colour is used. Move RATE I slider
to c h a n ge rate of R a n d o m colour. Move. RATE 2 slider to change
ra te of zoom.
P R ES ET 22:
B O I L I N G BACKG RO U N D
This PRESET i s meaningless if not preceded by PRESET 2 1 .
Random coloured solid recta ngles continuously expand from the
background , with live a n a log video in front. Press INVERT
STENCIL button t o have expanding recta ngles coming from the
video image. Move the ZOOM and STRETCH sliders for
different size recta ngles. Move HORIZONTAL a n d VERTICAL
PAN sliders to mid-position to stop the slidi ng. Actual conte n t of
background can now be seen.
P R ES ET 23:
F I L L I N G G R I D WITH RAN DO M COL O U R
Wai t u n t i l Wipe stencil and Wip e colour functions are
completed. Using GRAPHICS PAD place arrow tip on fill=>
cursor between grid lines. Lift stylus from pad a nd a rea selected
will fill with randomly selected colour. Go to COLOUR
CONTROL - P a i n t Menu 4 a nd change selection from R a nd o m to
Hue, Sat., Value. Now fill grid with colours of y our own choice,
using H.S.V. sliders.
P R ES ET 24:
CH R O M A K EY ED I MAGE OVER C O L O U R F I L L E D
GRID
Chroma keyed image appears in front o f colour filled grid
crea ted i n P R ESET 23. Title the image using TITLE bu tton. If
there i s no title i n TITLE EDIT - Paint Menu 9, then "No Title"
will appear. Drawing on GRAPH ICS PAD produces a r rows with
Paint crawl.

PR ES E TS
r N OTE:
Presets 25 t o 29 a r e colo u r i za tions.
P R ESET 25:
COL O U R I Z E - S P ECT R U M
Colourizes the live image w i t h the Spectrum selection. Move
H.S.V. and COLOUR DEPTH sliders to alter colourizing.
COLOUR DEPTH moved toward + results i n more extreme
positive colourization. COLOUR DEPTH moved toward - has a
more extreme negative colourization. COLOUR DEPTH i n mid
position returns to normal colours (no colourization). Press
COLOURIZE to return to normal colours.
P R ES ET 26:
COL O U R I Z E - N U C L EAR ATTACK
Contour colour i z ing. T h e H.S.V. sliders determine t h e a m o u n t of
posterizing (colour removal) in the corresponding colours in the
video ima ge. If COLOUR DEPTH is set midway t o zero, there is
no colourizing because there i s no depth. Press FREEZE to f reeze
the i mage. Press COLOURIZE to return to normal colours.
P R ES ET 27:
COL O U R I Z E - S EP I A TO N E
Monochrome colourizing remin iscent of old photos. H.S.V. sliders
control which colour is monochromed. Saturation slider on
minimum results in str a i gh t black and w h i te.
P R ES ET 28: .
COL O U R I Z E - POST E R I Z E
Uses t h e Contour Col o u r i ze Type, removing some colour
content and accentuating slight col o u r changes of i mage.
P R ES ET 29:
CO L O U R I Z E - N EGAT IVE
Uses the Solarize Colourize Type, a n d performs a straight
colour negative on the i mage.
P R E S ET 30:
PIXELATI O N
L i v e digital image i s pixela ted b y the ZOOM slider. STRETCH
slider can pixelate the horizontal or vertical aspects o f the i mage.
Press FREEZE button and DRAW LOCK button to draw on
frozen image .
... ... .., - _ ..... ... ... ... ... -0-·
IGETTING STARTED 191

-
PRESETS
P R ES ET 31 :
H O R I Z O N TA L M I R R O R
H O R I ZONTAL PAN slider controls axis o f reflection. Image
ma y be frozen, zoomed, stretched, colourized, etc.
P R ES ET 32:
V E RT I CA L M I R R O R
S a m e a s PRESET 3 1 except VERTICAL PAN slider controls
a x is of reflection.
P R ES ET 3 3 :
Q U A D M I R R OR
Horizontal a n d vertica l mirrors simultaneously. P A N sliders
c o n trot position.
P R ES ET 34:
S L OW S CA N ACROSS
T h i s one grabs a vertical l i n e of image a t a preset r a t e across
t h e screen and stores it. Press STOP bu tton to terminate scan.
P R ES ET 3 5 :
S L OW SCAN DOWN
S a m e as PR ESET 34 except down t h e screen.
P R ES ET 36:
ZOO M OUT I M AG ES
Precursor to P RESET 37. Live image is grabbed as it zooms
o u t. Move ZOOM slider to see grabbed images. These are delayed
1 ,2,3 ... video fields behind the original. For best results, have live
i m a g e move as PRESET is zooming.
P R ES ET 37:
B O I L I N G I MAG ES
PRESET 36 images are continuously panned across screen at a
preset rate, giving the impression of movement. This PRESET is
m e a n i n gless if not preceded by PRESET 36. Move HORIZONTAL
a n d VERTICAL PAN sliders to midway posi tion to stop movement
and see actual still grabbed images.

-
PR E S E TS
P R ES ET 3 8 :
STRO B E
This strobes the l i v e image a t a rate d etermined by the RATE
2 slider.Freeze the image perma nently by pressing t h e FREEZE
button. Press FREEZE again to return to strobe effect.
P R ES ET 39:
S I N G L E F R E EZ E . ST E N C I L D RAW I N G
This PRESET is associ a ted w i t h PRESET 40. Press FREEZE
button to u pdate the live image. Drawing on the stencil is shown
a s a brightened area. This d oesn't a ffect the image. Press DRAW
STENCIL button to not show stencil. Turn DRAW LOCK b u t ton
Off to a c c u r a tely posi tion c u rsor before d rawing. Press INVERT
STENCIL button to erase stencil.
P R ES ET 40:
S H ATT E R - D RAW N ST E N C I L
Image is grabbed a t a rate set by RATE 2 slider. Observe the
INVERT STENCIL button. The stencilled a rea d ra w n i n PRESET
39 is flipped with the non-stencilled area at a rate set by R ATE 2
slider. Zooming makes the stencilled area bigger.
P R ES ET 41 :
S L I D E S HATT E R - T EXT U R E
A T e x t u r e is on the stencil plane. RATE 2 slider controls
delay between live digital image a n d stencilled image. Live i mage
must move for noticeable effect. Change T e x t u r e, Paint Me nu 3
a nd return to image by press i n g STOP button. Press WIPE
STENCIL b utton to implement tex t u r e cha nge.
P R ES ET 42:
S L I D E S H ATT E R - C H E C K E R B OA R D
S a me principle a s PRESET 4 1 , but with live ana log image,
checkered texture stencil image and a horizon t a l slide. Mov e
HORIZONTAL PAN to change slide ra te. Move Z O O M slider for
more effect.
P R ESET 43 :
S E P IA TO N E D P H OTO TA K I N G
Live a n a log image is frozen a n d colourized sepia. Rate of
photo t a k i n g is con t rolled by RATE 2 slider. Move ZOOM and
STRETCH sliders for pixelation effects. Ensure RATE 2 s l i d er is
n o t o n m i n i mum, or ZOOM and STRETCH will not function.
Press i n g FREEZE button w i l l stop u p d a t i n g sepia photo.
I GETTI N G S T A R T E D 21 1
-
P R E S E TS
P R ES ET 44:
PARTIAL C O L O U R I Z E - G R I D
Grid lines over live video. Wherever the grid occurs, the l i v e
i ma g e is colourized t o the negative. Move ZOOM and STRETCH
for d i f f ere n t effects. WIPE STENCIL will re-dra w the grid.
I N V E R T will flip between the normal and colou r i zed a reas.
P R ES ET 45:
CO LOU RIZE FLIP
S h a tter between live image and colourized ima ge. RATE 2 sets
s h a t t e r rate. FREEZE leaves colourized i mage un-updated.
P R ES ET 46:
PA RTIAL CO LOU R I Z E - H EARTS
Hea r t sha ped brush draws a negative colourization of the live
i mage. ZOOM expands drawn area. INVERT STENCIL flips
colou r i zed a rea with normal area. FREEZE will freeze live video
in d r a w n area. Press WIPE STENCIL to clear drawn area.
P R ES ET 47:
S LA PST I C K
P ress FR EEZE to grab live video i mage. RATE 2 slider
controls rate of change. Image a l ternates between grabbed still
image a n d l ive, analog image.
P R ES ET 48:
PA RTIAL COL OU R I Z E - C H EC K E R B OA R D
S l i d i n g texture o n the stencil colourizes live i mage i n a
checkerboard pattern. Use ZOOM, STRETCH, WIPE STENCIL,
I N V E R T STENCIL, USE STENCIL. FREEZE will capture image
t o field store.
P R ES ET 49 :
PA RTIAL C O L O U R I Z E - D IAG O NA L S
S l i d i n g diagonal texture colourizes live image to a red negative.
STRETCH changes angle of diagonal. HORIZONTAL and
VERTICAL PAN sliders determine direction and rate of slide.
H.S.V. sliders change colourizing.

-
PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 50:
H O L E - D RAW N STEN C I L
Live video is se'e n through wherever you draw. INVERT
STENCIL flips i m a ges. Press WIPE STENCIL to start a ga in.
P R E S ET 5 1 :
S L O W F R EEZE A N D D I S I NTEG RATE
Live d i g i t a l image freezes slowly into a disintegra ted ima ge.
P R ES ET 52:
SL I D E STI L L I MAG E TO V I D EO
S t i l l image slides slowly to l e f t. VIDEO I input appears
behind.
P R ES ET 5 3 :
CO L O U R BAC KG R O U N D
Puts a f l a t colour behind l ive image. Ensure c h roma key levels
are set u p correctly. Move H.S.V. sl iders for other colo u rs.
P R ES ET 54:
P I X E LAT E F L I P
A l ternates between pixela ted digital and non-pixela ted a nalog
image. R ATE 2 slider controls a lternation rate. Use ZOOM and
STRETCH to a l ter pixelation. Press FREEZE to capture pixelated
image.
P R ES ET 5 5 :
I MAG E OVE R C O L O U R W I P E
C o l o u r w i p e down t h e screen behind live analog image. Ensure
correct chroma key levels. Move H.S.V. sliders for a gradual
colou r change as wipe proceeds. Press COLOUR WIPE for another
background wipe. Press INVERT STENCIL for the i nvisible
person. Press USE STENCIL to un-display (but not clear)
background.
P R ES ET 56:
U N D E R-OVER ST EN C I L D RAW I N G
Content o f background is drawn to foreground, i n front of live
image. Press FREEZE. Live image is frozen to background, and
the same stencil uses frozen image a s foreground. Pressing
INVERT STENCIL reverses this situation and lets you u n d r a w the
stencil.
I G ETTING STARTED 23 1 -
P R ES ETS
P R ES ET 57:
U N D ER- OVER CATC H - U P
Background is updated with live video at a rate determined b y
the RATE 2 slider. L i v e image m u s t move f o r effect to be seen.
D r a w i n g puts background (which follows live ima ge) to
foreground with live image sliced in between. Press COLOURIZE
for a colourized image catchin,g u p to the normal image. Press
INVERT STENCIL for normal background following invisible
live image. Use ZOOM and STRETCH to advanta ge. Press
FREEZE to capture digital image. Normal analog image still
comes through.
P R ES ET 58:
P U S H TO F R EEZ E
Pressing FREEZE grabs the current chroma keyed image and
stores i t into the background. Each subsequent press of FREEZE
stores another live image. Press WIPE COLOUR to clear
background. ZOOM and STRETCH work well here.
P R E S ET 59:
T RA I L
Current ch roma keyed image is continually and rapidly
grabbed or frozen as in PRESET 58. This results in a trail of
ima ges. A rapidly moving live i mage shows this effect well.
P ressing FREEZE stops the trail. Pressing it again starts the trail.
ZOOM and STRETCH complement this PRESET.
P R ES ET 60:
T RA I L - STRO B E
Same a s PRESET 59, but grab rate is set b y the RATE 2 slider.
This results in a strobed trail of images. A rapidly moving live
image shows t h is effect well. Pressing FREEZE stops the trail.
Pressing it again starts the trail. ZOOM and STRETCH.
P R ES ET 6 1 :
TRAI L - S L I D E
Same a s PRESET 60 except slide is ma ximum, spreading o u t
f r ozen ima ges. E a c h image is one f i e l d behind the a c t u a l l i v e
i mage. A d j u s t HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN sliders for
s l i d ing. Try ZOOMING up, pressing FREEZE, and ZOOMING
back. The trail records the zooming.

PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 62 :
T RA I L - S L I D E . Z O O M
This i s a precursor for PRESET 63. Gra bs images a s i n
PRESETS 60 a n d 6 1 b u t a u toma tically. Ca ptu res around one h a l f
second of live video. For b e s t e ffect, have l i v e i m a g e moving and
wait until P R ESET zoom is finished before going to PR ESET 63.
P R ES ET 63 :
B O I L I N G K EY E D I MAG ES
This P R ESET n e e d s P R E S E T 62 a s a p rereq uisite. Multi-grabs
of zoomed live i mage are s l i d i n g a t a certa in rate set by
HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN. Move these sliders to mid
posi tion to stop s l i d i n g and see actual still i ma ge 'grabs'. By
sliding a t a set ra te, these grabs superi mpose and a n i mate. ZOOM,
STRETCH a n d COLOURIZE are useful here too.
P R ES ET 64:
OV E R LA P M I R R O R
Similar t o PRESET 3 1 , but l i ve a n a log i s i n fron t of
reflections. HORIZON T A L P A N slider positions right mirror.
Press FREEZE to capture reflections and see left mirror.
P R ES ET 6 5 :
OV E R LA P M I R R O R W I T H T RA I L A N D S T R O B E
S a me a s PRESET 64 except image is continuously frozen a n d
stored. R A T E 2 controls how f a s t s t r o b i n g occurs. F R E E Z E stops
all u p d a t i n g.
P R ES ET 66:
C O L O U R T RAI L
Chroma keyed image i s frozen a n d stored to backgroun d a s a
random colour, hence the H.S.V. sliders have no effect. Rate of
colour change is controlled by RATE 1 . If at minimum, cha nge is
very slight. Select Hue,sat.,value i n the COLOUR CONTROL
menu, a n d live image will wipe the background with colour
selected by the H.S.V. slide rs. Use ZOOM, STRETCH a n d
COLOURIZE for more effect.
P R E S ET 6 7 :
M I R RO RS . CO L O U R T RA I L
Similar to PRESET 66. Live chroma keyed image is not
displayed, only trail i n g random colours. All this is mirrored.
FREEZE will stop the image upda ting. Select Music from the
COLOUR CONTROL menu and t r y the audio input.
IG ETTIN G STARTED - 25 I
PR ES ETS
P R ES ET 68:
OVE R LA P M I R ROR - N EGATIVE C O L O U R I Z E
S i m i l a r to PRESET 64, but colo uri zed.
P R ES ET 69:
D O P P EL G A N G E R
'
Live a n a log image is keyed over shifted live d igital image.
D i g i t a l image can be positioned with the PAN sliders. ZOOM and
STRETCH.
P R ES ET 70
T RA I L C RAW L
Current chroma keyed image is continually frozen as in
PRESET 59, but the trail is composed, of crawling colour. Move
H.S.V. sliders for changes in colour. Press FREEZE once to stop
u p d a te of trail. Press FREEZE again to continually update.
P R ES ET 7 1 :
CATC H - U P
Live analog image chroma keyed over strobed digital image.
Digital image is always 'ca tching up' to the analog image. RATE
2 slider sets how fast the catch-up is. FREEZE will halt the
catch-up. INVERT STENCIL will show digital i mage through the
stencil created by the analog i mage.
P R ES ET 72:
CATC H - U P COL O U R I Z E
Same a s PRESET 7 1 , but using a Range colourization.
P R ES ET 73:
G H OST - S I N G L E F R EEZE
Double exposure between frozen digital image and live video.
Press FREEZE to update frozen image. ZOOM, STRETCH and
COLOURIZE.
P R ES ET 74:
P E R S I ST E N C E OF V I S I O N
Similar to PRESET 73 , but digital i mage is contin ually frozen
at a rate set by RATE 2. Digital image is also Solarize colourized,
with negative COLOUR DEPTH. Press FREEZE to see still
d igital image. This PRESET characterizes the human eye effect
o f vision persistence.
126 - GETTING STARTED 1

PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 7 5 :
SOFT P I X EL S
A double exposure between l i v e a n d digital image, with ZOOM
slider set to around 1 /4 from full zoom. Similar to looking
through a patterned glass window. STRETCH controls pixels too.
COLOURIZE and FREEZE.
N OT E :
Presets 7 6 t o 8 0 are the presets used t o duplicate the scene on
the CVI demonstration video tape with the ballerina dancing
between frozen images of herself and a blue and white checkered
background. A blue chroma key background a nd correct ch roma
key levels are essential for this.
P R ES ET 76:
D I G I TAL I MAG E
Press FREEZE to capture image. This will be used to generate
a stencil. Press PRESET button followed by DRAW LOCK for
next PRESET. PRESET 7 6 i s a lso good for drawing "crawl i n g
worms" o v e r digital image.
P R ES ET 7 7 :
COLO U R D ET ECT
Previously frozen i mage wi l l be stencilled out from the blue
background. Press on GRAPHICS PAD. The stenci l=> cursor will
appear. Position cursor to blue area and lift from pad. A stencil
wipe will commence across the screen taking about 6 seconds.
Everywhere that i s blue-ish will have the stencil turned Off.
Thus, the frozen i mage will b e cut out and put in the Stencil on
area. Due to the Under-over selection i n the STENCIL SOURCE
menu, the cut out stencil will be over (in front of) live a n a log
image.
P R ES ET 78:
C L EA N U P ST EN C I L
I f lighting levels are not set up adequately, or some parts of
the i ma ge are indistinct (eg., hair strands), break-through of blue
may occur. Some touching up of the stencil may be necessary.
This PRESET lets you clean u p and erase the stencil. Firstly,
move H O RIZONTAL PAN to mid position (to stop sl ide). Now,
just draw w herever stencil n ee d s it. Turn D R A W LOCK o f f to
assist i n positioning cursor before drawing, then press DRAW for
temporary drawing. Use the smallest Brush shape for fine detail.
PAN and ZOOM sliders can facilitate stencil clean u p too. Also
try the Sten cil Draw/Erase selector in Paint Menu 4.
IGETT I N G S T A R T E D - 27 1
PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 79:
U N D E R - OVER BAC KG R O U N D W I P E
Stencil image slides i n front of l i v e image a n d a background
co l o u r w i pe down the screen occu rs. Move the H.S.V. sliders while
w i p e is progress i n g for d i ffere n t colou rs.
P R ES ET 8 0 :
U N D E R -OVER TEXTU R E W I P E
A checkered texture i s added to the background. Move ZOOM
a n d STRETCH sliders for a d d i tional control. You can draw i n
t h e background with random coloured arrow B r u s h sha pe, using a
S p i n symmetry. Press DRAW STENCIL to put arrows onto the
s tencil, i n front of the live ima ge.
P R ES ET 8 1 :
M U S I C STRO B E
S o u n d controlled strobe effect freezes the live image. Thus an
i m a g e can be continually frozen i n time w i th music beats o r
p u l s es. A d j u s t the AUDIO SENSITIVITY control i n the
e l ectron ics u n i t for optimum results.
P R ES ET 8 2 :
M U S I C T RA I L CRAW L
S i m i l a r to PRESET 70, except colour is derived from audio
input a s a m i xture of bass (RED), middle (GREEN) and treble
( B L UE) frequencies. Adjust AUDIO SENSITIVITY. Press
F REEZE to freeze Trail crawl. ZOOM and STRETCH.
P R ES ET 8 3 :
M U S I C C O LO U R TU N N E L
Mus ic controlled Colour tunnel emanating from centre screen,
behind live i mage. ZOOM and STRETCH give different
i m p ressions. INVERT STENCIL makes Colour t u n nel come
through chroma keyed i mage. Press USE STENCIL then INVERT
STENCIL to get rid of live v ideo.
The foll o w i n g PRESETS require live chroma keyed video for

V I DEO 2 i n put.

-
PR ES E TS
P R ES ET 84:
I NT E R NAL KEY - V I D EO 1 AND 2
Area drawn on stencil p l a n e defines what is VIDEO I and
what is VIDEO 2. Initially, V I DEO 1 is displa yed as analog video.
Now draw on the GRAPHICS PAD. VI DEO 2 should start to
a ppear. Press INVERT STENCIL to flip one with the other. See
STENCIL SOURCE menu, Digital and Analog path.
HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN can adjust position of
stencil.
P R ES ET 8 5 :
C H ROMA KEY - V I D EO l OV ER 2
VIDEO 1 takes the digital path, VIDEO 2 the a n a log. Adjust
chroma key levels correctl y. INVERT STENCIL only a llows
VIDEO 2 through where VIDEO I is ch roma keyed.
P R ES ET 86:
C H R O M A K EY - VI D EO 2 OVER 1
Same a s PRESET 8 5 except video paths a re reversed, a n d hence
the source of ch roma key is V ideo 2.
P R ES ET 8 7 :
C H RO MA KEY - l OVER 2 , C O LO U R I Z E D
Same a s PRESET 8 5 except chroma keyed VIDEO I is negative
Monochrome colourized. Press COLOURIZE for normal colours.
P R ES ET 8 8 :
C H ROMA K EY - l OV ER 2 . MOSA I C
Same a s PRESET 8 5 except VIDEO 1 i s zoomed up, g i v i n g a
mosa ic effect. Use ZOOM a n d STRETCH.
P R ES ET 89:
VI D EO 1 /2 FL I P
Alternately displays VIDEO I a n d VIDEO 2 at a rate set by
the RATE 2 slider. Equivalent t o PRESET 8 4 and continually
pressing the INVERT STENCIL b utton. If the two images a r e
similar (eg., faces) then a t a certain flip r a t e , t h e images t e n d t o
merge.
PRES ETS
P R E S ET 90:
D O U B L E EX POS U R E
A vi deo mix between VIDEO 1 (analog path) and VIDEO 2
( d i g i t a l path). Press INVERT STENCIL to display VIDEO 1 only.
P R ES ET 9 1 :
W I P E A C R O S S , 1 TO 2
A Ste n c i l w i p e across the screen from VIDEO 1 (digital) to
V I D E O 2 (ana log). Press WIPE STENCIL for another wipe.
Regain VIDEO 1 by pressing INVERT STENCIL. Wipe may be
stopped at any time by pressing STOP. Re-position stencil with
H O R I ZONTAL PAN.
P R ES ET 92:
W I P E D OW N , 2 TO 1
St e n c i l w i p e down the screen from VIDEO 2 (digital) to
V I D E O 1 (an alog). Press WIPE STENCIL for another wipe.
Regain VIDEO 2 by pressing INVERT STENCIL. Wipe may be
stopped a t any time by pressing STOP. Re-posi tion stencil with
VERTICAL PAN.
P R ES ET 93:
D I S I N T EG RATE, 1 TO 2
VIDEO 1 (digital) disintegrates pixel by pixel to VIDEO 2
( a n a l og). Press WIPE STENCIL to do it again. Press STOP to halt
disin tegration. Regain VIDEO 1 by pressing INVERT STENCIL.
P R ES ET 94:
T EST PATT E R N
A l l o w s correct alignment o f video monitor.
P R ES ET 9 5 :
V I D EO 2 T H R O U G H
VIDEO 2 straight through analog and digital paths for setting
up levels. Initial i mage is analog. Press INVERT STENCIL to see
d i g i t a l i m a g e.

PR ESETS
P R E S ET 96:
V I D EO 1 T H RO U G H
VIDEO I straight through analog and digital paths for setting
u p levels. Initial image is analog. P ress INVERT STENCIL to see
digital image.
P R ES ET 97:
CO LO U R BARS
Allows correct colour alignment o f video monitor a n d CVI.
P R ES ET 98 :
C H RO M A K EY S ET U P , V I D EO 2
Set up correct chroma key levels for VIDEO 2 input. Ch roma
key levels for VIDEO 2 are independent of VIDEO 1 .
To set levels, use H.S;V. sl iders. These s l iders change function
here and control red, green a n d blue content of chroma key
respectively. When levels are set correctly, blue background w i l l
appear in the complement of b l ue, a pin ky-orange colour. If
keying a face, for example, set H.S.V. sl iders to mid-position.
Adjust HUE (red content) so that face (skin tone) is normal colour
without chroma key speckles. Next adjust VALUE (blue content)
so that a l l of blue background just turns p i n k -orange. Don't
position fader any more than necessary for this. Adjust
SATURA TION (green content) so that a l l of background still just
stays pink-orange.
It may be necessary to repeat these steps a few times to fine
tune the chroma key levels. O n ce levels are set, you may forget
about them, unless lighting conditions cha nge, or the CVI is
turned off.
P R ES ET 99:
C H R O M A K EY S ETU P , V I D EO 1
Set up correct chroma key levels for VIDEO I i n p u t. Chroma
key levels for VIDEO I are independent of VIDEO 2.
See the setup steps for P RESET 9 8 .

U r � � r _
r- I .J .!:. _ _
..il!l.i:
' r r . . . r � ' -:.-
_ _ _ _ _ .....J
Drawing on live video Title o n live v ideo 03 Instant wipe to colour
r-ec' .. n 9 I e �
11 Rectangles. H u e- Sat.
12 Cut and Paste
'!!'!!I
-
!.-
'�
�
� .,"�l�/
:
F
,=
. . .
' '1,
,'\'-'_ : j �j-tf)
\a... � "' c
�
' I
1= i --l - - -
£ 1 � ..
t �
17 Under/Over, colou rized 18 Rectangles w i th pain t crawl 19 Circl es, m o ttled
:::::J
21 Zoom ou t, c o l o u r rectangles 22 BOiling backg round
L
33 Quad mir ror Slow scan ac ross
L:�J;_J�'!:..
------------------------------------------------------ ��
� ---------
56 Under/over stencil 57 Under/over catch up 58 Push to freeze
60
L:�J;_JI.L
��
----------------------------------------------------------�� ------
80 Under/over texture wipe
L:�J;_J�
��
------------------------------------------------------� ---------
L:�J;_Jd
r�.��.........
..................................................................................
Q U I C K S E L E CT I O N P R E S E TS
Each PRESET has a .number and a short description. A more

complete description of the characteristics of each preset is given
i n Section 2 - PRESETS.
00: DRAWING ON LIVE VIDEO

01: DRA WING CARS: COLOURIZED NEGATIVE
02: TITLE ON LIVE VIDEO
03: INSTANT WIPE TO COLOUR
04: SMALL BRUSH
05: FOLIAGE
06: COLOUR WIPE USING STENCIL
07: COpy
08: UNDER-OVER
09: UNDER-OVER SLIDE COLOURIZE
1 0: ST ARS WITH PAINT CRAWL ON LIVE VIDEO
1 1: RECT ANGLES, HUE-SAT.
1 2: CUT and PASTE
1 3: WIPE DOWN
1 4: TEXTURE WIPE-GRID
1 5: RECTANGLE
1 6: RUBBER BANDING
1 7: UNDER-OVER, COLOURIZED
1 8: RECTANGLES WITH PAINT CRAWL
1 9: CIRCLES, MOTTLED
20: CHROMA KEY OVER SLIDING STILL
21: ZOOM OUT, COLOUR RECTANGLES
22: BOILING BACKGROUND
23: FILLING GRID WITH RANDOM COLOUR
24: CHROMA KEYED IMAGE OVER COLOUR FILLED
GRID
25: COLOURIZE - SPECTR UM
26: COLOURIZE - NUCLEAR ATTACK
27: COLOURIZE - SEPIA TONED
28: COLOURIZE - POSTERIZED
29: COLOURIZE - NEGATIVE
30: PIXELA TION
31: HORIZONTAL MIRROR
32: VER TICAL MIRROR
33: QUAD MIRROR
34: SLOW SCAN ACROSS
35: SLOW SCAN DOWN
36: ZOOM OUT IMAGES
37: BOILING IMAGES
38: STROBE
39: SINGLE FREEZE STENCIL DRAWING
40: SHA TTER - DRAWN STENCIL
41: SLIDE SHATTER - TEXTURE
42: SLIDE SHATTER - CHECKERBOARD
43: SEPIA TONED PHOTO TAKING
44: PARTIAL COLOURIZE - GRID
45: COLOURIZE FLIP
46: PAR TIAL COLOURIZE - HEARTS
Q U I C K S E L E CT I O N P R E S ETS
47: SLAPSTICK
48: PAR TIAL COLOURIZE - CHECKERBOARD
49: PARTIAL COLOURIZE - DIAGONALS
50: HOLE - DRAWN STENCIL
51: SLOW FREEZE A N D DISINTEGRATE
52: SLIDE STILL IMAGE
53: COLOUR BACKGROUND
54: PIXELA TE FLIP
55: IMAGE OVER COLOUR WIPE
56: . UNDER-OVER STENCIL
57: UNDER-OVER CATCH-UP
58: PUSH TO FREEZE
59: TRAIL
60: TRAIL - STROBE
61: TRAIL - SLIDE
62: TRAIL - SLIDE, ZOOM
63: BOILING KEYED IMAGE
64: OVERLAP MIRROR
65: OVERLAP MIRROR WITH TRAIL AND STROBE
66: COLOUR TRAIL
67: COLOUR MIRRORS, TRAIL
68: OVERLAP MIRROR - NEGATIVE COLOURIZE
69: ' DOPPELGANGER
70: TRAIL CRAWL
71: CATCH-UP
72: CATCH-UP COLOURIZE
73: GHOST - SINGLE FREEZE
74: PERSISTENCE OF VISION
75: SOFT PIXELS
76: DIGITAL IMAGE
77: COLOUR DETECT
78: CLEAN UP STENCIL
79: UNDER-OVER BACKGROUND WIPE
80: UNDER-OVER TEXTURE WIPE
81: MUSIC STROBE
82: MUSIC TRAIL CRAWL
INTERN AL KEY - VIDEO 1 AND 2

83: MUSIC COLOUR TUNNEL
84:
85: CHROMA KEY - VIDEO l OVER 2
86: CHROMA KEY - VIDEO 2 OVER 1
87: CHROMA KEY - l OVER 2, COLOURIZED
88: CHROMA KEY - l OVER 2, MOSAIC
89: VIDEO 1 /2 FLIP
WIPE ACROSS, 1 T O 2
90: DOUBLE EXPOSURE
91:
92: WIPE DOWN, 2 TO 1
9 3: DISINTEGRATE, 1 TO 2
94: TEST PATTERN
9 5: VIDEO 2 THROUGH
96: VIDEO 1 THROUGH
97 : COLOUR BARS
CHROMA KEY SETUP, VIDEO 1

98: CHROMA KEY SETUP, VIDEO 2
99:
1 42 - GETTING STARTED I
,.... PAI NT MEN U VI DEO MEN U
\
Pa i n t m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................. 1 Video menu....... . ................................................... 40
Pa i n t m e t h o d m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . Di s p l a y c o n t ro l m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2
Brush shape m e n u ... . ............................................ 10 St e n c i l s o u r c e . . . . ................................................... 50

Pa i n t t y p e m e n u . . . . . . . . ........................................... 14 Screen control menu... ..... .................................... 52
Te x t u r e m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................... 15 Freeze control menu ... .. ............. ..... ................. . ... 55
Co l o u r c o n t r o l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... 19 Colo u r i z e con trol m e n u ..... . ................................. 57
Colour t y p e menu................................................ 2 1 P r e s e t s c o n t r o l m e n u .................. . ........................ 61
Sy m m e t r y m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Seq u e n c e r m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................ 68
Colour w i pes............. . ........................................... 28 Sa v e a n d r e c a l l m e n u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
St e n c i l w i p e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Se t u p m e n u . . . . . . . . ................................................... 81
Ti t l e e d i t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6 Q u i c k selec t i o n video menu.... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
PA I N T M E N U
The PAINT MENUS menu is a list of the available menus in

the paint category. These menus can be selected by the means
outlined i n Section 1 under 'MENUS - What are they?'.
0) Paint M ethod : Defines how the stylus movements on the

GRA P H I CS PAD are interpreted into lines and shapes on the
screen.
1) B ru s h S h a p e : Defines the shape and size of brush you

draw with. Brush shapes apply to both the stencil and field
stores.
2) Paint Typ e : Selects the simulation of the type o f 'paint'

you use. For example, Flat is equivalent to usi ng opaque acrylic
paints, Shade=> simulates an airbrush effect, and so on.
Specifical l y, Paint type controls the way in which colour depth
varies over the brush surface.
3) Text u res : Defines visual texture to be used in d ifferent

ways o n the screen, by either drawing with it, filling a reas, or
wiping the whole screen with the texture. Textures may be used
on both the stencil and field stores.
4) Colour Contro l : Defines what is controlling the colour

specified.
PAINT MENU - 1
PAI N T M E N U
5) Colour Type : Selects the way i n which the colour you draw
o r w i p e with affects the colour already on the screen.
6) Symmetry: Selects a symmetry which is used for drawing,

o n b o t h s t e n c i l and field stores. Symmetry occurs as the image is
drawn.
7) Colour Wipes : Defines changes to t h e field store which

occur o v e r t h e entire screen.
8) Stencil Wipes : Defines changes to the stencil plane which

occur over the entire screen.
9) Title Edit : Ena bles you to edit a title or caption. I t includes

a n on-screen alpha numeric keyboard with various character sizes
a n d f o r m a ts. Titles apply to both the stencil and field stores.
2 - PAINT MENU
PAI N T M ET H O D M E N U
This menu controls the w a y in which the moveme n t o f the

stylus on the GRAPHICS PAD res u l t s i n li nes or forms o n the
screen.
The D R A W COLOUR button must be on if you wish to draw on
the field store, and the D R A W STENCIL must be on to draw the
stencil. Both DRAW COLOUR and DRAW STENCIL may b e on.
COLOUR TYPE, BR USH SHAPE, PAINT TYPE, COLOUR
CONTROL, a n d SYMMETR Y menu selections will all affect the
drawing process.
I f the USE TEXTURE bu tton is on, then the TEXTURES menu
also has a n effect.
Dejag: This option removes the jagged edges from lines drawn
into the field store. T h i s is done by blending the colour of the
line edges with the colour a l ready i n t h e field store. If DEJAG is
selected then the dejag process will be applied to the Draw,
Rubber band, Circle, E l l i p s e a n d Rays paint methods.
The DEJAG selection i s n o t always desirable. For exa mple,
wh en drawing over live video, the edges o f a dejagged line will
blend with the contents o f t h e field store, wh ich may be u n rela ted
to the l i v e video. This will produce a n unusual border on the
drawn l i n e. There may also be u n usual effects when DEJAG i s
u s e d i n conjunction with the F i l l a n d Copy functions, as t h e
stencil d r a w n w i t h a d ejagged line reaches right to the blended
edge. Hence, DEJAG should be turned on or off as required. The
D E J A G s e l e c t ion i s s a v ed w i t h e a c h PRESET i n t h e u s u a l w a y .
(See Section 3 - PRESETS CONTROL menu).
PAINT MENU - 3
PAI NT M E T H O D M E N U
PA I N T M ET H O D How it is done
0) D raw: A line follows the stylus around a) Select Draw from PAINT METHOD
on screen, i n the Brush shape selected. menu.
b) Turn off D R A W LOCK button. A
cu rsor i n t h e current brush shape and
colour will appear and follow the
moveme n t o f t h e stylus.
c) Posi tion the cu rsor, then press DRAW
or DRAW LOCK button.
d ) A continuous line will be drawn,
following t h e stylus on t h e
GRAPHICS PAD. F o r la rge Brush
shapes, t h e response will be slower
than for smaller ones ..
e) Steps b) to d ) may be repea ted for
mo re lines. It is not n ecessa ry to turn
off D R A W LOCK between li nes, as
lifting t h e stylus from the pad w i l l
s t o p the drawi n g. However, if D R A W
L O C K is on then drawing w i l l begin
as soon as t h e stylus touches the
GRAPHICS PAD.
1 ) Dots : The image of the Brush Shape a ) Select Dots from PAINT METHOD
b) Turn off DRAW LOCK button. A

f o l l o w s the stylus as a series of disjointed menu.
d o ts.
c u rsor i n the current brush shape and
colour will appear and follow the
moveme n t o f the stylus.
c) Posi tion the cu rsor, then press DRAW
or D R A W LOCK button.
d ) If the stylus is moved quickly you
achieve a series of uncon nected Brush
S h a p es; if moved slowly you achiev e a
b u i l d u p of the Brush Shape areas.
This c a n be very effective with
Translucent o r Tint co lour types with
a low COLOUR DEPTH (or low
VALUE for Tint) as a slowly d r a w n
line w i l l 'pool' colou r.
e ) Steps b) to d ) may be repeated to start
another stream of Dots
4 - P A I N T MEN U
PAI NT M ET H O D M E N U
PAI NT M ETH O D H ow it is done:
2 ) Ru bber Band : Provides a n accura te a ) Select R u b b e r B a n d from P A I N T

control over the drawing a n d position of METHOD m e n u .
s(raight l i n e s b) Return to image.
c) Put the stylus to the pa d . A c u rsor in
the current B r u s h s h a p e will a ppear
on the screen. Move the a rrow t i p to
the beg i n n i n g of the lines t h a t you
wish to d raw, and lift the stylus. This
defines the start of a series of l i n es.
d) P u t stylus to pad again.
e) A s i n gle pixel-width line will a ppear
to define the l i ne. This w i l l follow
the stylus moveme n ts a ro u n d the
screen, goi n g from the last defined
p o i n t to the current stylus position.
f) L i f t the stylus: The l i n e w i l l be d ra w n
i n your p a i n t selec tions.
Steps d ) to f) may be repeated a s often

as desired. If you press STOP, or turn
off D R A W IDRA W LOCK, you w i l l
r e t u r n to step c ) , d e f i n i n g a new
sta r t i n g p o i n t .
3) Circle: For drawing c ircles on the a) S e l e c t C i r c l e f r o m P A I N T METHOD

screen - the circle i s drawn wit h B r u s h menu.
shape a n d T e x t u r e s a n d a n y other selections b) Return to ima ge.
made. c) Put the s tylus to the pad. A cu rsor
s a y i n g ci rcle=> will a ppear o n the
screen . Move the arrow t i p to the
c e n t re of the circle that you wish to
d r a w , and lift the stylus.
d ) Put stylus to pad again.
e) A series of dots will a ppear to define
the circle. Move the stylus to d efine
the desired r a d i us, and the circle of
dots will follow the stylus.
f) Lift the stylus: A circle w i l l be d rawn
in your paint selections.
Steps c) to f) may be repeated a s o ften

as d esired. If you press STOP, or t u r n
off D R A Wl O R A W LOCK, before step
f) the c i rcle will not be d ra w n .
P A I N T MENU - 5
PAI N T M ET H O D How it is done:

4) Ellipse: For drawing ellipses o n the a ) Select Ellipse from PAINT METHOD
s c r e e n - the ell ipse is drawn with Brush menu.
shape and Textures and any other selections b) Return to i mage.
made. You may define the ellipse as being c) Put the stylus to t h e pad. A cursor
n a r ro w , wide, short, long, or anywhere in saying e l l i p se=> will appear on the
b e t w e e n , with any orientation and size. screen. Move the arrow tip to the
centre of the ellipse that you wish to
draw, and lift the stylus.
d) Put stylus to pad again.
e) A series of dots will appear, defining
a circle. Move the stylus to define the
radius, such that t h e circle will fit
just inside (or a round) the desired
ellipse. Lift the stylus.
f) Put stylus to pad again, and an ellipse
of dots w i l l appear on screen, and will
follow the stylus movements on the
pad. The current stylus positio n will
stretch or squash the previously
defined circle into an ellipse with any
desired orientation and ratio of major
to minor diameters.
g) Lift the stylus: An ellipse will be
drawn in your paint selections.
Steps c) to g) may be repeated as often

off DRAW /DRA W LOCK, before step
g), the e l l ipse will not be drawn.
5) Rectangle: For drawing rectangles on a) Select Rectangle from PAINT

the screen - the rectangle is drawn with METHOD menu.
B r u s h s h a p e and Textures and any other b) Return to i mage.
s e l e c t i o n s made. It can be of any aspect c) Put the stylus to the pad. A cursor
ra t i o and si ze, but will be aligned saying rect.=> will appear on the
h o r izontally and vertically. Use the Rubber screen. Mo ve the a r row tip to any
b a n d selection to draw non-aligned corner of the rectangle that you wish
r e c t a n g l es. to draw, a n d lift the stylus.
d ) Put stylus to pad a g a i n .
e) A series of d o t s w i l l appea r to d e f i n e
the rectangle. Mov e the sty l u s to
d e f i n e the opposite cor n er of the
rectangle.
f) Lift the stylus: A recta n g l e will be
drawn i n your paint selections.
Steps c) to f) may be repeated as often

off DRAW /DRA W LOCK, before step
f) the rectangle will not be drawn.
6 - P A I N T MENU
r PAI N T M ET H O D H ow it is done:
6 ) Rays : For d r a w i n g lines r a d i a ting a ) Select R a y s from Pa i n t Me thod menu.
from a point. The rays a re d ra w n with b) R e t u r n t o image.
Brush shape and Textures a n d any other c) Put t h e s t y l u s to the pad. A cu rsor
selections made. saying rays=> will a ppea r on t h e
s c r e e n . M o v e t h e cursor to t h e c e n t r e
of the r a y s tha t you wish t o d r a w , a n d
l i f t the s tylus.
d ) Put stylus to pad a g a i n .
e) A series o f l i n es using the c u r r e n t
p a i n t s e l e c t i o n s w i l l a p pea r joi n i n g
t h e rays c e n t r e with the c u r r e n t s t y l u s
position.
Steps c ) t o e) m a y be repea ted to

c r e a t e rays with di f fe r e n t c e n t res.
Ch a n ges i n H.S.V. a nd COLOUR
D E PTH s l i d ers while d ra w i n g r a y s
w i l l c h a n ge t h e r a y colour.
7) Cut & Pa ste : Ena bles you to 'pick a) Select C u t & Paste from PAINT
up' a n area defined by the B rush shape and METHOD me nu.
copy t h a t a r e a again somewhere else on the b) Select o r define the req u i r ed Brush
screen as many t i mes a s you w a n t. I f you s h a p e i n the B R USH SHAPE menu.
w a n t to copy arbitrary a reas, use the Copy c) Return to ima ge.
paint method. d ) Put s t y l u s to pad, a cursor h a v i n g t h e
b r u s h sha pe w i l l a p pea r.
e) Position the brush shape o v e r the a re a
you w i s h to ' c u t ou t'.
f) L i f t s t y l us.
g) S t y l u s to pad. The brush s h a p e w i l l
a ppear c o n t a i n i n g the i m a ge t h a t you
h a v e 'cu t ou t'.
h) Move brush s h a p e to desired position.
The cut o u t image will be copied to
t h e position w h ere you l i f t t h e s t y l us.
Steps g) a n d h ) m a y be repeated u n til
D R A W j D R A W LOC K , in which case

STOP i s pressed, o r you turn o f f
t h e d e f i n i t i o n o f a not h e r a r ea for
the CVI returns to step d), and al l o w s
copying.
P A I N T MENU - 7
PA I N T M ET H O D H ow it is done:
8) F i l l : Fill a n a rea of the image. This a ) Select F i l l from PAINT METHOD
p�int method enables you to fill a n a rea on menu.
t h e s c r e e n with colour, texture or colour b) Return to ima ge.
m o d i fica tion. The a rea to be filled is c) Put the stylus to the pad. The stencil
s p e c i f i ed on the stencil plane, and must be will be i l l u minated a n d a cursor
c r e a t e d be/ore the Fill function is started. saying f i l l=> will appear on the
T h e b o u n d a r y of the area to be filled must screen. If you wish to fill the stencil
b e c o n t i n u o us ; i f there are any 'leaks' the plane only, turn off the DRAW
f i l l i n g p r o cess will continue until the next COLOUR button at this point.
b o u n d a r y . To terminate Fill before it is d) Keeping t h e stylus down, alter the
c o m p l e t e , press the STOP button. H.S.V. sliders to desired colour. Move
the c u rsor to a point inside the area of
stencil that you wish to fill.
e) Lift the stylus. The stencilled a rea
will be filled. The t i me taken to fill
an area is dependent on the size and
complexity of the area. This area may
be of either stencil polarity.
Repea t steps c) to e) to fill other

stencil areas.
I ) As the stencil i s filled i n during the

Fill function, a given area may be
filled once only. Use the Stencil
Show function to observe the fill i n g
of the stencil.
2) The area to be filled is defined by the
stencil, irrespective of t h e contents of
the field store.
9) Copy: This is a cut and paste function a ) Select Copy from PAINT METHOD
that is q u i te versatile, enabling you to menu.
j u x t a p o s e elements in an image to create b) If req ui red, select a symmetry pattern
m u l t i p l e repeti tion. I t is slower than the from t h e SYMMETRY menu.
C u t & P a s t e function, but a l lows arbitrary c) Define the area to be copied by using
s t e n c i l a reas to be copied. Copy may be the S t e n c i l Draw/Erase a nd/or
s t o p p e d a t any sta ge by pressing the STOP STENCIL WIPE functions. To see t h e
button. stencil as it is b e i n g drawn, e n a b l e the
Stencil S h o w selection i n the Paint
Me nu 4.
d ) Return to i m a ge.
e) Put stylus to pad. A cursor saying
fro m=> will a p pear, and the stencil
a rea will be i l l u minated.
8 - PAINT MENU
PAI N T M ET H O D M E N U
H ow it is done
f) Move the tip of the c u rsor to a point
w i t h i n the area to be copied (either
stencil O n o r stencil Off ). This is the
c r i tica l step: ensure that the cursor tip
is within the correct region, o r the
background will be copied!
g ) L i f t the stylus from the GRAPHICS
P A D.
h ) P u t stylus t o pad again. Another
cursor appears on screen saying to=>.
Move the c u rsor t o the position to
w h ich you wish to copy the s te n c i l led
image.
i) L i f t the stylus from pad i n preferred
position. The to=> cursor w i l l
disappear a nd the copy f u n c t i o n w i l l
commence. It ta kes a pprox i ma t e l y 5
seconds to complete.
Repeat steps e) to i) to make multiple

copies o f t h e original image.
1 ) I f the USE TEXTURE button is on,

the copied image will be textured.
2 ) A s with a l l P a i n t Methods, i f the
COLOUR TYPE menu selection is
other than Opaque, the image copy
will not be a 'solid' image. For
i nstance, i f Transl ucen t colour type is
used w i t h the COLOUR DEPTH slider
midway between + and 0, the copied
i ma ge w i l l be similar in effect to a
p h otogra phic double exposure.
3 ) I f a symmetry other than o r r is
selected, the cop ied ima ge w i l l be
drawn with t h a t symmetry.
4 ) T h e i n i t i a l i mage - that is, the
original stenci l l ed area, is protected
from being copied over. I f the copy is
intended to overlap the i n i t i a l image,
cancel the protective stencil by
turning off USE STEN CIL between
the from=> and to=> c u rsors.
5) All of the stencilled a reas of the
polarity selected by the from=> c u rsor
will be copied. They do not h a v e to
be connected.
Experiment: it's a lot easier than it

so unds!
PAINT MENU - 9
BRUSH SHAPE M E N U
'_ .-
This menu allows you to select from a choice of 54 predefined

B r u s h s h a p es. As well, you may create your own Brush sha p e, o r
use a n y of the Texture shapes f r o m t h e TEXTURE m e n u ( P a i n t
Men u 3 ) as a brush.
These 'brushes' can be used to paint in a variety of ways, either
on the field store or the stencil plane. Drawing will remain i n the
B r u s h sha p e specified until changed.
Note: that BRUSH SHAPE menu is connected to TEXTURES
menu via the large top right hand box. This means that you may
use any of the 54 Textures as a Brush shape. A simi lar fac i l i t y
e x ists i n t h e TEXTURES m e n u , a l l o w i n g any B r u s h s h a p e to b e
used as a Tex t u re.
1 10 - PA INT MENU I
B R U S H S H APE
T o s e l e c t a predefined B r u s h shape ...
selected Brush shape a p p e a r s

here
move cursor to any of these

shapes and lift stylus
F u r t h e r Brush shapes are selec ted i n the following way •..
selected current currently

Brush shape llser-defined selected
for drawing B r ush s h a p e T e x t u r e from
TEXTURE men u
t t
moves user-defined B r u s h moves Texture i n t o user
s h a p e i n to selected B r u s h defined Brush s h a p e a n d
shape selected Brush shape
PAINT MENU - 11
B R U S H SHAPE
F u r t h e r f u nctions o f t h e BRUSH SHAPE menu are .•.
t t
move curso r move cursor move cursor
here to e d i t here to edit here to jump to
B r u s h shape- Brush shape - TEXTURE menu
menu w i l l change menu will change (to change
to t h i s to this current Texture)
B RUSH SHAPE EDITOR ...
Position curso r a n ywhere i n

t h i s area a n d lift styl us. A dot
will either appear o r
d i s a p p e a r . Build up a n e w
B r u s h s h a p e f o r p a i n t i n g . The
new Brush shape will appear
here i n a c t u a l
si ze, a s you b u i l d it.
1 12 - PAINT MENU I
B R U S H S HAPE
A n e w Brush shape h a s been

built up.
/"'� o r to h e r e ,
To r e t u r n to pre vious m e n u ,
move cursor t o t �#",
or press O R A W b u t t o n
(dou bles as P R E V I O U S m e n u
b u t to n ) .
N e w B r u s h s h a p e is d is p l a yed
i n selected Brush shape a r ea
and user-defined B r u s h s h a p e
area.
H e r e a n o th e r B r u s h s h a p e h a s
b e e n s e l e c t e d for d r a w i ng.
N o t e t h a t user-defined Brush
s h a p e is still ava i l a bl e f o r use.
Just m o v e i t into t h e selected
B r u s h s h a p e a r e a by m o v i n g
c u rs o r h e re.
I PAINT MENU - 13 I
PAI NT TYPE M E N U
T h i s menu selects how the colour depth or transparency varies

a c ross the surface of the Brush shape as i t is drawn. This gives
a p proximate simula tions of different types of painting media as
f l a t a c rylics (Flat), crayons (Mo t tled), and airbrushes (Shade).
0) F lat :The simplest paint type. All of the area covered by

brush movement will have consistent colour depth, that which is
specified by the COLOUR DEPTH slider.
1 ) S patter: This selection will leave a spattering of random

dots in t h e drawn areas.
2) M ottled : Provides a mottled effect: the l ines drawn will

h a v e random colour d epth variations over the width of the brush,
providing a n irregular appearance.
3) Shad e : The left hand side of the brush will have full
i n t ensity colour, which will decrease across the Brush shape to t h e
r i g h t hand s i d e , which will h a v e minimum intensity.
4) Shade : The top of the brush will have full intensity

col o u r, which will decrease down the Brush shape to the bottom,
w h i c h will have minimum intensity.
5) H ue-Sat : This paint type is different from the others, in

t h a t i t ignores any colour specified by the HUE, SATURATION
a n d V ALUE sliders, and replaces it with a colour which is
dependent upon the position of the point drawn to the screen.
The replaced colour is of varying hue and saturation, but always
has f u l l value ( brightness). COLOUR TYPES are still active,
wh ich can further modify the colour that Hue-sat selects. The
F A I R L I GHT logo that appears when the CVI is first switched on
is an example of the Hue-sat paint type.
1 14 - PAINT MENU I
T E XTU R E M E N U
The TEXTURE me nu allows you to select from a choice of 54

Textu res. As well, you may cre a t e your own Textu re, or use a ny
of the Brush shapes from the BRUSH SHAPE menu ( Pa i n t Me nu
1 ) a s a Texture.
To use a texture w h i l e d r a w i n g, press the USE TEXTURE
button. This applies to d r a w i n g o n the field store (press ORA W
COLOUR button) or drawing on the stencil (press ORA W
STENCIL button) or both. Textures may be 'wiped' over a l l or
part of the screen by selecting T e x t u r e i n the COLOUR WIPES
menu. Likew ise, T e x t u r e can be selected in STENCIL WIPES to
cover the stencil pla n e w i th a pattern.
Note that the TEXTURE menu i s c o n nected to the BRUSH
SHAPE menu via the large top right hand box. This means that
you may use any of t h e 5 4 Brush shapes as a T e x t u re. A similar
facility e x ists in the BRUSH SHAPE menu, allowing a ny Texture
to be used as a B r u s h shape.
N OT E :
1 ) When wishing t o dra w or p a i n t with T e x t u r e e n s u r e that
USE TEXTURE b u t to n is On.
2) I f dra wing with Texture (or without texture) O R A W or
ORA W LOCK must also be On.
3 ) To w i p e the field store with a texture, Texture must be
selected on the COLOUR WIPES Menu. Press WI PE
COLOUR button.
4) To w i p e the stencil p l a n e w i t h a t e x t u r e , Texture must be
selected on the STENCIL WIPES Me nu. Press WIP E
STENCIL button.
P A I N T MENU - IS
T EXTU R E M E N U
To s e l e c t a predefined Tex t u r e
selected T e x t u r e appears here
move c ursor to any of t h ese

p a t t e r n s a n d l i f t stylus
F u r t h e r T e x t u res are selected i n the following way •••
currently
selected
Brush shape
selected current from
T e x t u re user-defined BRUSH SHAPE
for d r a w i n g Tex t u r e menu
! ! !
t
moves user-defined Tex t u r e
t
moves Brush shape into user
i n to selected Tex t u r e defined Tex ture and selected
Tex t u r e
16 - PAINT MENU
T E XTU R E M E N U
r Further f u n c t i o n s of the TEXTURE m e n u a re ...
1
move c u rsor
1
move c u r s o r
1
m o v e c u rsor
here to edit h e r e to e d i t h e r e to j u m p to
Texture - Texture - B R US H S H A P E
menu will change menu w i l l c h a n ge m e n u (to c h a n ge
to t h i s to this current brush)
Position c u rsor a n y w h e r e i n
1 !
this area a n d l i f t s t y l u s. A d o t
w i l l either a p pear o r
disappear. Build u p a n e w
Texture. T h e n e w Texture w i l l
a p p e a r h e r e i n actual size, a s
y o u build i t .
PAINT M E N U - 17
T E XTU R E M E N U
A new Texture
has been built up.
To r e t u r n to pre v ious menu,

move cursor t o rJ or to here,
or p ress DRAW button
( d o u b l es a s PREVIOUS menu
bu t ton).
New Texture is displayed in

selectedTexture area and user-
defined Texture area.
�
L selected
L user-defined
Texture area
Texture area
Here another Texture h a s

b e e n selected. N o t e t h a t user
defined Texture is s t i l l
a v a i lable for u s e . Just move
i t into the selected Texture
area b y moving cursor here.
L selected
user-defined
Tex ture area

Texture a rea
I n this example, the current

B r u s h s h a p e h a s been moved
into s e lected a n d user-defined
Te x t u r e area.
selected Texture area
user-defined Texture area .
18 - PAINT MENU
CO LO U R C ONTRO L M E NU
The COLOUR CONTROL menu determines w h a t controls the

colour t h a t y o u draw w i t h or use for Colour wipes.
0) H ue, Sat . , Value: The standard selection for COLOUR

CONTROL. The colours you use and see are controlled by the
H.S.V. slider con trols in the normal fashion.
1) M usic: Colour is controlled by music (audio input requi red).

This selection overrides the H.S.V. sliders.
2) Random: Colour is cont rolled by a n i n ternal f l u c t u a t i n g

p r o g r a m . This would b e equivalent to randoml y m o v i n g t h e
H.S.V. sliders a r o u n d . The R A T E 1 s l i d e r o n the c o n t r o l console
controls the r a t e of fluctuation. Note that this selection overrides
the H.S.V. sliders.
3) Random B & W: Same effect as R a n d o m but t h e result is

i n black and w h i te.
PAINT MENU - 19
C O LO U R CO N TRO L M E N U
This section of the menu enables various selections with regard

to the use of stencils in addi tion to a selection which enables the
use of the BEEPER.
Stencil Draw/Erase: This selection enables the drawing of

a n internal stencil. If Stencil Draw is selected and the DRAW
STENCIL button is activated, an internal stencil can be created
by drawing on the GRAPHICS PAD or by using one of the Stencil
w i p e s.
If S tencil Erase is selected, areas of a stencil already created
can be erased, either by use of the GRAPHICS PAD or a
STENCIL WIPES menu selection.
The Stencil Draw/Erase selections are used in conjunction with
the DRAW STENCIL, USE STENCIL and INVERT STENCIL
bu ttons and the STENCIL WIPES menu.
Stencil Hide/Show: If Stencil Hide is selected any i n ternal

stencil will not be seen. There may be circumstances when you
require this stencil indicator to be Off, for instance, if you are
recording an effect which involves the actual process of stencil
d r a w ing.
Alternatively if the Stencil Show selection is made then the
areas where the stencil is On become brighter than those areas
where it is Off, provided that the DRAW STENCIL button is
activated. This indicator should normally be On whenever you
wish to draw on the stencil plane, otherwise it will be difficult to
determine what you are drawing.
D ra w Over/ U nder: The Draw Over will not activate stencils

as p rotected areas. This selection may be useful if, for example, a
stencil area is activated with the USE STENCIL button while
using the Paint/Analog selection in the DISPLAY CONTROL
menu. Where the stencil is activated to determine paint and video
areas within one image, the stencil activated paint display can be
updated with further painting actions, even though USE STENCIL
is on.
B eeper Off/On: If this selection is On, the CVI's inbuilt

BEEPER will sound to sign ify that a function is complete or that
a cue point has been reached in the Sequencer.
20 - PAINT MENU
CO LO U R TYP E M E N U
This menu defi nes the way t h a t the colour you d r a w w i t h

a f fects o r combines with the colour on the screen. T h i s i s like
specifyi n g whether paint is to be O p a q u e o r Transl u c e n t , except
that this menu allows a n extra r a n ge of options beyond those
encountered i n traditional med i a . I nteractions between the 'paint'
a n d the existing image that cannot rea d i l y be described i n words
are easily ach ieved. For this reason, e x p e r i menta tion i s probably
the best method to find out what the Colour Types do.
This menu a l lows you to make one selection at a n y one ti me.
Colour type selections a r e closely related to Col o u r i z e t y p e
selections. S e e Section 3 COLOURIZE T Y P E m e n u . Co lo u ri ze
-
types affect the whole digital i mage i n real ti me. C o l o u r t y pes,

however, apply only to still images i n the field store, and occur as
you d ra w on the screen o r wipe the screen w i t h certa i n C o l o u r
Wi pes.
Any combination of Col o u r types may be used in a single image
(though one at a ti me), in d i ffering o r overlaying a reas of the
screen. The effect of v a rious Col o u r t y pes on a d r a w n line or
f illed a rea can be explored by using the correspond i n g C o lo u ri ze
t y pe to colou rize the entire image without making a permanent
change (a colou rized image reverts to the o r i g i n a l if the
COLOURIZE button is turned off.)
PAINT MENU - 21
CO LO U R TY PE M E N U
N OTE: The COLOUR DEPTH slider w i l l affect the amount

o f COLOUR TYPE that is added to t h e image a s shown below.
S e t at t h e middle (zero) position there will be no effect on the
i mage.
+ more Colour type added to image
posi t i v e (+)
o norma l (no Colour type added to image)
negative ( ) -
more negative Colour type added to image
0) Opaque: Specified colour replaces the colour on the screen.

T h i s is t h e o n l y colour type which i s u n affected by the COLOUR
DEPTH s l i d e r.
1 ) Tint: The colour you d ra w w i t h is added to, or subtracted

f r o m the colour you are drawing over, to the extent specified by
t h e COLOUR DEPTH slider. This gives a n effect somewhat
s i m i l a r to transparent inks. This is the most subtle of the c o l o u r
t y p e s , a n d very fin e c o n t r o l of colour is available .
2) Translucent: The colou r you d r a w w i th is mixed with t h e

e x i s t i n g screen colour to the extent that you s p e c i f y w i t h the
COLOUR DEPTH slider. This colour type is simil a r in effect to
w a t e rcol ours, e.g. Red over yellow yields a n orange mix.
3) S h a d e : This colour type i s r e l a ted to Tint, i n t h a t t h e colour

y o u d ra w with is subtracted from t h e screen colour.
22 - PAINT MENU
CO LO U R TYPE M E N U
4) Range: Line drawing on screen specifies the max i m u m

brightness possible, f o r example:
a) If drawing with the H.S.V. and COLOUR DEPTH sliders on

bright red (all three H.S.V. a t top) only the red component of
the colour that was already on screen would remain after the
line drawing.
b) If d rawing with a white line the line will have n o effect.
c) If drawing with black, all you draw will be black, because
black is the 'brightest' colour that will remain.
d) If drawing with yellow the yellow component of what is on
-
screen will remain after the line is d rawn.
5) Solarize: This colour type is somewhat similar to S h ade, but

the colour changes are somewhat more complex, and usually more
aesthetic. See the note at the end of this section.
6) M onochrome: Whatever you draw will be

monochromatically tinted by the colour you specify with the
H.S.V. sliders. The hue component of the existing picture is
removed and only the tonal value (black, grey and white)
i n formation is used. This tonal value is then tinted by the
selected colour.
7) Contour: This colour type is basica lly a form of posterizing.

The component (red, green a n d blue) colours of the HUE,
SATURATION, VALUE selection will determine the degree of
posterizing in the corresponding component colours of the
resultant image. See the note a t the end of this section.
8) S pectrum: This colour type converts the inte1l!Sity of the

original i mage into the h u e of the result. This h u e is offset b y the
HUE specified by the H.S.V. sliders, the SA TURA TION slider
makes the result pastel, if down from maximum, and the VALUE
slider affects the variety o f colours o n the screen. The COLOUR
DEPTH slider affects the degree i n which the original i mage is
changed. See the note below.
N OTE: Colour types Solarize, Range, Mon ochro m e , Contour

and Spectrum are best p u t t o advantage when used in
conjunction with the colou r w ipes Wipe +, Wi pe + or Fill,
with an appropriate maskin g pattern on the stencil plane.
A Colour wipe will effectively be the same a s colourizing the
portion of the screen image that you have specified with the
stencil, with the Colour type that you choose. See the
COLOURIZE TYPE menu section for more information.
P A I N T ME N U - 23
SYM M ETRY M E N U
This menu enables you to specify symmetries for use with the
d r a w i n g facilities. These symmetries are generated as the line is
drawn to the screen. Every point drawn will simultaneously
a ppear in the selected rotations or reflections. The axis of
re flection or centre of rotation is a l ways at centre screen,
i r respective of pan position. This enables you to create an i mage
with multiple centres of rotation and reflection, by panning the
i mage so that a new point is at centre screen. The SYMMETRY
menu d oes not apply to rea l-time images: for live symmetries see
V e r t i c a l and Horizontal m i rror in the SCREEN CONTROL menu.
0) Off: No symmetry axis used - draws directly at the stylus

position. This is the normal selection.
I) H o rizonta l : Reflection in a vertical 'mi rror', creating two

i m a ges as one is d rawn.
24 - PAINT MENU
SYM M ET RY M EN U
2) Vertical: Reflection i n a horizontal 'mirror', creating two

images as one is drawn.
3) F lip: Reversal around the vertical centre li ne. Note t h a t the

original l i n e pos i t i o n is not d r a w n , o n l y the 'reflected' l i ne. This
can make i t a l i t tle confusing to d r a w wi th. This selection i s
m o r e appl icable to t h e Copy P a i n t Method, a n d t h e C h a n g e Colour
Wipe, giving a single reversed cop y .
4) C ross : A com b i n a t i o n of horizontal a n d vertical reflections,

giving four ima ges a s one i s d r a w n .
PAINT MENU - 2S
SYM M ETRY M E N U
5) D iago n a l : Reflection i n both sc reen d i agonals, giving fou r

ima ges, with a diagonal skew.
"
'"
'"
'"
./
/'
'"
./
/'
' ",
'"
L..._
.- ----:....
: "
/'
/'
/'
./
./
/'
/'
6) Kaleidosco p e : A combina tion of cross a n d dia gon al

symmetries, giving a total of eight copies of each drawn poin t.
Note tha t this symmetry in par ti cula r may be very slow, especially
when used with la rge b r u s h s h a p e s .
7) R ota ry : 90 degree rota tion a rou nd the curren t sc reen centre,

giving four ima ges.
I 26 - PAINT MENU
SYM M ETRY M E N U
8) S pin: 1 8 0 degree rotation around the c u rrent screen centre,

g i v i n g two images.
,
.
PAINT MENU - 27 I
CO LO U R W I PES
Colour wipes are processes that affect t h e contents o f t h e field

store. Pressing the WIPE COLO UR button when �n image is
displayed on the screen will activate the selected colour wipe
function. The light in the WIPE COLOUR button w i l l go o u t as
soon as the colour wipe is completed. You may cancel the wipe
before it finishes by pressing the STOP button.
COLOU R WIPE H ow it is done:

0 ) White: Clears the screen insta n t l y to a a ) Select White i n COLOUR WIPES
blank white image. menu.
b) Return to i mage.
c) P ress WIPE COLOUR button.
d ) The screen will be instantly cleared to
w h i te.
1 28 - PAINT MENU I
CO LOU R ',W I PES ,
r COLOUR WIPE H ow it is done:

1 ) Colour: Clears t h e e n t i r e screen a ) S e l e c t C o l o u r i n C O L O U R WIPES
i n s t a n t l y to the colou r s p e c i f i e d b y the menu.
H .S.V. s l i ders. b) R e t u r n to i ma ge.
c ) Press the WIPE COLOUR b u tton .
d ) T h e s c r e e n w i l l b e i n sta n t l y c l e a r e d to
t h e col o u r s p e c i f i e d by t h e H.S.V.
s l i d e rs .
e) A d j u s t t h e H.S.V. s l i d e r s a n d p ress the
WIPE COLOUR b u t t o n a g a i n to obtain
t h e d e s i r e d colou r.
N O T E : The screen c o l o u r and t h e

d r a w i n g c o l o u r w i l l n o w be t h e s a me.
T h e c u rsor and any l i nes d r a w n will n o t
be v i s i b l e ( a s t h e y w i l l be t h e s a m e
c o l o u r a s t h e b a c k g r o u n d ) u n l ess t h e
colo u r is cha nged.
r 2) Text u re : Wipes t h e s c r e e n u s i n g t h e a ) S e l e c t T e x t u r e i n C O LO U R W I P E S
Texture s e l e c t e d o n t h e TEXTUR E S m e n u . menu.
The c o l o u r i s s p e c i f i e d b y t h e H . S . V . s l i d ers, b) S e l e c t the d e s i r e d T e x t u r e i n t h e
and t h e selected Col o u r t y p e is a l so used . If TEXTURES menu.
t h e USE STENCIL b u tton i s o n and the c) R e t u r n t o i m a ge.
D r a w U n d e r selection is m a d e i n Pa i n t d ) P r es s WIPE COLOUR b u t t o n .
Men u 4, t h e n o n l y t h e a re a u n protected b y e) T h e t e x t u r e w i l l be w i ped o v e r t h e
the sten c i l i s w i p ed. A l te r i n g t h e H.S.V. screen.
sliders d u r i n g t h e w i p e w i l l c h a nge t h e
colour of the texture wri tten, gi v ing a
b l e n d e d e f fect. The w i p e moves a c ross t h e
s c r e e n f r o m l e f t to r i g h t a n d t a kes a b o u t
f o u r seco n d s to complete, d e p e n d i n g o n
which Colo u r type a n d Tex t u r e f u n c tions
are used.
PAINT M E N U - 29
C O LO U R W I PES
COLO U R WIPE H ow it is done:

3 ) Wipe+: Wipes the screen from left to a) Select Wi pe+in COLOUR WIPES
right. The COlour i s controlled by the H.S.V. menu.
and COLOUR DEPTH sliders. A l tering the b) If only a portion of the screen is to be
H.S.V. sliders during the wipe will result in cleared, first generate the stencil
a colour blend, with vertica l l y orie nta ted using DRAW STENCIL a nd/or
bands of colour. The Co lour ty p e selection STENCIL WIPES. Ensure that the
is used, so the colour wipe is not necessa rily USE STENCIL bu tton is on, and that
opaque, but may subtly or drastica l l y a l ter Draw Under is selected in Paint Men u
the existing image on the screen. 4.
Wipe can be applied to only a portion of c) R e t u r n to image.
the screen if desi red, by using the stencil to d) Press WIPE COLOUR button.
protect the areas you wish unchanged. e) The screen w i l l be wiped with the
specified Colour and Colour ty p e.
f) You may change the colour as i t is
being wi ped.
4) Wipe ",, : This function i s identical to Same as Wipe+ above.

Wipe +except the direct ion of the colour
wipe is from top to bottom of screen,
resulting in horizontal bands of changing
colours if the H.S.V. and COLOUR DEPTH
sliders are a ltered during the wipe process.
This wipe is useful for backgrounds - the
horizontal banding evident with moving the
H.S.V. and COLOUR DEPTH sliders, crea tes
a basis for la ndscapes and abstract visuals.
5) Change: Reads the screen colour and a) Select Change in COLOUR WIPES
wri tes i t back to the screen during the wipe, menu.
replacing it with new information b) Select the desired Symmetry and
depending on which Col o u r type, Colour Colour ty p e from the menus.
dep th, Texture, Symmetry or Stencil i s used. c) Return to image.
You may have an image that you like, but d) Press WIPE COLOUR button.
wish to change i t into a new image based on e) The wipe will commence. The wipe
the old one. You may adapt it, using this may be stopped a t a n y time by the
colour wipe. Time taken to compl ete a STOP bu tton.
C h an g e wipe depends upon the symme try
chosen, and va ries from 6 to 60 seconds.
N OT E : The H.S.V. sliders are not

used for this wipe. COLOUR DEPTH
may be adjusted, however, to control
t h e colour mixing on the screen.
30 - PAINT MENU
COLOU R W I PES
r CO L O U R W I P E H ow it is done:
6 ) C o l o u r T u n n e l : Provides a a ) S e l e c t C o l o u r T u n n e l i n t h e COLOUR
c o n t i n u a l l y c h a n g i n g backgro u n d t h a t WIPES m e n u .
' r a d i a tes' o u t from screen c e n t re. b) R e t u r n to i m age.
c) P r ess WI P E COLOUR b u t t o n .
d ) A p a t t e r n w i l l be w r i tten i n to t h e
field store. This will take
a p p ro x i m a t e l y 3 secon d s to com p l e t e.
A f t e r t h i s, the c u r r e n t c o l o u r s , as
d e t e r m i n e d by t h e COL O U R
C O N T R O L m e n u , w i l l begin
' r a d i a t i n g ' o u t from t h e c e n tre o f the
screen.
e) Press STOP to t e r m i n a t e t h e process.
f) The PAN, ZOOM and STRETCH
s l i d e r s w i l l adjust the C o l o u r T u n n e l
on the screen.
7) Disintegrate : This selection w r i tes a ) S e l e c t D i s i n t e g r a t e i n COLO U R

random d o t s to the field store c o n t i n u a l l y , WIPES m e n u.
u n t i l t h e STOP b u t ton is pressed. T h e d o t s b) R e t u r n to i m a ge.
a re w r i t t e n i n t h e c u r r e n t c o l o u r , w h i c h c) Press WIPE COLOUR b u t t o n .
may be c h a nged d u r i n g t h e w i pe by d ) R a n d o m d o ts w i l l a ppea r o n t h e i m a ge
c h a n g i n g the H.S.V. and COLOUR D E PTH i n the Colour, Colour type, a n d Colour
s l i d ers. The COLOUR T Y P E m e n u depth selected.
determi n es t h e way the r a n d o m d o t s e) P r ess STOP to t e r m i n a t e the process.
i n t e r a c t w i t h t h e colo u rs a l r e a d y present o n
t h e screen. S u b t l e mottli ngs c a n be
a c h i e v ed b y u s i n g T r a n s l u c e n t o r T i n t
colou r t y pes w i t h a low s e t t i n g o n t h e
COLOUR DEPTH s l i d e r . P o r t i o n s of t h e
s c r e e n c a n b e protected from 'd i s i n t e g r a t i o n '
by u s i n g t h e s t e n c i l i n t h e norma l f a s h i o n .
PAINT MENU - 31
STEN C I L W I PES
S t e n c i l w ipes a l ter what is on t h e s t e nc i l plane. The stencil

plane is an internal digital control image (equivalent to a 'key' or
'matte' in some applications) with multiple uses. The S t e n c i l w i p es
are simi lar to the Col our wipes, in t h a t they a ffect the entire
screen, with the difference tha t the stencil wipes are applied to
the i n ternal sten c i l plane instead of the field store.
Wha tever is selected on the above menu is implemented w h e n
the WIPE STENCIL button is pushed. T h e l i g h t i n the WIPE
STENCIL button will go On when the button is pressed, and w i l l
go Off when the stencil wipe is complete. F o r the wipe to have
a n observable effect, the STENCIL SOURCE menu must be set to
either I n t ernal or Under-over, and the USE STENCIL button must
be on. The wipe may be stopped a t any stage by pushing the
STOP button.
The Stencil Draw/Erase selection in Pain t Men u 4 is very
importa n t to the stencil wipes. If this is set to Draw, a stencil
wipe will usually clear the stencil insta ntly to Off, then turn the
stencil On as required. I f i t is set t o E rase, a stencil wipe will
usually clear the stencil to On then erase the stencil as required.
If the INVERT STENCIL button is on, the stencil polarity will
flip. The details are given for each wipe below.
The functions of the various stencil wipes selections are easily
examined b y enabling the S t e n c i l Show selection in Paint Men u 4.
32 - PAINT MENU
ST E NC I L W I PES
� STEN C I L WIPE How it is done:

0) Clear: Insta n tl y c l e a r s t h e stencil p l a n e a) S e l e c t C l e a r i n STE N C I L WIPES menu.
t o t h e po l a r i t y specified by t h e S t e n c i l b) Return t o i ma g e .
D r a w / E r a s e menu selec t i o n . c) P ress WI P E STENCIL b u t t o n .
d) The entire stencil plane will be
i n s t a n t l y c l e a red t o e i t h e r O f f o r O n ,
c o r r e sp o n d i n g to S t e n c i l D r a w o r
S t e n c i l E r a s e i n Pa i n t Me n u 4.
1) Texture: C l e a r s t h e e n t i r e sten c i l a ) S e l e c t T e x t u r e i n STENCIL WIPES

p l a n e a n d t h e n pl aces w h a tever t e x t u r e i s menu.
s e l e c t e d o n the TEXTURE menu over t h e b ) S e l e c t t h e d e s i red T e x t u r e i n the
e n t i r e s t e n c i l plane f r o m the l e f t t o t h e T E XTURES m e n u .
r i g h t. T a k es a p pro x i m a t e l y 5 seconds to c) R e t u r n to i mage.
c o m p l e t e. d ) P r e s s WIPE STENCIL b u t t o n .
e) T h e T e x t u r e w i l l be w i p e d o v e r t h e
s t e n c i l f r o m left to r i g h t , t a k i n g a bo u t
5 seconds. The p o l a r i t y of t h e
t e x t u red stenci l d e p e n d s o n t h e S t e n c i l
D r a w / E r a s e s e l e c t i o n i n P a i n t Me n u 4.
2) Wipe -.: First clears the e n t i re stencil a ) Select Wi p e + i n STENCIL WI P E S

p la n e i n s t a n t l y , a nd t h e n performs a slow (4 menu.
s e c o n d ) S t e n c i l Wipe from left t o r i g h t. The b) R e t u r n to i m a ge.
s te n c i l a d v a nces e x a c t l y one l i n e every c) Press WIPE STENCIL b u t t o n .
f i e l d , so m�y be used for s l o w -scan effects d ) T h e ste n c i l w i l l b e clea red i n t h e
or for h o r i z o n t a l wipes between two ima ges. d i s p l a y a re a , t h e n t u r n e d 0 11 o r O f f
(dep e n d i n g o n t h e S t e n c i l D r a w / E r a s e
selection), progressi ng from l e f t to
right.
3) Wipe . : This stencil w i p e is i d e n t i c a l S a m e a s Wi p e ... .

t o Wipe ..., e x c e p t t h a t t h e stenci l w i pe is
f r o m t o p to bottom o f the screen.
PAINT MENU - 33
STE NCI L WI PES
ST E N C I L W I P E H ow it is done:
4 ) I nvert : This wipe inverts t h e i n terna l a) Select I n v e r t i n STENCIL WIPES
stencil. I t takes a pproxima tel y 8 secon ds to menu.
complete, and wipes from left to r i g h t . This b) R e t u r n to image.
wipe is useful i n conjunction with U n d e r c) Press WIPE STENCIL button.
o v e r ef fects (see STENCIL S O U R C E men u ), d ) The wipe will prog ress from left to
a s i t a l lows inversion of o n l y the i n terna l r i g h t.
stencil portion of a combined In t e rn a l a n d
C h r o m a - k e y ( U n de r - o v e r ) ste nc i l . I t ca n
a lso be used in s i m il a r ways to Wi p e +
5 ) Edge Detect: This s tenci l wipe a ) Select Edge detect i n STENCIL WIPES
ena bles you to detect a n y sign ifica n t c h a n ge menu.
in colour or i n tensity in the i mage. b) Return to image.
Wherever a change in colo u r over the screen c) Press WIPE STENCIL button.
occurs, the stencil is turned on, prod u c i n g d ) Edge detection will occur over a b o u t
a n 'edge'. This c a n d e l i n e a t e objects i n a 5 seconds, f r o m left to r i g h t . T h e
frozen o r drawn ima ge, and ease the task o f s t e n c i l w i l l be t u r n e d On or Off
defi ning a r e a s f o r cop y i n g, f i l l i n g , where a n edge is detected, depen d i n g
protec tion, and so for th. The existing o n the S t e n c i l D raw/Erase selection in
stencil is first cleared insta ntly. P a i n t Men u 4. �
6) Colour Detect: This wipe e n a b l es a ) Select Colour d e t e c t i n STENCIL

you to select a narrow range of colours to WIPES menu.
be stencilled, centered a round the colour b) R e t u r n t o image.
tha t you specify with the stylus. c) Press WIPE STENCIL button.
d ) The stencil will be cleared.
e) Stylus o n GRAPHICS PAD: a c u rsor
d i s p l a y i n g sten cil=> will appear on
screen.
f) Mo ve the cursor arrow tip to the
colour that you want d etected on
screen.
g) Lift the styl us: all occurrences o f this
colour and similar colours will be
detected , and the stencil will be
t u r n e d On or Off in these a reas
( d e pe n d i n g on t h e S t e n c i l Dra w/Erase
selection i n Pa i n t Men u 4). This wipe
takes a pproximately 6 seconds to
complete.
34 - PAINT MEN U
ST E N C I L W I P E S
r STEN CI L W I P E H ow it is done:
7 ) D isintegrate: This selection clears a ) Select D i s i n tegrate in STENCIL
t he stencil i n the display a rea, then w r i tes WIPES menu.
ra n d o m dots to the stencil plane until i t is b) R e t u r n to i m a ge.
f i l l e d . The visual effect of this wipe c) P r ess WIPE STENCIL button.
d e pe n d s o n the selections made in the d ) The sten c i l is wiped in the display
DISPLA Y CONTROL menu. For exa mple, a r e a, t h e n r a ndom dots w i l l grad u a l l y
the resu l t may be a 'crumbl i n g' of a still fill t h e s t e n c i l p l ane. The p o l a r i t y o f
i mage into a live video image ( w i t h t h e d o t s i s determined by the S t e n c i l
P a i n t/Analog selected i n the DISPLAY D r a w/Erase selection i n P a i n t Me nu 4 .
CONTROL menu) or vice versa.
8) Window: This instantly clears the a ) Select Wi ndow in STEN C I L WIPES

s t e n c i l i n the d isplayed area, crea ting a menu.
r e c t a n g u l a r 'window' with a size a n d aspect b) Return to ima ge.
r a t i o defined by the STRETCH and ZOOM c) Use the PAN, ZOOM and STRETCH
c o n t rols. It is usefu l for w i p i n g a sma ll s l i d e rs to select the area or Wi n d o w i n
a re a of t h e stencil without affecting the w h ich the stencil is t o be w i p e d .
r e s t . Usi n g the INVERT STENCIL button d ) Press WIPE STENCIL b u tt o n .
can g i v e a l ternating On a n d O f f window e) The stencil i n the a rea s e l e c t e d i n step
r�
a re a s i n the stenci l. The Wi pe �, Wipe +
'
c) is cleared instantly to O n or Off,
a n d D i s i n tegrate wipes a r e each depend i n g on the S tencil Draw/E rase
a u tomati c a l l y pr eceded by a Wi ndow stencil selection i n P a i n t Menu 4.
w i pe.
PAINT MENU - 35
TITLE E D IT M E N U
This menu allows titling, with up to 7 lines of text, with both

upper and lower case. It features a "QWER TY" alpha-numeric
keyboard layout on screen.
Other features of TITLE EDIT include five chara cter sizes,
character underline, two types of d rop shadow, background a n d
background with d rop shadow.
Select cha racters from the on-screen keyboard by moving the
cursor over the desired cha racter and lifting the stylus. The
character will appear i n the la rge box a bove the 'keyboard'.
Text will appear in lower case un less SHIFT ( or SHIFT LOCK)
is selected prior to cha racter choice.
- i f LOCK i s on, all subsequent chara cters will rema in in upper

case, until LOCK is turned off again.
- if SHIFT is on, the first c h a racter chosen will be i n upper
case, and subsequent cha racters will be in lower case.
1 36 - PAINT MENU I
Some other func tions are:
SPACE BAR inserts a space in the text.
R U B O U T deletes the last cha racter

(including carriage returns).
RET returns to the start of the next line.
CLEAR erases the whole title so you may

start a n e w title. C L E A R must be selected
twice: first time illumina tes t h e CLEAR box,
second time actually clears the title. This is
to prevent accidental erasu re.
The bottom row of boxes affect cha racters in the following way:
Size of character Format of character
.-
til
.... .... C!) N
en en
C!) c
.-
C!)
S ... �. �
.... o
-
.... 0
- co
o '0 "0
til co
.
... C!)
S I=Q Z "0 til til
V) c· .c: ..c::
en en
�
0. 0.
o 0
.... ....
o Cl
C h a r a c ters may be mixed in a n y combination o f size a n d format.
Points to note w i th C h a r a c t e r s i ze a r e:
i) a big size cha racter w i l l not a pp e a r i n the t i t l i n g if there
is n o t enough space left for i t , even though a s m a l l e r
c h a r a c t e r w i l l fit.
i i ) a big size character ca n be p a r t i a l l y overwritten by t h e
n e x t line o f text. This ma y b e desirable. H o w e v e r , to
preven t this, insert enough R ETs (carriage retu rns) so t h a t
the next line of text is l o w e r t h a n the previous line.
Points to note w i th Fo r m a t selection are:

i ) U n d e r l i n e will con t i n u e u n ti l de-selected (select normal)
ii) D r o p shadow puts a black s h a d o w behind the character
iii) B a c k g r o u n d puts a block b e h i n d the character in the
complement of the colour of t h e title (for exa mple, a green
chara cter will h a v e a pu rple background)
i v ) B a ck g r o u n d w i t h d r o p s h a d o w combi nes fea t u res of ii)
a n d iii) above.
v) All t i tles ca n a ppea r with p a i n t c r a w l by select i n g C r a w l ,
Trail Crawl or Crawl!An alog in DISPLAY CONTROL
m e n u , before impleme n t i n g t i tle.
PAINT MENU - 37
TITLE EDIT
H ow it i s d o n e:
a) Create the text u s i n g the T I T L E E D I T

menu.
b) Return to screen image by p r essi n g
STOP button.
c) Press the TITLE button.
d) Press stylus on t h e G R A P H I C S P A D -
the word t i t l e will appea r a s t h e

cursor on t h e screen. T h e top le ft
hand corner of this word is w h e re the
titling will start. Mo ve the t i t l e
cursor to desired position. H.S.V.
sliders may be adjusted a t this sta ge.
The cursor will show selected colour.
e) Lift stylus from the G R A P H I CS P A D .
Your titling will a p pear on the ima ge.
1 ) The title function automatically turns on the D R A W

COLOUR function. The DRAW STENCIL button controls
whether the title is written to the stencil pla ne. A title can
be written to both planes simultaneously or to the field store
only.
2) As the title is written to the digital field store, if the field
store is not being d isplayed the title will not be seen. This
can happen for various display selections (see DISPLAY
CONTROL menu). Titles can be displayed over live video
(analog or digital) b y writing the title to the stencil plane as
well as the field store and making an appropriate selection
in the DISPLAY CONTROL menu. See the PRESETS
section for more information.
Here's how the various sizes and formats look ...
I 38 - PAINT MENU I
T I T L E E D IT M E N U
T h i s example
use s everythi ng.
The sequence for
crea t i n g it was ...
S e l e c t SIZE 1
"}"
S e lect S I Z E 2
"2"
S e lect SIZE 3
113"
S e l ect SIZE 4
"4"
S e l ect S I Z E 5
"5"
R ET
S P A C E B A R 5 t i m es
C h a n g e to S I ZE I
S P A C E B A R once
S e lect DROP-SHADOW 1
" d rop"
R ET
S P A C E B A R 24 t imes
"shadow"
SPACE BAR
"1"
RET
S e lect UNDERLINE
" u n derline"
S e l e c t D R O P-SHA DOW 2
S P A C E B A R 9 ti m es
" d r o p"
R ET
S P A C E B A R 25 times
" s h a d o w" .
SPACE BAR
"2"
RET
Select BACKGROUND
" b a c k g r o u n d"
RET
S e l e c t BACKGROUND w i t h DROP-SH A DOW
" b a c k g r o u nd"
SPACE B A R
"with"
SPACE BAR
"d ropshadow"
I . PAINT MENU - 39 I
V I D EO M E N US
The VIDEO MEN U S control a s pects o f l i v e video. I t is thus

essential to have at least one video i n p u t connected. For best
results use RGB (Red-Gree n-Blue) i n p u ts and o u t p u ts. We also
recommend the use of a chroma key b l u e backdrop i n the studio,
as many CVI effects req u ire it. (See Section I - CONNECTING
THE CVI. )
The VIDEO MENUS menu is a list of t h e available menus i n
t h e l i v e video control category. There a r e some a reas where a
VIDEO menu has a direct equiva l e n t i n the PAINT menus, for
example COLOURIZE TYPE ( V IDEO) and COLOUR TYPE
(PAINT ) .
These menus c a n be selec ted b y t h e means o u t l i ned in Section 1
under 'MENUS - What a re they?'.
I 40 - VIDEO MENU I
VI DEO M E N US
0) D isplay Control: Defines w h a t is displayed i n regions

where t h e stencil is either O n o r O f f.
1) Stencil Source: Defines w h a t source the Stencil is coming

from - that is, selects w h a t is defining the stencil. This menu also
includes VIDEO SOURCE which selects the combination of
VIDEO 1 input and VIDEO 2 i n p u t that is used.
2) Screen Control: Defines movements and basic changes on

the screen, including Mirrors, Wi pes, Stencil inversion ( S h a t ter),
a n d Pan:Pen, Slide and G l i d e .
3) F reeze Control: Controls the picture freeze facility.
4) C o l ou r i z e Control: Determines w h a t is controll i n g the

colo u r for colourizing. Very similar i n concept to the COLOUR
CONTROL menu, except that i nstead of controlling the colour for
pain ting, this menu controls the colour for real-time colourizing.
5) Colourize Type : Defines how the colours o f the digitized

or drawn areas will appear on th e screen.
6) Presets Control : Allows t h e setting, resetting, control and

display o f PRESETS.
7) Seq uencer: Controls t h e recording, editing and replay of

control actions (including PR ESET c h a n ges, menu selections,
d r a wing functions, and controls cha nges) so that a series o f events
may be controlled, refined, and reprod uced a t will.
8) Save and Reca ll: Controls t h e d i g i tal storage a n d retrieval

of picture and CVI setup information onto video tape or video
cassette.
9) Setup: A l lows the setup of chroma key parameters as well as

external monitors. It conta i n s test p a tterns and colour bars, as
well as RS232C port setup. Covers test a n d setup func tions.
I VIDEO MENU - 41
D I S P LAY C O N TRO L MEN U
Th e video image you see o n the mon i tor screen m a y be d i v i d ed

i n t o a reas t h a t are either stencilled o r not stencilled. Wh e n a p a r t
o f the image is stenc i l led, i t may be trea ted d i f f e r e n t l y to a non
stencilled a rea. This a l lows some rather unique fea tures. For
i n s tance, you may protect a stencilled a rea from being p a i n ted
over, l i v e video may be di rected just to the s t e n c i l led area, or t h e
chroma key faci l i t y may be used as a l i ve, m o v i n g stencil. T h e
I N V E R T STENCIL button reverses the se nse of which a reas a r e
sten c i l l e d a n d which are not. For m o r e i n f orma tion on stencils,
see Section I under 'STENCILS - What a r e they?'.
The DISPLAY CONTROL Me n u looks q u i te d i f ferent from the
other menus. This is because it is a very importa n t menu,
determin i n g what types of video ima ges a p p e a r on t h e screen. I t
l e t s y o u c o n t r o l w h i c h aspects of v i d c o a re d is p l a yed where t h e
s t e n c i l is O n or O f f . I t a lso determi nes whether the Field Store i s
u p d a ted by i n c o m i n g video i n the ste n c i l O n or O f f r e g i o n s . O f
course, yo u m u s t h a v e a s t e n c i l first be fore t h i s m e n u w i l l work,
so see Section 3 - Paint Men u 8 under STENCIL WIPES a n d Video
Me n u 1 under STENCIL SOURCE.
DISPLAY CONTROL has twenty boxes, each with a d escri p t i v e
name. E a c h o f these b o x e s s e l e c t s one type o f video i m a ge t o b e
d i s p l a y e d where t h e s t e n c i l is O n a n d a nother to be displa yed
where the stencil is O f f . Each box a l so selects whether, and from
what source the field store is upda ted w h e r e the stencil is O n a n d
where the stencil is O f f . ( S e e Section 3 - V i d e o Me nu 1 u n d e r
VIDEO SOURCE, and a lso V i d e o Me n u 3 , F R E E Z E CONTRO L).
In add ition, some of the boxes i n the DISPLAY CONTROL Me n u
enable some special display f u n c tions, s u c h as Col o u r Cra w l a n d
Digital Cascade. Th ese a re desc ribed below. The curren t
DISPLAY CONTROL selection i s i l l u m i n a ted. O n l y one box m a y
b e selected a t a time.
I 42 - VIDEO MENU I
D I S PLAY CO NTRO L M E N U
Whether the stencil is O n or Off can be determined by enabling

the Stencil Hide/Show selection i n Paint Menu 4. When you
return to the image, a reas where the stencil is On will be
displayed brigh ter. Areas where the stencil is Off will appear
normal. References to the stencil on a reas i n this description
always refer to the brightened area s.
N OTE: that the stencil On and stencil Off regions can be

reversed simply by pushing the INVERT STENCIL bu tton.
This actually changes the status o f the stencil and hence
swa ps the video displays between the stencil on and stencil
off areas.
NORMAL STENCIL IN VERTED STENCIL
Stencil ON region brighter. Stencil regions swapped.

Old stencil OFF regions are now ON.
There are three basic image planes w h ich can be displayed in

the stencil O n and Off regions. These a re live analog, live digital
and field store. The live analog video is the video i n p u t to the
Ana log Path of the CVI. This is not modified by the CVI a t all.
The live d igital video i s the digitised video input to the D igital
Path. This may be colourized by the CVI. The field store is the
store in which all painti ng, freezing, zooming, etc. take place.
The field store can be used i n a n u m ber of ways to give different
appearances. For example, live digital video can continually
update the field store to give effects such as pixelation o r live
mirrors; o r the field store may .b e filled, wiped or p a i n ted with
colour to create a background. See Section 1 Conceptual Model
-
for a full description of these three pla nes.
The name in each box gives an ind ication of what sort of

display resul ts o n the screen. For example, if you select the box
called Paint, the displ a y w i l l show the field store for both stencil
O f f and stencil On. Updating o f the fie ld store b y the i ncoming
video is disabled. Hence Paint gives a n ideal setup of t h e C V I for
painting or mod i fying i m a ges in the field store, w i thout h a v i n g to
worry a bout your pa in ting bei n g d e s t royed by incoming updatin g
vi deo.
I VIDEO MENU - 43 I
As another example, if Paint/Analog is selected, then live analog

video is displayed where the stencil is Off and the contents of the
field store is displayed where the stencil is On. So if you select
Paint/Analog and draw on the GRAPHICS PAD (with both DRAW
COLOUR and DRAW STENCIL buttons on), the stencil that you
draw will cause the corresponding parts of the field store to be
displayed. This gives the effect of painting over live analog
video, as in PRESET 00.
DISPLA Y CONTROL functions only ta ke notice of what is on

the stencil plane if the USE STENCIL button is On. If USE
STENCIL is Off, then a selection will appear across the entire
screen. If the INVERT STENCIL button is Off this will be the
selection normally displayed i n the stencil off regions. If
INVER T STENCIL is On then i t will be the selection normally
displayed for stencil on regions.
The display formats and freezing functions associa ted with

each of the boxes in the DISPLAY CONTROL Menu are described
in detail below. For each selection, a description and some
possible uses are given on the left. These suggestions are by no
means the only ways in which you may use the DISPLAY
CONTROL selections. The factory PRESETS of the CVI give
some further examples. The table on the right gives the precise
details of what is displayed and what updates the field store for
the stencil On and Off areas, for each selection (see the Key
below).
Experimentation with this menu in conjunction wit h the

STENCIL SOURCE, VIDEO SOURCE, SCREEN CONTROL and
FREEZE CONTROL Menus will yield a huge range of
possi bili ties.
I 44 - VIDEO MENU I
D I S PLAY CO N T RO L M E N U
K EY TO D I S P LAY / U P DAT E TA B L E
Listed under the Display headings a r e the types of image which
actually a ppear o n the screen i n the S tencil on and Stencil off
areas for each Display Control selection.
The Display options are:
Store - The Field Store is d i splayed. I t will respond to PAN,

ZOOM and STRETCH. The actual image will depend
very much on what sou rce, if a ny, upda tes the Field
Store. See under the heading Update for each selection.
If Update is Off or if FREEZE is on then a still image is
d ispla yed. Otherwise the Field Store will be
continuously updated from the specified sou rce.
Analog - Un mod i fied v ideo from the Analog Path is d isplayed.
Digital - Digitised video from the Digital Path is displayed.
It may be colourized , but it will n o t respond to PAN,
ZOOM or STRETCH controls. I f FREEZE is on then the
frozen Field Store image will be displayed.
Mix - A 50% mix between the Field Store and the live video
from the Analog Path i s displayed.
Cascade - The cascaded output from a nother CVI is displa yed.
I f FREEZE i s on then the frozen Field Store i ma ge will
be displayed.
Listed under the Update headings are the sources from wh ich
the Field Store is u pdated i n the Stencil on a n d Stencil off a reas
for each Display Control selection. Also, note that in some
selections the Field Store is updated even where i t is not
displayed.
The Update options are:
Off The Field Store will not u pdate, regardless o f the

sta tus of the FREEZE bu tton.
Image - The video input to the D i gital Path updates the Field
Store when FREEZE is all.
Colo u r - Flat colour, varied via the COLOUR CONTROL Men u
o r by Colour Crawl, updates t h e F i e l d Store when
FREEZE is all.
Cascade - The cascaded digital picture from a second CVI
updates the Field Store when FREEZE is all.
Refer to Video Menu 3 - FREEZE CONTROL.
I VIDEO MENU - 4S
D I S PLAY C O N TRO L M ENU
Display Selection Stencil ON Stencil OFF
Function Function
Display Update Disp l a y Update
Paint: Useful for painting a n d S t or e Off Store Off

mod ifying still or frozen images in the
field store. FREEZE. USE STENCIL and
INVERT STENCIL will not a l ter the
display. USE STENCIL and INVERT
STENCIL will affect the stenci l
protection function for painting.
Paint/Analog: Wi th Internal stencil Store Off Analog orr

selected in the STENCIL SOURCE menu.
this selection ca n be used for p a i n t i n g
over a nalog video. Wi th a C h r o m a k e y
stencil. the keyed image will b e
superimposed over the f i e l d s t o r e i ma ge.
With Under-over stencil. a keyed a n a log
image is inserted into the field store
image using a drawn internal stencil. .
Paint/Digital: Digital image is Store Off Digita l Image

frozen i n to the field store in the stencil
Off a reas. Can be used effecti vely with
the Shatter selection i n the SCREEN
CONTROL menu to rapidly invert the
stencil. Can be used to create t r a i l
effects w h e r e b o t h the t r a i l i n g object
and the trail are colourized.
Trail: Useful with Chrom a k e y stencil. Analog Image Store Orf

If Digi tal Path and Analog P a t h come
from the same video source. then the
chromakeyed object is frozen i n to the
field s tore. If the object moves. a
sequence of frozen keyed images w i l l
c au s e a trail.
Dig./ Analog: The A n a l og and D i g i t a l Digital I m a ge Analog orr

video paths a r e d i splayed i n t h e stenci l
Off a n d On regions of t h e screen. F i e l d
store is upda ted only in t h e d i g i t a l a reas.
Can be used for partia l colo u r i zi n g of an
image.
I 46 - VIDEO MENU I
r Dis play Selection Stencil O N Stencil O F F

F unction Function
Displa y Update Displa y U p date
Colour: Stencil O f f areas of the field Store Colo u r . Store Off

s tore are filled with a colour. When used
w i t h C h r o m a key this gives a n unusual
trail e ffect. See PRESET 67. With
I n t e r n a l stencil it is possible to pa i n t
o ver a changing coloured back grou nd.
Store: Digital video u pda tes t h e field S tore Off Store Image
s tore. O n Co n t i n uous FREEZE
CO N T R OL, the field store may be
zoomed to pixelate live images. Draw
w i t h stencil to pai n t over pixelation.
Us i n g C h r o m a key gives pixela ted trai ls.
Colo /Analog: An analog image ca n be Store Colour Analog Colour

c h roma keyed over a field store filled
with colour.
Store/Ana log: This allows pixelaton Store Image Analog Image

and straight Analog video on the same
screen. Used with Strobe and
C h r o m a k e y, you can produce the 'ca tch
up' e f fects of PRESET 7 1 . I n terest ing
possibilities with two vid eo sources.
Colour trail: The same principle as Analog Colour Store Off

T r a i l above is used, except tha t a splash
o f the current colour is frozen into the
field store behind the keyed a nalog
image. Try various COLOUR CONTROL
selections.
Acq uire : This may be used with Store Image Analog Off
various FREEZE CONTROL selections
and Chroma key to generate a variety of
effects.
G host: A double-exposure effect. Use Store Off Mi x I mage

C h r o m a key, S trobe and colourize for a
variety o f ghostly trails. Turn off USE
STENCIL for s t raight field store a n d
a n alog video d o u b l e exposure.
I VIDEO MENU - 47
D I S P LAY C O N TRO L M E N U
Dis play Selection Stencil O N Stencil O F F

Function Function
Display Update Display Update
Protect: Here a digital image ca n be Store Off Digital Orf

displayed with a field store image
without the field store bei n g upda ted.
The field store is protected. Similar in
many ways to Paint/Analog a bove, w i t h
Digital live i m a g e instead of A n a l og.
M ix: A combination of live a n a log Analog Image Mix Image

vid eo with a n Analog/field store double
exposure. Ma n y i n teresting possi bili ties
for soft pixelation effects.
Live combo: Similar to Paint/Digi tal Digital Off Analog Off

a bove, except that the field store cannot
be affected. Useful for non-destructive
partial colourizations a n d two-ca mera
effects.
Crawl: The display and stencil set u p Store Off Store Image
a r e exactly the same a s for S tore a b o ve.
The di fference is that pa i ntings made
with the Crawl selection will not h a v e
constan t colour but ra ther w i l l ha ve
colours running cont inually a long the
li nes. This is called Colour Cra wl.
Colour Crawl can be used on a l l P a i n t
Methods and w i t h ti tles. T h e range O f
colours w h i ch m o v e a l o n g the lines c a n
be v a r i e d by m o v i n g the HUE,
SATURATION and VALUE sl iders, or
by using a n y of the selections i n the
COLOUR CONTROL menu. A single
painting may conta in both normal a n d
Colour Crawl sections, simply by
swapping between Crawl and Paint in
this menu w h i l e painti ng. When Crawl is
selected o n l y th ose parts o f the image
d r a w n with Colollr Cra wl will cra w l .
48 - VIDEO MENU
D I S P LAY CONTROL M E N U
tr' D i s play Selection Stencil O N Stencil O F F

Function Function
Display Update Display Update
C rawl/ Analog: Exactly the same a s Store Off Analog Off

Pain t/Analog above, except t h a t all
p a i n t ings made under this selection will
have ColOllr Crawl active. See under
C r a w l for a description o f Colour Crawl.
Trail crawl : Exactly the same a s Analog Colour Store Off

Colour trail above except t h a t t h e t r a i l of
colour behind the a n alog chroma keyed
i mage will not simply be stationary, b u t
rather w i l l p u l s a t e w i t h Colollr Crawl.
See u n d e r Crawl above for details of
c o n t r o l l i n g Colour Crawl.
Cascade: This selection requires the Store Off Store Cascade
({
..... CASCADE OUT o f a second CVI to be
connected to the CASCADE IN port o n
t h e back of this CVI. Where the stencil
i s Off, the digital Cascade o u t p u t of the
second C V I will update the field store
a n d be displa yed. Usi ng Internal stencil,
y o u m a y paint over the casca ded image
from t h e second CVI. With Chromakey
and U n der-over stencils a variety of
complex mul ti-plane and trail effects can
be created. Cascade stencil uses the
stencil from t h e second CVI. Note that
only t h e digital i nforma tion is
tra nsmitted v i a t h e Cascade connection.
Any analog componen t o f t h e image in
t h e second CVI will n o t be transmit ted.
Cas . / Analog: The digital Cascade Cascade Off Analog Off

o u t p u t of a second CVI can be combined
with t h e A nalog P a t h of this CVI. A
variety of combinations is possible in
conjunction w i t h the STENCIL SOURCE
m e n u . See Cascade a bove for more
i n formation on the Cascade function.
I VIDEO MENU 49 . 1
-
ST E N C I L SOU RC E M E N U
'""- -
This menu contains two sets of selections.
The top half - STENCIL SOURCE - a l lows you to select w h e r e

the s t e n c i l comes from.
The bottom h a l f - VIDEO SOURCE - selects w h i c h of the two
inputs (VIDEO I or VIDEO 2) is to be used for digital and analog
functions. As well, a BLANKING option for PAL-type CVI's
a l lows suppression of extra lines a t the top and bottom of screen.
0) I nternal: The norma l , i n t e r n a l l y genera ted stencil - it is t h e

Stencil plane t h a t can b e d r a w n on a n d wiped. I t bears a f i x e d
spaci a l r e l a t i o n s h i p to the s t o r e d d i g i t a l image in t h e field store.
In other words, there is a p i x el to pixel rela tionship between the
field store a n d the stencil plane, a n d i f the i mage is pan ned or
zoomed, the stencil w i l l move w i t h it.
1) Cascade: The s t e n c i l c o m i n g from a seco n d CVI i n C a s c a d e

mode. I n s tead of using t h e I n t e r n a l s t e n c i l o f the CVI, the stencil
O u t p u t from a second CVI ( p l u g g e d into t h e CASCADE I N
connector of the f i r s t ) w i l l be used. This selection also enables
the external 'key' that may be fed i n to t h e STENCIL INPUT to be
used.
2) Chroma key: This selects a stenc i l from t h e i n t e r n a l

chroma key mec h a n i s m of t h e CVI. T h i s means tha t t h e stencil is
not f i xed. I t moves w i t h t h e c h r oma k e y e d i m age. See Section 2 -
VIDEO EXERCISES a n d PRESETS for in forma tion o n t h e
a p p l i c a t i o n s of the C h ro m a k e y selection. See Section 3 - S E T U P
menu for i n formation on adjus t i n g t h e c h r o ma key c o l o u r a n d
threshold levels.
I 50 - V I D E O MENU
ST E N C I L SO U RC E M E N U
3 ) U nder-over: This selection combines the I n t e r n a l a n d the

Chroma key stencils so t h a t the stencil is determined to be O n
o n l y where both the i n ternal a n d t h e c hroma key s t e n c i l s a r e On.
This a l lows a n external video s o u rce to be effectively i nserted
right into a n y still image that may be in the field store. This
gives a t h ree level multi-plane effect within the one CVI. This is
one of the most powerful fea t u r es of the CVI.
N OT E : As this selection uses the chroma key facili ty, the

SETUP menu section should be consulted. Since two stencil
sources are combined i n U n d e r - o v e r , the INVERT STENCIL
bu tton will i n vert the combined stencil. If you find that you
have d r a w n t h e i n ternal stencil i n the wrong polarity, i t c a n
be inverted in isolation by using t h e I n v e r t s e l e c t i o n i n t h e
STENCIL WIPES menu.
V I D EO S O U R C E
This section o f the menu sel ects which o f the two video i n p uts
w i l l be used in the two main video signal paths of the CVI.
The D i g i t a l path digitizes video i n p u t. Therefore, this path
may be used to colourize, store, pixela te, etc., the live image. The
digital path also includes the C h r o m a k e y- function, so chroma
keying will be based on the input selected for the D i g i t a l p a t h .
The A n a l o g p a t h is t h e direct, u n - modified vi deo pathway from
The nu mbers 1 and 2 correspon d to VIDEO INPUTS 1 a n d 2.

input to output.
Thus either video input may be d i rected through the D i g i t a l path

or the Analog path or both. I f the selections made for the a n a log
and d i gital paths are d i fferent, then the resultant image can be a
combination of the two video i n p u ts. Some exa mples o f this
appear in the PRESETS.
B LAN K I N G
B l a n k i n g applies t o PAL-type versions of the CVI on ly.
Choosing E x t e nded w i l l b l a n k out a few lines a t the top a n d
b o t t o m of the screen, to s u i t s o m e appl ications of the P A L
configuration. Extended bla n k i n g is not a pre-requisite for using
a PAL-type CVI. E x t e n d e d or N o r m a l may be selected according
to the aesthetic o r technical requirements of the configuration.
The Blan k i n g selection is stored w i t h each P R ESET.
I V I D E O MENU - 51
SC R E E N CO NTRO L M E N U
This menu defines movements and basic changes on the screen,

including Mirrors, Wipes, Pan:Pen, S l i d e and Glide functions.
I n this menu you are able to make more than one selection at a
time, enabling a n y combinations o f the eigh t SCREEN CONTROL
functi ons. Complex interactions can result.
0) Vertical M irror: Enables a ver tica l mirror on screen a t a

position controlled by t h e HORIZONTAL PAN sl ider. It i s a
reflection around a vertical axis. Live action is mirrored around
this axis. The HORIZONTAL PAN slider must be a w a y from the
minimum position. If you wish to centralize the axis on screen,
ensure that t h e HORIZONTAL PAN slider is at midway.
The mirror function will only mirror ima ges i n the field store;
that is frozen or drawn ima ges, or continually updating field store
images. By combi ning t hese images with others which are not
mirrored, effects such a s overlapping mirrors can be achieved (see
Section 3 DISPLAY CONTROL Menu).
-
A mirror positioned less than half way across the screen -(from
the left) will result i n part of the frozen field store image being
displayed to the right.
1) H orizontal M irror: Enables a horizon tal mirror on screen

a t a posi tion controlled by the VERTICAL PAN slider. It is a
reflection around a horizontal axis. The VERTICAL P A N slider
must be away from the minimum position. I f you wish to
centralize the axis on screen, ensure that the VERTICAL PAN
slider is a t midway. This function beha v es identically to V e r t i c a l
Mirror, and both may be selected to give Q u ad mirror effects.
I S2 - VIDEO MENU
SC R E E N CO NTRO L M E N U
2) H orizontal Wipe: This enables a h orizontal wipe between

the field store image and a live d i g i ta l i mage. The wipe position
is controlled by the HORIZONTAL PAN slider. If Glide is on i n
this m e n u , the w i p e speed is controlled by the RATE 2 slider.
3 ) Vertical Wipe: This ena bles a vertical wipe between the

field store i mage and a live d i gital ima ge. The w i pe position is
controlled by the VERTICAL PAN slider. If Glide is on i n this
menu , the wipe speed is controlled by the RATE 2 slider.
4) S hatter: This functiori is d i rectly equivalent to pressing the

INVERT STENCIL button O n and Orf repea tedly, except that it
can be much faster than the manual operation of t h e button. If
the R ATE 2 slider is at ma x i mum, the stencil will be i nverted
a rid norma l i zed at every video field. See the PRESETS section for
examples of how this control can be used to create effects.
N OTE: The USE STENCIL button must be O n for Shatter

to work, a l though a stencil need not necessarily be drawn.
5) Pan : pen: This selection transfers cO.n trol of HORIZONTAL

and VERTICAL PAN from the slider controls, to ' the GRAPHICS
PAD. This ena bles you to move objects a round the screen b y
d r a w i n g on the pad. T h i s is a rela t i ve p o s i t i o n control, so the
image will not suddenly jump to the position tha t you touch the
pad, but will respond to the movements made on the pad. This
function can be used i n conjunction with Glide and Slide below,
i n the same fashion as the P A N control sliders.
N OTE: If the DRAW COLOUR or DRAW STENCIL

buttons are On then the stylus will pa i n t as well as
controlling pan. If pa inting is n o t desired, then these
buttons should be turned Off.
6) G lide: This selection limits t h e rate o r speed t h a t the PAN,

ZOOM and STRETCH sliders change the i mage position. I t gives
a smoother movement. It is controlled by the RATE 2 sl ider.
If RATE 2 slider is on maximum the moveme n t will be very fast.
If RATE 2 slider is on minimum the ima ge will not respond t o the
PAN, ZOOM o r STRETCH sliders.
If RATE 2 slider is up a l i t t l e from m i n i mum, the image w i l l
shift i n t h e d i rection specified by the PAN/ZOOM/STRETCH
sliders with a very smooth ac tion (one p i xel width per field
-
scan). The image comes to rest when i t reaches the new position
of the HORIZONTAL & V E RTICAL PAN sliders, or the ZOOM
or STRETCH sliders, w hichever has been changed.
I t i s useful to have this selection On i n most circumstances.
I VIDEO MENU - 53
S C R E E N CO N T R O L M E N U
7) Slide: This selection allows continuous, never-ending smooth

panning of the field store image. When Slide is selected the
function of the PAN sliders cha nges from controlling the position
of the ima ge to controlling the rate of movement of the image.
The HORIZONTAL PAN and V ERTICAL PAN sliders a djust the
rate of sliding of the image in the horizontal and vertic ii l
directions respectively. If the PAN sliders are centred, the i mage
will be still. If the PAN sliders are nea r either extreme, the image
will slide very rapidly across the screen. Slide overrides the Glide
function on both PAN sliders.
N OTE: With Slide selected, the function of the

HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL PAN sliders changes
slightly. Instead of relating to the actual position of the
image, they control a rate of change of position. If the two
PAN sliders are positioned at midway, the image will remain
still. There is a small 'dead spot' around the centre of the
slider travel to make it easier to stop the image motion.
If the HORIZONTAL PAN slider is above the cen tra l position,

the image will slide to the right at a speed relative to the position
of the HORIZONTAL PAN slider.
If the HORIZONTAL PAN slider is below the central position,
the i mage will slide to the left at a speed relative to the position
of the HORIZONTAL PAN slider.
In a similar way, the VERTICAL PAN slider determines the
rate of change of position in an upward and downward direction.
If the VERTICAL PAN slider is above the central position, the
image will slide upwards at a speed relative to the position of the
VERTICAL PAN slider.
If the VERTICAL PAN slider is below the central position, the
image will slide downwards a t a speed relative to the position of
the VERTICAL PAN slider.
The slide function has a special non-l inear curve, allowing both
very slow and very fast slides in any direction. The maximum
rate of slide is half the field-store every field. Various 'harmonic'
motions are also accounted for. See the PRESETS 6 1 , 62, and 63
for an application of fast slide.
I �4 - VIDEO MENU
F R E E Z E CO NTRO L M E N U
This menu determines how the FREEZE control w i l l operate. I t

w o r k s i n conjunction w i t h the DISPLAY CONTROL menu
selections a n d the stencil. I f the FREEZE button i s Off, the
D i g i ta l path signal w i l l u p d a te certa i n a reas of the field store
d e fi ned by the stenci l a n d the OISPLA Y CONTROL selection.
The selection i n the FREEZE CON TROL Me nu gives further
control over how the selected field store a reas a r e u p d a ted. When
the FREEZE button is turned On, the u p d a t i n g o f the field store
ceases, and so the field store becomes a frozen ima ge.
See Section 3 OISPLA Y CONTROL Men u for more
-
information on display formats a n d freezing.
0) Continuous : This mea ns tha t the digital path input will

con t i n uously update t hose field store regions that a r e selected in
the OISPLA Y CONTROL menu.
For moving images, the FREEZE button should be Off. I f this
button is O n , the image will be s t i l l .
1) Strobe: This selection freezes a single image at a r a te

controlled by the RATE 2 slider.
For example: With RATE 2 nea r t h e top, i t may be freezing a
single video field every fourth fiel d ; or a t the fastest rate o f the
RA TE 2 slider, i t will be u p d a t i n g the field store c o n t i n u a l l y
(equivalent t o Con t i n u o us selection).
N OT E : Strobe can also be stopped by the FREEZE b utton

i n the same ma nner as for Co n t i n uous.
I VIDEO MENU - SS
F R E E Z E CO N T R O L M E N U
2) Burst : When this is selected, i t will gra b a 'burst' of images,

that is, a sequence of images, lasting for a particular time that is
determined by the RATE 2 slider. It will freeze for a particular
time, then it will grab another sequen tial burst of ima ges, then
freeze, etc ...
This selection opera tes in the same way as Strobe, except that
instead of grabbing a single image, it swaps between an i mage
upda ting state and a still image sta teo Pressing the FREEZE
button will make the image still.
3) Single Freeze : Will acquire a field every time that the

FREEZE button is p ressed. The normal display will be a still
image, but if you press the FREEZE bu tton, the screen display
will be updated to the current digital input.
N OTE: This changes the normal function of the FREEZE

button, from a push on/push off control to a single push
control.
4) M usic: This selection ena bles the freeze fu nction to be

controlled (strobed) from an external music input. An image will
be acquired into the field store every time there is a peak i n the
level o f the bass frequencies of the music. So this will
con tinually respond to the music, freezing one image on every
musical beat.
5) External Control: This ena bles the freeze function to be

controlled by the remote switch input. This is a socket on the
back panel of the CVI that can be connected to any switch that
will short the input to ground.
For example, a normal video camera trigger switch or a manual
switching mechanism may be w i red up for external control. If a
switch is connected to this socket then the i mage updating will
occur for as long as the switch is On. When the switch is turned
Off, the image will freeze.
I 56 - VIDEO MENU I
CO LO U R I Z E CO N TRO L M E N U
This determines what is controlling the colours that are used

for colourizing. It i s a simi l a r menu to t h e COLOUR CONTROL
menu (Paint Men u 4), except that instead of control l i n g t h e colour
for t h e paint functions, it controls t h e colou rize function for
d igital images.
N OT E : This function requires the COLOURIZE b u t t o n to

be On. Colours will return to normal when the COLOURIZE
button is turned Off.
0) Hue, Sat . , Value : The first 3 slider controls - HUE,

SA TURA TION and V A LUE ( a s well as COLOUR DEPTH) a djust
the colourize type selected in the COLOURIZE TYPE menu. This
is t h e normal selection for this menu.
1 ) H ue , Sat . , Value ; F ix: This is s i m i l a r to H.S.V. (a bove)

except t h a t after you h a v e t u r n ed t h e COLO URIZE b u t t o n O n , if
you then turn it Off aga i n , t h e i mage w i l l rema i n �olo u r i zed and
n o t return to normal colours. This e n a bles you to fix a particular
colourizing o n screen, therefore freeing the H.S.V. sliders so that
they c a n be used for determi n i n g the colours for paint functions.
2) M usic: This selection a llows the colo u ri zing to be controlled

by t h e music i n p u t. The red compo n e n t of the colourizing ,c o n trol
c o l o u r res p o n d s to the bass c o n t e n t o f the s o u n d i n p u t , the green
compo n e n t responds to t h e m i d - r a n g e a n d th e blue to t h e treble.
If!!'"
\.
3 ) Random: Ena bles ra n d o m f l u c t u a t i o n s of colour to occur in
t h e colourizing. These f l u c t u a t i o n s c h a n ge a t a speed controlled
b y t he R A T E 1 slider.
I VIDEO MENU - 57
CO LO U R I Z E TYPE M E N U
This menu defi nes how the colours of the di gitized or drawn
areas will look on the screen. Wi thin the 4096 colours of the CVI,
any colour may be 'mapped' or cha nged to any other colour.
COLOURIZE TYPE menu allows control over these colour
changes for digital video.
COLOURIZING does not affect Analog video.
The COLOUR DEPTH slider is important as it governs the

degree of colourizing, as shown below. Note that the middle
(zero) position will have no effect on the ima ge. As soon as the
slider is moved off the middle point, the colourization takes
effect.
COLOUR DEPTH SLIDER
more colourizing of image
positive (+)
no colourizing of image
negative (-)
more negative colo u r i z i n g of image
1 58 - VIDEO MENU
CO LO U R I Z E TY P E M ENU
As there are over 1 ,000,000 colourizi ngs available through the

use of the COLOURIZE TYPES, i t is not possible to provide
explicit descriptions of w h a t they look l ike. Rather, a brief
descri p tion of how the colour speci fied with the H UE,
SATURATION and VALUE colour controls in teracts with the
image colours is provided. Experime n tation is the only way to get
a good idea of the colouri z i n g capabilities. When you encounter a
colourizing that you p a r ticula r l y l i ke, i t can be saved a s a
PRESET (see PRESETS CONTROL menu) for later use.
N OT E : For the COLOURIZE TYPE to have a n effect, you

must press the COLOURIZE button On.
0) Tint: The colour you specify w ith the H.S.V. sliders is a dded
to, o r subtracted from, the e x i s t i n g screen colour - depe n d i n g
w h e r e the COLOUR D E P T H s l i d e r is positioned. As the
COLOUR DEPTH is moved increasingly towa rds " + " , the screen
colours will be brigh tened by the specified colour. Mov i n g the
COLOUR DEPTH slider towa rds "-" will darken the ima ge.
1 ) Translucent : This colourize type is similar to overlaying

the i mage with a translucent f i l m o f v a r i a ble 'density' a n d colour.
The d egree of translucency i s determined b y the COLOUR
DEPTH slider. This can vary from f u l l y transparent (COLOUR
DEPTH = 0) to opaque, where only the one colo u r w i l l be v i sible
(COLOUR DEPTH = f u l l y "-" or "+" ) .
If the COLOUR DEPTH slider is " _ " , the 'overlaying f i l m' w i ll be
i n the opposite or negative o f the colour you specif y w i t h the
H.S.V. sl iders.
2) Shade: This colou rize type is related to Ti n t, i n that the

specified colour is subtracted from the image, to the degree
specified by the COLOUR DEPTH slider.
3) Range: The red, green and blue components o f the i mage

will be 'scaled' to the colour selected with the HUE,
SATURATION and V ALUE sliders. Thus the specified colour
determines the maximu m brightness o f the component colours of
the i mage. For instance, i f the H.S.V. s l i ders are set to red, only
the red component o f t h e i mage will be seen, as the blue and
green components are 'sca led' to zero. Moving the COLOUR
DEPTH slider into the negative region will result i n scaling of the
negative o f the original image.
I VIDEO MENU - S9 I
CO LO U R I Z E TY PE M E N U
4) S o la rize : This colourize type creates perhaps the most

dramatic and bea u tiful, as well as va ried, colouri zings. Amongst
the colourizings available are s u btle e f fects remin iscen t of oil on
water, bizarre posteriza tions, nega ti ves of a n y combina tion of the
three primari es (RGB) while reta i n i n g t h e othe rs posi tive, and a
wide range of effects similar to p h o togra phic solarization.
Several examples of S o l a r i ze col o u r i z i n gs are included in the
PRESETS, and you may use them a s a starting point for
experimen ta tion.
5) M on ochro m e : The i mage will be converted to a

monochroma tic picture, which is then tinted b y the specified
colour. If the COLOUR DEPTH i s negative, a tinted black-a nd
white negative will result. As an example, if the COLOUR
DEPTH is positive, and the H.S.V. sliders are set to light brown,
the res u l t is similar to sepia-toning a black and white photo.
6) Conto ur: This colourize type can generate a range of

posterizing e ffects. At various setti n gs of the H UE,
SATURATION and VALUE sliders, it will generate a range of
colour contours on the screen. Dark colour settings of the colour
controls will result i n a large n umber of colour contours, closely
spaced. Brighter colours will reduce the number of contours, but
make them more dramatic. Again, i t i s best to find out what this
colourize type does by experimentation.
7) S pectru m: This colourize type cha nges the i n tensity

information i n the original video image into the hue of the final
picture. The H.S.V. sliders change from their normal function.
The HUE slider 'rota tes' the result around the 'colour w heel' (Red,
Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Ma genta, Red). The SATURATION
slider affects the saturation of the final image (i.e. i t wh itens the
image if down from maximum). The VALUE slider affects the
range of colours on the screen, and the COLOUR DEPTH slider
allows intermediate colourizings between the full effect, and the
normal image.
I 60 - VIDEO MENU
P R E S ETS CO NTRO L M E N U
The PRESETS CONTROL m e n u a l lows t h e se t u p a n d

modi fiea tion o f t h e CVI's 1 00 Prese ts. A 'PRESET' i s a copy of
the positions of the 1 0 SLIDER CONTROLS, the 1 6 PUSH
BUTTONS, a n d most of the MENUS.
This particular menu has t h ree sections. The first group of
four i tems selects a 'sub-me n u ' for rese tting and copying
PRESETS, a n d for viewi n g the co n t e n ts of a PRESET. The
second group of i tems - MODE - selects a PRESET m o d i f y i n g
mode. The third aspect to this menu is t h e number in the top
right corner of the menu. T h i s is t h e current Pres e t n u m b e r, and
will a l ways be the same as the PRESET number displ a y o n the
CVI's CONTROL CONSOLE.
U sing the Presets

Selecting PRESETS while i n this menu is t h e sa me as a t other
ti mes: press the PRESET b u tton, followed b y a two d ig i t n u mber,
or the NEXT (DRAW LOCK) or PREVIOUS (DRAW) buttons. To
re-select the current PRESET (and hence return all the m e n u s and
controls to the v a l u es stored in the current PRESET) press t h e
PRESET b u t t o n followed by the S T O P butt on.
When the CVI first a r rives, the 1 0 0 USER (stored i n R AM)
PRESETS w i l l be set to the f a c t o r y or ROM PRESETS d escribed
in Section 2. To return to this co n d i t ion at a n y ti me, use the
Reset function described below.
The PRESETS can be al tered o r Set to save effects t h a t you
have developed. A PRESET can be set a t a n y time (whether a
menu or image is d isplayed) by t h e following two b u t t o n
combination:
. P ress P R E S E T button, then

p ress FREEZE bu tton.
I V I D E O MENU - 61
PR ES ETS CO N TRO L M E N U
This 'freezes' the current USER PR ESET to the state of the

CVI. A l l the current menu selec tions, s l ider positions and b u t t o n
.
sta tuses are saved, and ma y be reca l l e d simply by entering the

PRESET in the usual way. The USER PR ESETS arc retained
until they are modified o r Reset, even with the power off.
The PRESET Reset function allows a n y or all of the USER
PRESETS t o be reset to the original ROM version. The PRESET
Copy functions allow you to copy any ROM or USER PRESET
into a given USER PRESET. This a l lows you to re-order the
factory PRESETS, or to ma ke m u l t i p l e copies of a PRESET. This
can be useful i f you need several USER PRESETS which are the
same except for minor varia t i ons. (See also Program mode
described below.)
An importa n t fea ture o f the CVI PR ESETS system is that a
position for each of the ten CONTROL CONSOLE sliders is
stored and reca lled for each PRESET. This means that a fter
selecting a PRESET the physical positions of the sliders does not
necessar i l y reflect the control value tha t the CVI i s actually using.
The CVI will continue to use the slider control value stored i n the
PRESET until the position of the slider is changed. The CVI will
then 'jump' to the actual ph ysical slider position and follow it
fa ithfully until a new PRESET i s selected. Although this may be
confusing a t fi rst, i t can be used to grea t advan tage to obta i n
precise and repea table selection of colours, p a n s and zooms.
If a slider does not appea r to be giving the expected effect after
selecting a PRESET, a slight cha n ge in its position w i l l cause the
CVI to suddenly start 'taking n o t ice' of that s l i der's position.
Note that PRESETS which ha ve the VALUE o r RATE 2 sliders at
zero can disable the colour and movemen t c 01l t rols. To see t h e
PRESET positions for the buttons a n d sl iders, u s e the Con trols
view function below.
Each PRESET can also be programmed to au tomatically i n i t i a t e
the W I P E COLOUR, W I P E STENCIL, P I C K COLOUR or TITLE
functions when you enter the PRESET. See the Controls view
function below for more informa tion.
I 62 - VIDEO MENU I
PR E S ETS CO NTRO L M E N U
r P R ES ETS CONTRO L H ow it is done

0) Reset: This selection allows you to a ) Selecting Return w i l l resu l t in n o
rega in the factory or ROM PRESETS. which c h a n g e t o the PRESET.
are t hose shown i n Section 2. Resetting a b) Selec t i n g Reset preset w i l l reset only
PRESET w i l l override any changes that the P R ESET indicated by the Preset
have been made to that PRESET, and n u mber.
replace i t with the factory PRESET. This c) Selecting Reset all presets w i l l revert
selection has a verification s tage; selecting all 1 00 USER P RESE TS to the factory
Reset will cause the following sub-men u to P RESETS.
a p pear. This sub-menu has th ree selections:
N O T E : Selecting Rese t all p r e s e t s will cause any PRESETS

t h a t you have crea ted to be o ver-written. If you wish to
regain your PRESETS a t a la ter stage. they should be
digitall y saved onto v i d eo-tape using the SAVE AND
RECALL menu (Video Menu 8). before selecting Reset all
presets.
I VIDEO MENU - 63
P R E S ETS CO N TRO L M E N U
P R ES ETS CONTROL H ow it is done:

1) Copy USER Preset: This o n e lets a) Move cursor to number box opposite
you move PRESETS around. You m a y "Copy USER preset:". Box will be
prefer to have your PRESETS in a d iff er e nt outlined.
order.
b) Choose PRESET number via the ten
number bu ttons. PRESET n u mber may
be incremented by pressing PRESET,
then DRAW LOCK button, (doubles as
NEXT). PRESET number may be
decre mented by pressing PRESET, then
DRAW bu tton, (doubles as
PREVIOUS).
c) Move cursor to number box opposite

" t o prese t:". Box will be outlined.
d) Choose PRESET n umber as in step b).

This PRESET will be overwritten with
the contents of preset selected in step
b).
e) Move cursor a n ywhere within

Copy USER p reset:
to preset:
f) Lift stylus from pad. PRESET will be

copied and previous menu will be
displa yed.
just return to
PRESETS CONTROL menu
t h a t i s , do n o t h i n g
PRESET i n formation
is copied
---- from here
---- to here
_--_ move cursor to

this a rea to d o c o p y
I 64 - VIDEO MENU I
P R E S ETS CO N T RO L M E N U
r P R ES ETS C O N T R O L H ow it is done
2) Copy R O M Preset: This one is T h e p rocedure for copying i s exactly the
very similar to Copy USER preset except same a s for Copy USER p reset. See
t h a t factory P RESETS from the ROM (Read previous page.
Only Memory - permanent) are used rather
than p resets i n R AM (Random Access
Me m o r y - b a t tery backup) for copying.
There a r e 1 00 PRESET spaces available for
your use, to cha nge as desired. There are
a lso 1 00 factory PRESETS perma n e n t l y in
the program. These factory PRESETS are
copied i n t o t h e USER PRESET a rea before
being s h ipped.
I VIDEO MENU - 6S
P R ES ETS CO N T R O L M E N U
3) Controls view: This selection a l l o ws you to see t h e values

of t h e 10 SLIDER controls a n d t h e con d i t i o n s of the 16 PUSH
BUTTONS t h a t are stored in the c u r r e n t P R ESET. I t a l so allows
these val ues to be cha nged. This is u se f u l f o r exa m i n i n g PRESET
settings, and for changin g their v a l u es.
Selecting C o n t r o l s view will c a u se t h e f o l l o w i n g s u b-me n u to

appear:
This sub-menu contains a d iagram tha t represents the 1 6

BUTTONS, 1 0 SLIDERS and the PRESET NUMBER of the
CONTROL CONSOLE. If you select a PRESET the display will
show the positions of the slider controls for that PR ESET. As
explained under 'Using the Presets' above, they will not always
correspond to the physical positions of t h e CONTROL CONSOLE
sliders. Slider values may be c h a n ged by mov ing the cursor to the
desired position and lifting the styl us.
Likewise, the status of each button fu nction is ind icated. This
may be chan ged by moving the c u rsor over the on-screen b utton,
and lifting the styl us. So, for e x a mple, if you wish to define a
PRESET which performs a COLOUR or STENCIL WIPE as soon
as you enter it, turn the WIPE COLOUR or WI PE STENCIL
button on in this menu, then save the PRESET. The selected wipe
will take place every time this PRESET is selected. Ma ny of the
Factory PRESETS have this fea tu re.
To save these changes into the c u r ren t PRESET, use the
PRESET/FREEZE button combina tion. See 'Using the Presets'
above.
1 66 - VIDEO MENU I
PR E S ETS CO NTRO L M E N U
MODE
T h e l o w e r s e c t i o n o f t h e P R E S ET S C O N T R O L m e n u c o n t a i n s
t h i s P R E S E T MO DE s e l e c t i o n .
0) P rotect M o d e : This is the n o r m a l selection for preset

mode. I f s e l e c t e d , t h e P R E S E T S w i l l n o t b e a l t e r ed e x c e p t i n t h e
following cases:
i ) by specific Reset or Cop y s e l e c t i o n s i n the PR ESETS
CONTROL menu
ii) by pressing the PRESET b u t t on t h e n the F R E E Z E button
( ' f r e e z e ' o r s e t t h e P R E S ET)
i i i ) b y c o p y i n g one P R E S E T t o a n o t h e r
i v ) b y r e c a l l i n g P R ES E T S i n t h e S A V E A N D R E C A L L m e n u .
v ) by loading P RESETS v i a t h e R S 2 3 2 C l i n k .
1) U pdate Mode: T h i s s e l e c t i o n w i l l c a u s e a n y c h a n g es m a d e
t o t h e C O N T R O LS o r ME N U S w h i l e i n a P R E S E T to be r e c o r d e d
i n t h a t P R E S ET. T h u s , i f t h is s e l e c t i o n is m a d e , t h e P R E S ET S
w i l l b e u p d a t e d a s t h e y a rc u s e d . T h i s i s usefu l for mod i f y i n g
e x i s t i n g P R E S E T S w i t h o u t h a v i n g t o e x p l i c i t l y s e t o r R e s e t t h em.
T h e P R E S E T i s a c t u a l l y u p d a t e d a t t h e t i m e w h e n you c h a n ge to
a n o t h e r P R E S ET. Use t h i s s e l e c t i o n w i t h c a r e , a n d b e s u re to
r e t u r n t o P r o t e c t mode w h e n u p d a t i n g i s c o m p l e t e, o r P R E S ET S
may be a l tered unintenti o n a l l y .
2) Progra m Mode: T h i s s e l e c t i o n c a n be u s e d t o g e n e r a t e a
s e r i es of a ss o c i a ted P R E S ET S . If t h i s s e l e c t i o n is m a d e , s e l e c t i n g
a n e w P R E S E T w i l l n o t r es u l t i n t h e s t o r e d i n f o r m a t i o n i n t h e
n e w P R ES E T b e i n g u s e d . N o c h a n g e w i l l b e a p p a r e n t w h e n th e
PRESET i s cha nged , b u t t h e c u r r e n t state of t h e co n t ro ls w i ll b e
stored i n t o t h e PRESET t h a t y o u h a v e j u s t left. Th i s a l l o w s t h e
ra pid prog r a m m i n g of a c h a i n of P R ESETS w h i c h h a v e
d i f f e r e n ces t h a t f o l l o w on f r o m t h e p r e v i o u s P R E S E T S . This
s e l e c t i o n s h o u l d be u s e d w i t h ca re, a n d P R ES ETS MO D E s h o u l d
b e r e t u r n e d to P r o t e c t m o d e to p r e v e n t t h e u n i n te n t i o n a l
overwriting of other p resets.
I VIDEO MEN U - 67
S EQ U E N C E R M E N U
The CVI SEQUENCER allows rea l-time record i n g and pla yback
of a series of effects and dra w i ngs. The control movements a n d
graphics pad operations which produce t h e drawings a n d effects
are stored in the i n ternal memory of the CVI, where they may be
edited to precise times and posi tions, a n d then replayed. Events
may be timed down to one video f i e ld t i me. The sequence stored
in the SEQUENCER memory is reta i ned, even on power down.
Note that it is not the screen ima ges that are stored by the
Sequencer, but rather the actions which form the image. So i f a
sequence is recorded with a particu l a r v ideo input or field store
image and replayed with a differe n t o ne, the resu l t will be the
same process a pplied to the new input or i mage.
The SEQUENCER ca n not change selections in the menus
directly. However through the use of the 1 00 user-definable
PRESETS you can access a l l of the CV I's menu functions. The
PRESETS and the SEQUENCER i n combina tion allow an accuracy
and versa tility of control which is not possible through manual
manipulation. The required effects can be saved as PRESETS
before recording the Sequence. These PRESETS and the
SEQUENCER data can be storcd onto video tape for future use
with the SAVE & RECALL function, or they may be sent to a n
external computer via the RS232C link.
The Sequencer ca n be synchronised to external equipment, such
as a video tape, through the START options on this menu. This
allows repeatable event sequenci n g for post-production or live
situations.
Each box on the menu initia tes a function of the Sequencer
when touched. The top three boxes, Record, Append and Insert,
are concerned with recording a sequence of actions into the .
Sequencer memory. The next three boxes, P l a y , R e p e a t and Step,
are concerned with playback of the recorded seque nce. The
MENU button will stop all these Sequencer functions and return
you to the SEQUENCER menu.
1 68 - VIDEO MENU
1 68 -
VIDEO MENU I
Start : The start of a l l Sequencer functions is under the control

of the START list in the menu, as follows:
Immedi ate: The Sequencer fu nction begins as soon as the box is

touched. The CVI returns immediately to the colour
image for recording o r playback.
Audio: The function begins when a high audio level is
a p plied to the CVI a ud i o input. For example, this
could be a beep on the audio track of a video ta pe.
Remote: The function begins when a swi tch connected to the
CVI Remote i n p u t is closed. This a l lows many types
of systems to synchronise to the CVI Sequencer.
When Audio or Remote Start is acti ve, the CVI will give a beep
and then wait for the audio o r switch signal. The c u rsor w i l l
disappear. A u d i o or R e m o t e S t a r t may be bypassed, i f necessary,
by. pressin g the STOP button.
Record : All CVI events (such as pad moves, slider movements,

button p resses, preset changes, etc) are recorded into the
Sequencer memory simply b y perfo rming the actions a t the
CONTROL CONSOLE i n the Record mode. Record will overwrite
a n y existing sequence in the memory. If you will need the
existing sequence a t a later date i t c a n be stored onto video tape
using SAVE & RECALL. The first event to be recorded is always
the current PRESET. This ensures t h a t the CVI w i l l always begin
a sequence i n a known state. I f this is not wanted, the first step
ca n b e removed using the Edit function.
As a n example, to record a sequence which changes from Preset
3 4 to Preset 0 1 , then paints a few sca ttered dots and stretches
them, the CVI operator would perform the following steps.
i ) Select Preset 34. This will be the first step of the new
sequence.
ii) Move the cursor to the Record box and l i f t the styl us. The
display will return to the colo u r i ma ge. Recording has begun.
iii) A fter the requi red time has been spent i n Preset 34, change to
Preset 0 1 .
i v ) P reset 0 1 allows Dots to be d ra w n , so d r a w the dots where
you w a n t them. Don't worry too much about mistakes - they
can be corrected i n the E d i t mode.
v) Move the STRETCH slider as requi red.
vi) P ress the MENU b u t ton. This returns you to the Sequencer
Me nu and stops the Record function.
The CVI has now stored i n to i ts memory the sequence of

actions and the times a t which each CONTROL CONSOLE change
was ma de. It is now possible to r e p l a y t h e sequence a s i t was
recorded using the Play function, or to mod i f y the recorded
actions and times using the Edi t c a p a b i l i ty.
Note that to Record a partic u l a r Pa i n t Me thod (such a s Do ts)
you must enter a PRESET where tha t Pa i n t Method is sel ected.
However, you can Edit the recorded sequence so tha t all the Paint
Me thods occ u r i n the same PRESET. See below, u n d e r ' H i n t s on
t h e S e q u e n c e r'.
I VIDEO MENU - 69
Play: A previously recorded seque nce may be played back using

Play. The actions in the sequence are pla yed with exactly the
same timing and positioning with which they were recorded.
These times and positions may be al tered using the Edit function.
Note that Paint actions will be performed at exactly the places
that they were recorded and hence may not be visible if the field
store has not been cleared. At the end of the playback. the
Sequencer returns to the men u page. Play may be halted by
pressing the MENU button.
The user is able to paint and manipulate the controls d u ring
Play. Unusual effects can occur, however, when the Sequencer
also tries to do someth ing. The Sequencer will always override the
user.
Repeat: The Repeat function opera tes exactly as Play except

that when the end of the sequence is reached, the Sequencer
returns immediately to the beginning. The end less loop ca n be
stopped with the MENU button.
Step: The Step function opera tes a s Play, except that the
Sequencer progra m is executed step by s tep. The Sequencer will
perform one step from the current poi n t in the program each time
that the DRAW LOCK button is pressed. If you stop the Play
function during a sequence, you ca n then use the Step function to
locate the exact point i n the seq uence to place a n Insert or an
Edit (see below).
Append : This is similar to Record except that the actions

subsequently recorded a re placed at the current program step.
instead of starting from the begin ning. All subsequent progra m
steps (including the current step) are deleted. This allows you to
add to an existing sequence or to alter a sequence after a given
point (useful if you make a mistake while recording).
A program step consists of a n action such as pushing a bu tton,
changing PRESET or drawing a line. The current program step
can be found using the Edit function (see below). Append does
not automatically record the current Preset number when it begins.
I nsert: This is similar to Record e xcept that the recorded

actions are placed into the existing sequence be/ore the current
program step. All subsequent progra m steps in the existing
sequence (including the current s tep) are 'moved up' to allow room
for the inserted steps.
A program step consists of an action s u c h as pushing a b u t ton,
changing PRESET or drawing a l i ne. The current program step
can be found using the Ed i t function (see below). Insert does not
automatically record the curre n t PRESET number when it begins.
I 70 - VIDEO MENU I
r Ed it : When the Edit box is touched, the menu will change to the
SEQUENCER E D IT menu, shown below. This menu displays ten
S equencer program steps, starting a t the current one. The d a ta
conce r n i n g ti mes and positions for a step are displayed i n one
program line, and may be modified to a djust the sequencer
progra m as required.
Searching for lines

The SEQUENCER E D IT menu shown here is t h e result of
recording a sequence using the steps l i sted under Record a bove. It
shows some typical program l i n cs, �ach beginning with a line
number. During Play these lines a r e performed sequentia l l y from
000 to the end of the sequence.
I f your sequence has more than ten l i nes (and most of them do),
the up a rrow and down arrolV boxes on the menu let you move u p
or down by t e n lines to s e e m o r e of the sequence. F o r larger
movements:
i) Mov e the cu rsor to any l i n e nu mber box. It will light up.

ii) Type in a 3-digit number using the CONTROL CONSOLE
buttons.
iii) Move the cursor to the Search box. The d isplay will change
to show the selected line n u mber a t the selec t ed position.
You can also locate specific steps in the Sequencer progra m by

using t h e Play or S t ep functions to execute the Sequencer
progra m:
i) Select Play or Step.

ii) When you recognise the a c tion t h a t corresponds to the
program line that you wa n t, press the MENU b u t t o n to stop
the pla ying.
iii) Select Edi t in the Sequencer Edit Me n u , and the line n u mber
a t which you stopped playing w i l l be d isplayed. You can
then Delete, I n s e r t , A p p e n d or change the program l ines.
I V IDEO MENU - 71
De leting lines
If you find tha t you have recorded some progr a m lines tha t you
did not i n tend, they ca n be dele ted. To do th is:
i) Loca te the line in the Sequencer Ed i t menu, and move the
cursor to light up the box a ro u n d i ts l i n e nu mber.
ii) Move the cursor to the D e l e t e box. The selected line will be
removed and the lines renumbered.
I nserting lines
If you need to add some more instruct io ns in the middle of
your recorded .sequence, you can use the I n s e r t and A p p e n d
functions. To do th is:
i) Find the poi nt in the sequence where the ex tra instructions
a re to be inserted. This can be done by t he methods
described under Search i n g f o r l i n e s a bove.
ii) Select the line number be/ore which you wish to I n s e r t by
moving the cursor to light up the appropriate line n umber
box.
iii) Return to the SEQUENCER menu and select I n s e r t.
iv) Record the required addit ions by performing t h ose actions
with the CONTROL CONSOLE.
v) When all the add itions have been recorded, press the MENU
button to terminate the I n s e r t .
To change the elld of your sequence, use A p p e n d.
Changing Sequencer lines

The program lines consist of a word followed by some nu mbers
i n boxes. The last line will a l ways be an End statement.
Sequencer lines are of two ty pes:
1) Buttons, sliders and presets, a nd

2) Paint methods.
The Sequencer lines correspon d i n g to changes in the bu ttons,

sliders and presets take the following for ms:
1 72 - VIDEO MENU I
r The first n u mber is the line n u m b e r (000 to 999). The n u mber

a fter the words i n dicates the pos i t i o n to which the slider was
moved (000 to 255) o r the PRESET number (00 to 99). The
following set of n u mbers below H M S F is the time a t which the
particula r event occurred in Hours, Minu tes, Seconds and Fields.
This entry represents the time tha t t h e event will occ u r relative to
the start of a Play comma n d .
A n y or a l l of t h e numbers i n a p r o g r a m line may be c h a n g e d by
simply moving the cursor to the box to l ig h t it up, then t y p i n g i n
a new n umber. T h i s changes t h e value to w h i c h t h e slider w i l l
move, t h e PRESET number t h a t w i l l b e selected, or t h e time a t
which t h e specified event occurs.
When a time is changed, a l l the fol lowing ti mes will change by
a corresponding a mount to preserve the rel a tive timing of
following events. For example, if a t i me entry is reduced by 9
seconds then a l l following times a re red uced b y 9 seconds. When
this is not desired, the next time entry can be i n creased by 9
seconds to restore a l l subseq uent entr ies. Using such a djustments
i t is possible to make the time for one sequence step earlier tha n
the time above it. When such a set of program l ines is executed
by Play, the l i n es w i th earlier times will be executed i m mediately
they are reached.
N OTE: I t is also possible to crea te a s i t u a tion where t i mes

should actually have negative val ues. In these cases the
Sequencer will display a very high time entry for these
program lines (greater than 5 0 hou rs). Such entries are
necessary to preserve the time intervals between even ts. These
e n tries will return to normal small values when the negative
time s i t u a tion is removed. I t's a l l much simpler tha n i t sounds
try i t!
The Sequencer lines corres p o n d i n g to Paint Methods are similar

to other l i nes, except that there a re no t i m e entries associa ted with
them. Exa mples a re shown below. T h e Sequencer will Play Paint
I V IDEO MEN U - 73
SEQUENCER MENU
Method instructions as fast as possible u n t i l an instruction w i t h a

time entry is reached. The Sequencer will then wait for that time
to arrive before proceed ing. See 'Hi n ts on the Sequencer' below.
The pair of nu mbers following the word is a screen posi tion
(x,y) relative to the top left corner o f the screen. These range
from 000 to 255, so that the bottom right of the screen is
(255,255), the top right is ( 2 5 5 ,000), etc. These positions can be
changed by moving the c u rsor to the req ui red box and then typing
in a new n u mber.
A continuous squiggly line, such as those in Draw mode, is
recorded as a Do t i nstruction (to esta blish the sta rt of the line)
a n d a series of short straight Line instru ctions. Each of these
lines will be drawn from the end of the previous one to the poi n t
specified in the Line instr uction. Rays a n d Rubber band are
recorded in the same way.
Note that the Paint Methods Rectangle, Circle, Copy and T i t l e
e a c h require two Sequencer lines to d e f i n e t h e m ( f o r example:
Corner/Rectangle, Centre/Circle). E l l i pse req u i res three
(Ce n t re/ Axis/El l i pse).
H ints on the Seq uencer

Here are a few tricks which may help you to get more out of
the Sequ encer.
1) It is possible to have a seq uence with several different Paint

Methods occu rring in the same PRESET. To do this:
i) Set several PR ESETS so that each of your required P a i n t
Methods i s stored in a different PRESET.
ii) Record the sequence of P a i n t Methods that you want by
changing between the PRESETS of step (i). The Brush
Sha pes, Paint Types, etc, wi l l probably not be the ones you
want, but do not worry about this a t the momen t.
iii) When you have record ed all the Met hods, return to t h e
SEQUENCER EDIT m e n u . The sequence w i l l consist of the
P a i n t Methods that you recorded with PRESET changes i n
between.
i v) Use the Delete function to remove all the Preset l i n es except
the first one.
v) When you now Play the seq uence, the Preset nu mber w i l l
remain consta n t and a l l t h e P a i n t Methods will be performed
with the pa inting selections (Brush, colour, etc) of that
PRESET.
2) A series of Paint Me thod l i nes in the Sequencer will be

performed as quickly as possible. I f a pa use is req uired in t h e
painting, simply R e c o r d or I n s e r t a h a rmless timed instruction
(such as STOP or DRAW LOCK) at tha t point in the sequence.
The Play function will pause a t t h a t po i n t until the correct t i me
ela pses.
3) If you want a sequence to r u n as fast as possible, ignoring time,

then you can use the E d i t facility. Set the time entry of the first
timed instruction to zero. Scroll through the sequence, a n d w h e n
the t i m e exceed s a b o u t t e n secon ds, set i t to zero a g a i n . W h e n t h e
Sequencer now P l a y s t h e sequence i t w i l l be con t i n u a l l y r u n n i n g
la te, a n d hence w i l l r u n a s f a s t a s it c a n .
1 _ .. _ , _ __ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ L __ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _
1 74 - VIDEO MEN U I
SAV E A N D R ECALL M E N U
This menu controls the d i g i ta l s t o r a g e a nd retrieval o f s t i l l

images, seque nces, and presets onto v i d eo tape or v i d eo cassette.
A n y variety of video tape may be used for this purpose: 1 /2" VHS
or Beta, or 3/4" U-Ma tic, I ", or others, provided th a t it can record
and repla y a video signal.
The CVI can not control your v i deo cassette or ta pe recorder, so
some manual intervention is req u i r e d . Specifically, you must fast
forward or reverse the video recorder to the p o i n t on the tape
that you wish to record or retrieve the i n formation, and operate
the recorder's play a n d record but tons.
The Save a n d Recal l functions h a v e error correction, and will
withstand tape dropouts of u p to seven video li nes i n every field
without loss of informa tion.
To use, first make the a ppropr i a t e selection in the S A V E &
RECALL menu. Return to the image by press i n g the STOP
button. The SAVE & RECALL function will be active
immedia tely.
F U N CT I O N
0) Off: I f you d o not require a SAVE & RECALL function,
select Off.
I VIDEO MEN U - 75
SAV E AN D, R E CALL M E N U
F U N CT I O N H ow i t is done:
1 ) Save: This saves everything currently a) FAST FOR WARD o r REWIND tape to
in the CVI. I t saves the digital i mage from desi red Save position o n tape. STOP
the field store, the sequencer, and the 1 0 0 tape recorder. CVI output is displa yed
user- d efined PR ESETS. on monitor.
b) Create a n identification ti tle via the

TITLE EDIT menu.
c) R e t u r n to SAVE & RECALL menu.
d) Press RECORD on VCR.
e) Select Save option o n the menu and

press t h e STOP bu tton.
f) CVI will now generate an

identification display incorpora ting the
t i t l e defined earlier (5 seconds). This
will be recorded i n the normal analog
manner of t h e VCR, enabling you to
find t h e image o n t h e tape a t a later
time b y a visual sea rch. Following t h i s
is a d i s p l a y o f t h e still i m a g e ( 5
seconds), followed by s y n c fra mes a n d
the d i gital data.
g) After 3 1 /2 m i n u tes, the CVI will beep

a t you to indicate t h e end of t h e
sa v i n g process. Press S T O P on the
VCR.
Setu p
r-:::-l - --. EJ
L:J-- out in out in
.
C=:l
L::.:J
VCR - - - -
I 76 - VIDEO MENU I
SAV E A N D R E CALL M E N U
r 2} Save Data : Similar to Save function, except that only the

P RESETS and SEQUENCER data is sa ved. Consequently, S a v e
d a t a takes only thirty seconds to complete as the i mage is not
sa ved.
The procedure is as for Save.
F U N CT I O N H ow it is done:
3 } Recall: The opposite function to Save. a) Select Video Men u 1 - VIDEO
This selection recalls all of the digital SOURCE.
i n formation saved onto the video-tape, and On this menu, select
puts it into the CVI's memory. Note that 1
this will overwrite anything that is 1
currently in the CVI. Thus the image,
sequencer and presets i n the CVI be/ore the b) Select Video Men u 8 SAVE &
-
Recall function is initiated, will be lost. R ECALL. Select Recall. Press STOP
However, this i nformation can be separately button on CVI to return to image.
saved before Recall i f you think you may
need i t later. c) Output from the VCR now goes
strai g ht throu g h the CVI analog path
to the monitor. Rewind or fast
forward the VCR to locate the
identification and picture you saved
previously with the Save function.
d) Press play on the VCR a n d while

i dentification is displayed, press
ORA W button on the CVI.
I VIDEO MENU - 77
SAV E AN D R E CALL M E N U
e) The CVI should give a beep a f ter

several seconds to i n d i ca te
synchronization of the CVI a n d VCR,
a fter wh ich the data from the VCR
will be visible on the left half of the
'
scr een. With this Reca l l function
selected, image, stencil, sequencer a n d
presets w i l l b e reca lled - overwri t i n g
the c u r r e n t image, stencil, sequencer
a n d presets.
f) After 3 1 /� minutes, the CVI will beep

to indicate end of the RECALL
process.
g) Press STOP button on VCR.
o out i n r-:::l out in C=:l

U-- - -·U- - - --.�
N OTE: The CVI jumps to PRESET 00 before reca l l i n g
from tape to a void mangling the image from tape. Wh enever
you use factory (ROM) PRESET 0 0 , the field store image is
preserved. If you have changed the internal setup of
PRESET 00, R e s e t it to f a c t o r y (ROM) PRESET 00. See
V ideo Menu 6 - PRESETS CONTROL.
4) Recall Data : Recalls the 1 0 0 user a l terable PRESETS, a n d

the SEQUENCER i n forma tion previously S a v e d t o ta pe. This w i l l
not a f fect the current image in t h e f i e l d sto re.
The procedure is the same a s for R e c a l l .
5) Reca ll I mage: R e c a l l s o n l y the i m a g e i n formation, a n d w i l l

n o t a ffect t h e SEQUENCER or P R ESETS. T h u s R e c a l l i m a g e m a y
be u s e d w h e r e a new field s t o r e image i s re q u i red, but the current
SEQUENCER information a n d PRESETS are to be reta i n e d .
Th e proced u re is the sa me a s for R e c a l l .
6) Test D ata Reca l l : T e s t w h e t h e r i t is possible to perform

a n error-free R e c a l l o f the PRESETS a n d SEQUENCER d a t a from
tape, without actually a l tering d a t a a l r e a d y s tored i n t h e CVI. A
message on the screen i n d ica tes t h e res u I t of test.
This test takes t h i rty seconds to complete a nd i s a useful way o f
v e r i f y i n g t h a t d a t a has not b e e n lost w h e n S a v i n g d u e to bad t a p e
or record i n g con d i t ions. S e c E r r o r m e s s a g e s below.
I 78 - VIDEO MENU I
SAV E AN D R ECALL M E N U
Error Messages
used to prevent data errors in the PRESET and SE Q UENCER
Error correction and multiple-copy comparision techniques are
Save and Recall process. Unrecoverable errors may still occur due
to poor tape quality or recording conditions. So, use high quality
tape, keep those little tape heads clean and ensure proper
termination of connecting cables.
Errors in Recall or Recall data
completion to indicate whether the P RESETS data, SE Q UENCER

In the event of an error, a message is displayed upon
data, or both, have been corrupted.
of the CVI will be reset to the factory ( ROM) PRESETS. If the

If the error occurred in the PRESETS data, the USER PRESETS
error occurred in the SE Q UENCER data, then the SE Q UENCER

program will be cleared.
Errors in Test data recall
A message is displayed upon completion of Test data recall to
of the test result, the PRESETS and SE Q UENCER of the CVI will
indicate whether any unrecoverable errors occurred. Regardless
not be altered using Test data recall.
Test results are indicated by:
I VIDEO MENU - 79
SAV E AN D R E CALL M E N U
R ECA L L - TRO U B L E S H OOTI N G

PROBLEM REASON SOLUTION
No sync beep 1 ) Beeper turned Off Turn it O n

on Recall on Paint Me nu 4
Select 1 on men u
1
2) Video Me nu 1
(VIDEO SOURCE)
incorrectly selected
3) Incorrect connections Check connections
4) Video boa rd controls Turn con trast up and

badly adjusted and brigh tness down
to give good black
and white on the
digital data coming
,
. ':;.
from tape
Select termina ted

VIDEO 1 , composite
input
5) Poor tape or record er a) Use new tape

quality, i n d icated by b) Use a cleaner
ragged, jumpy or section of tape
fuzzy picture c) Adjust recorder
Sync beep but 1 ) Video board controls (See REASON 4) above

errors in badly adjusted
image or data
2) Poor tape or recorder
quality (See REASON 5) above
3) PAL/NTSC link at Turn the CVI off.

position E l l on digital Try swa pping the link.
board is set wrongl y. If Recall still fails,
swap the link back.
I 80 - VIDEO MENU I
S ETU P M E N U
This menu contains various functions useful for setting up the

CVI with external equipme n t. I f a selection o ther than Off is
made in this menu, then w h e n you return to your i ma ge, (press
STOP button or position c u rsor over the white squa re) - the
selection yo u have made will override the normal opera tion until
the STOP button i s pressed again.
0) Off: The normal selection during CVI operation.
I VIDEO MENU - 81
S ETU P M E N U
SET- U P F U N CT I O N How it is done

1) Chroma key Levels : This ena bles
'-
a) Select Chroma k e y levels i n the

you to adjust the threshold level of t h e Setup menu.
inbuiJt Chr om a key circu its with the H.S.V. b) Press STOP button to return to image.
sliders. Note that it changes the function c) Adjust H.S.V. sliders for best result.
of the H.S.V. sliders to allow fine d) Press STOP.
adjustment of the chroma key levels.
The HUE slider = red level To adjust the Chroma key levels ideally
The SATURATION slider = green level with constant lighting levels, follow this
The VALUE slider = blue level proced ure:
The COLOU� DEPTH slider will have no
effect. a) Select Chroma key levels in the
SETUP menu.
You may adjust Chroma key levels while b) Select Chroma (blue) from the
an effect is being used. This may be CHROMA KEY menu if blue keying
necessary if lighting levels fluctuate. is required.
Select Luminance if keying from the
ambient light levels is requi red.
c) Select Chroma key in the STENCIL
SOURCE menu (Video Menu 1 ).
Select Stencil Show i n Paint Men u 4.
d) Ensure that the video camera is aimed
and focussed o n the subject tha t you
wish to chroma key, against a well
illuminated blue backgrou nd (no
shadows). See CHROMA KEY SETUP
SUGGESTIONS in Section 2 -
'.-
PRESETS SELECTION, PRESETS 98

& 99.
e) After ensuring that the USE STENCIL
button is O n , adjust the chroma key
levels with the HSV sliders, so that
the stencil display ind icator entirely
covers the blue background, but leaves
the subject in camera focus unaffected.
The stencil display i ndicator is seen as
a brightening of the image.
f) When the screen display levels are
adjusted correctly, press the STOP
button. This will turn Off the chroma
key a djustment mode and return you
to the normal operational mode of the
CVI.
N OT E : PRESET 99 will setup adjustments for VIDEO 1

input.
2
PRESET 98 will setup adjustments for VIDEO input. In
these PRESETS the 'backgrou nd' levels are colourized to appear
i n the complement of the colour of the keyed image to aid ease
of adjustment.
1 82 - VIDEO MENU I
S ETU P M E N U
2) Colour B ars : If this selection is m a d e, a n d then the STOP

button is pressed, a 1 00% Colour b a r s d isplay will a ppear on the
screen. I t will not destroy the image you may h a ve on the field
store. Colour bars is a lso selecta ble by using PRESET 9 7 .
Press the STOP button to return to p r e vious i mage.
3) Self Test: This selection initia tes the CVI's self-test

function and tests the majority of the C V I's d i g i t a l circuitry.
Any image i n the field store will b e destroyed by this test. If the
CVI passes the test, the message Self -test passed will a p pear on
the screen. If the CVI fails the test, a ppropriate messages will
a p p ear. Contact your distributor.
This is what a self test result looks l i ke:
After the self test, you may r e turn to normal by p ressing the
STOP button.
4) Test Pattern : I f this function is selected, and then the

STOP bu tton is pressed, a n i n b u i l t Tes t p a t t e r n will a p p e a r on the
screen. This will destroy the previous image you may have had in
the field store. Test pattern permits the, correct setup of external
monitors and o t h e r video eq uipme n t. It is for fine adjustment of
external monitors to ensure optima l picture quality. Test pattern
is a lso selectable by using PRESET 94.
To stop the Test p a t tern function, press the STOP bu tton.
I VIDEO MENU - 83 I
_
4 .'
_ i --�------------------__
___________________ __
--. - . _
__
. ______________��______
________________�
, .=
Q U I C K S E LECTI ON PAINT M E N U
�.I
-
I�Q.
A� ; ______________________________________________________________
� -.�_
_ $k___
. _
($�
&H_
_
�A __-,--
%- -
n--�
;--m h--�
)@-
U �L�
�-�
,,'" �
_�; __
,Q, b_
" ,£ _. �;�W
_�. . ----��----
; .-
, 4 __----#
_____
MW
__
Q@�
1. , .. "
,
Q U I C K S E L ECTI O N VI D E O M E N U
I O T T l C' K � F. T , F. C' T T O N V T n F. O M R N T T - R7 1
"lilli
an"",,
;:; __---------__________�, ; _
* ._
__ 1l _
bh _____�""""_
"""' _..._""""....
"""' �
..._ ______9&b_
@ ___
Q U I C K S E LECTI O N VI D EO M E N U
RS232C Port ControI. ......................... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rev.7 Software Update ....... ....... ... ............ ...... ..... 1
. . . . .. .
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CO NTROL
CVI RS232C CONTRO L -
F U L L DOCU M EN TAT I O N
This full documentation o f the RS232C functions o f the CVI is

an expansion of the documentation in the Revision 5 CVI User
Manual. It has been made available to customers to assist i n
setting u p a n d o perating a n RS232C computer l i n k w i th the CVI.
This documentation will be released at a later date in fully
typeset format a s a n u pdate t o the User Manual.
Contents
Introduction
How RS23 2C Works
Summary of How the CVI Uses RS232C
Ma king a Connecting Cable
Comman d afld Data Formats
Control console comma nds

Data transfer commands
Programming Your Computer
Appendices
Preset data format

CVI RS232C Speci fications
ASCII character set
External Graphics Pad (Rev 6 Software)
I SOFTWARE UPDATE - 1
RS232C PORT CONTROL
�!
This menu i s selected from Video Menu 9, SETUP. I t con trols

the data rate and character format for the RS232C serial
communications link of the CVI. To use this feature of the CVI
you must have a computer or keyboard capable of communicating
in the RS232C format. Technica l details are given at the end of
this section.
The RS232C in terface allows an external computer to control
the functions of the CONTROL CONSOLE; tha t is, pressing
buttons, moving sliders and performing all sorts of P a i n t .
functions. In addi tion, the external computer can be used for
storage. Images from the field store, the User-definable PRESETS
and the SEQUENCER may all be transmitted to and from the
external computer. Titles may also be entered with more
flexibility than is possi ble w i th the TITLE EDIT -Menu. All these
functions can be performed a t high speed and with a high degree
of accuracy and repeata bili ty.
N OTE: I t will be necessary for you to perform a t least a

small amount of programming on your computer in order to
make i t communicate with the CVI. For modest appl ications,
only a very simple program will be required. Your
computer's supplier may be able to provide a software
package to suit your purpose. For informa tion, see
Progra m m i n g Y o u r Com p u t e r in this section.
A QWERTY keyboard with RS232C capability can perform - al l

the P a i n t , Titling and CONTRO L CONSOLE functions listed
above. Wi th the keyboard, however, the speed of opera tion is
determined by the speed at which you can type.
1 2 - SO FTWARE UPDATE
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CO NTRO L
The following pages give a descri ption of RS232C computer

communications a n d how to connec t the CVI to your keyboard or
computer. The comma n d system for controlling t h e CVI is given,
a n d there are examples of the type of program that you must
write on your computer to make i t communicate with the CVI.
Fin a l l y , this section lists the RS232C technical specifications a n d
some reference information about the CVI.
H OW RS232C WO R KS
N OT E : This section gi ves a quite detailed description of

computer communications a n d the RS232C system. I f you
are already familiar with this you can skip this section or
use i t for reference as required.
RS232C is a very widel y-used standard for transmitting and

receiving data between various computers and their peri pheral
equipment (keyboards, prin ters, e tc.). I t is a flexible standard
which a l lows different data rates a n d formats to be used. This
mea n s that there is usually some time and work i n volved i n
interfacing two compu ters, but it h a s the advan tage that v i r tually
any two RS232C-equipped devi ces can be made to talk to one
another.
Com puter data

Computer d a ta consists of simply I 's a n d O's, known collectively
as 'bits' of in formation. These bits are often arranged i n to groups
of eight, which are known as 'by tes'. Each byte can have 2 5 6
distinct va lues ranging f r o m 00000000 to 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . E a c h v a l u e
can be i n terpreted as a n umber f r o m 0 to 2 5 5 , as a letter or
symbol, or simply as a comb i n a t i o n of bits. I n the CVI computer
link, all the bytes represent a n 'ASCII' letter or symbol as
described under ASCII Codes below.
I n order to transmit information from one device to a nother,
the transmitting device sends bytes of d a ta wi th i n tervals of time
between them. The interval of t i me between bytes can range from
nothing to infinity. This is called 'asynchronous' communica tion,
as there is no synchronising mechanism which keeps the bytes
mov i n g. The bits of each byte are sent sequentially, and hence
RS232C is called a 'serial' commu nications protocol. The bits a re
sent a s successive high or low voltage levels on a data l ine. The
recei vin g device assembles the bits back i n to a byte which may
t hen be used or interpreted as required.
I SOFTWAR E UPDATE - 3
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CONTRO L
AS C I I Codes
A byte of computer data can be used in many ways. One of the
most common ways is to equate each combina tion of O's a n d I 's to
a particular letter of the alphabet or a symbol. ASCII is a widely
used scheme for doing this. Only seven of the eight bits in each
byte are used in ASCII, giving 1 28 possible combinations of bi ts.
Each combination is assigned to represent one of 52 letters (upper
and lower case), 10 numera ls, 34 symbols or 32 'unprinta ble'
characters. The unprin table cha racters are used to represent such
things as carriage returns, backspaces and form feeds i n a block
of text.
The CVI communica tes exclusively i n ASCII codes. Every byte
received or transmi tted by the CVI must be interpreted as an
ASCII character.
The table of ASCII chara cters is given a t the end of this
section.
Binary data
A byte of data will often represent a number which is stored in
the computer. This is done by using the 'binary' scheme. The
eight bits are weigh ted in importance or significance from left to
right. The right-most bit is the least significant bit (LSB), and has
a weigh ting of 1. The next bit has a weighting of 2, the next has
4, the next 8, and so on. The left-most bit in a byte is the most
significant bit (MSB), and has a weighting of 1 28. To obta i n the
decimal value of a binary number, simply add the weightings of
the bits which are a ' I '.
For example, take the binary number 0 1 000 1 1 1 :.
1 1 00 1 00 1 (binary) = l x l 28 + l x64 + Ox32 + Ox l 6 + I x 8 + Ox4 +

Ox2 + I x l
= 1 28 + 64 + 8 + 1
= 20 1 (deci mal)
Using this method, binary notation can represent the decimal

numbers from 0 (bina ry 00000000) to 2 5 5 (binary 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ).
14 - SOFTWARE UPDATE
H exadecimal Notation
Hexadecimal notation, often known simply as 'hex', is a method
o f writing down the value o f a byte of data. Hex is useful as it is
cumbersome to write the eight I 's a n d O's i n binary notation, and
conversion to decimal is not straigh tforward.
To write the binary value of a byte in hex, first divide the
eight bits of the byte into two groups of four (known a s
'nybbles'). Then each nybble is written d o w n as a s i n g l e number
or letter, accord i n g to its binary value (0 to 1 5). As there is no
single character to represent the binary values from 10 to 1 5, the
letters 'A' to 'F' are used. This gives the 'hex' nota tion scheme, as
l i sted below.
Binary Value Decimal Value Hex Value
0000 0 0
000 1 1 1
00 1 0 2 2
00 1 1 3 3
0 1 00 4 4
0101 5 5
01 10 6 6
01 1 1 7 7
1 000 8 8
1 00 1 9 9
r'.
1010 10 A
101 1 11 B
1 1 00 12 C
1 101 13 D
1 1 10 14 E
1111 15 F
So, for example, the binary byte ' 1 1 00 1 00 1 ' can be written i n
decimal as ' 2 0 I ' or i n hex as 'C9'.
Similarly,
00 1 1 1 1 0 1 (binary) = 61 (decimal) = 3D (hex).
Hex is easily converted to decimal by multiplying t h e first hex

'digit' by 1 6 and adding the second hex "digi t'.
i.e. 3D (hex) = 3x 1 6 + '0'
= 48 + 1 3
= 6 1 (decimal)
I SO FTWARE UPDATE - 5
RS232C PO RT C O N T R O L
Baud rate
The r a te a t which the bits within a byt e are s e n t is known as
the Baud rate. The transmi t t i n g a n d recei v i n g d e v ices must be set
to use the same baud ra te, o t h e r w ise the recei ver w i l l n o t be able
to u nd e r s t a n d w h a t is transmitted. I n the CYI this c a n r a n g e
f r o m ' 3 00 baud ( 3 0 0 b i t s per s e c o n d ) t o 1 92 0 0 baud. This c a n b e
s e l e c t e d from the RS232 PORT C O N T R O L Me n u to s u i t the
external computer. 9600 b a u d is the most common b a u d rate.
Parity
P a r i t y can be used to check for errors i n data tra nsmission.
The CYI d oes' n o t check the parity of each byte i t receives, b u t i t
c a n be set to transmit a n y of t h e p a r i t y t y p e s ( E v e n , Odd, Space
or None) to s u i t the external computer.
Stop bits
After each byte, the t r a n s m i t t i n g d e v i ce sends a n u mber of bits
which a l l o w time for the system t o settle down. These a r e known
as Stop bi ts, a n d there w i l l be e i t h e r o n e or t w o of them. The
CYI can be set to expect a n d t r a n s m i t ei ther one or t w o stop bits
using the RS232 PORT CONTROL Me n u . The use of t w o stop
bits is recommended where possi ble.
RS232C Signals
A n R S 2 3 2 connector will h a v e u p to six s i g n a l p i n s . Two a r e
data l i n e s which o p e r a t e as d e s c r i b e d a bove. T h e other f o u r a r e
known as hands h a k e l i n es, a n d they c o n t r o l the flow of d a ta f r o m
o n e d e v i ce t o a n o t her. The s i x p o s s i b l e signal pins on a d e v ice
are:
TXD - Trans m i t Data: Data from t h e de vice is t r a n s m i t t e d

f r o m this pin.
RXD - Receive Data: Da ta is received from a nother device

th rough t h i s pin.
RTS - Request t o Send: A handshake output w h ich is set to a

high level by the devi ce w h e n it is r e a d y to be s e n t d a ta. If the
device is 'busy' a n d does not wish to be sent data then it w i l l
s e t RTS low.
CTS - Clear to Send: A handshake input which stops the device

from transmitting w h e n i t is held low by a n external source.
DTR - D a t a Terminal Ready: A ha ndshake output with a

similar function to R TS.
DSR - Data Set R e a d y : A h a n dsh a k e input with a similar

f u n c tion to CTS.
'- .
1 6 - S OFTWARE UPDATE
RS232C PO RT CO N T R O L
I n a normal connection, a s shown below, TXD of Device A

would be connected to RXD of Device B and vice versa.
Simi l a r l y, RTS of Device A would be connected to CTS of B and
v ice versa, and DTR of A would be connected to DSR of B and
vice versa.
Device A Device B
TXD l..- TXD
RXD .; RXD
RTS RTS
CTS CTS
DTR DTR
DSR '"
.; DSR
Handshaking
The purpose of handshaki n g between computers is to control
when d a ta bytes are sent. The handshaking l i nes are to stop a
transmitting device from send ing d a ta when the receiver i s not
ready to receiv e.
When the receiving device i s busy (not ready) i t should set one
of its handshake outputs (RTS or DTR) low. This output is
connected to a handshake i n p u t (CTS or DSR) of the transmitting
device, and so the transmission should stop. When the receiver is
ready to receive more data, i t will set its handshake line high
again.
The manner in which the four h a ndshake l i nes are used
between two devices is the most variable part of a n y RS232C
setup. Ma n y devices will use o n l y two of the four handshake
lines, one input and one output.
The CVI uses the RTS a n d CTS lines for ha ndshaking. To set
u p ha ndshaking between you r computer a n d the CVI you will
first have to find out which li nes are used by your compu ter.
Consult its documentation o r the computer supplier. Then you
must wire the connec ting cable accordingly. See under Ma k i n g a
Con n e c t i n g Cable below .
.�
\
I SOFTWAR E UPDATE - 7 I
Summary of how the CV I uses RS232C

A l l bytes s e n t t o o r from t h e CVI are i n terpre ted ASCII
characters. All comma nds and nu mbers (decimal and
hexadecimal) are sent as ASCII characters. For example, when
you need to send the decimal number 241 to the CVI, i t must be
sent as three consecu tive ASCII characters: "2", "4" and " I ".
Similarly, the hexadecimal number 3D must be sent as the two
ASCII characters "3" and "0".
The CVI will communicate over a range of Baud rates from 300
to 9600 baud. The 1 9200 baud setting is ava ilable but cannot be
guaranteed to provide error-free operation under all circumstances
with all compu ters.
The CVI transmits, and expects to receive, bytes with seven bi ts
(Revision 5B Software) or eight bits (Revision 6 Software) plus
parity. Where eight data bi ts are used the most significa n t bit
must always be zero in data sent to the CVI.
The CVI can be set to transmit and receive one or two S t o p b i t s
and any type of P a r i t y . It does not check for parity errors in
received data.
The CVI uses the R T S and C T S li nes for handshaking.
When the CTS input is held lo w by the external computer, the
CVI will stop transmitting data until the line is taken high again.
The C T S line must be held high for the CVI to transmit data.
When the CVI is 'busy' it will hold its RTS output low. Any
data sent to the CVI while it is in this state will be ignored. The
CVI is 'busy' while executing any Paint or Con trol Console
command initia ted via the RS232C Port.
The DSR input to the CVI should be held high at all times
(never switched). If DSR is not held high the CVI will not
transmit da tao
The DTR output of the CVI is always high while the power is
on.
Making a connecting cable

It w i l l be necessary to o b t a i n or construct a c a b l e to connect
your computer or keyboard to the CVI. The details of the pin
connections a t the computer end of the cable will depend on your
computer. Consult your computer manual or computer supplier.
The CVI pin configuration is standard for RS232C Data Termina l
Equipment (OTE), w i t h t h e addition Power Supply pins.
Pin 2 TXD
Pin 3 RXD
Pin 4 RTS Rear view of C.Y.I.
Pin 14 P i n 25
Pin 5 CTS
Pin 6 DSR
Pin 7 GND (Ground)
• • • •• • • • • • • •
Pin 11 - 1 2V • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Pin 15 -12V
RS232C P o r t
Pin 18 +12V Pin 1
�
Pin 1 3
Pin 20 DTR
Pin 25 +5V
1 8 - SOFTWARE UPDATE I
1) 'QWERTY ' Keyboard

A keyboard can be connected to type d a ta such a s titles and
control positions into the CVI. Fa i rlight can su pply a special ised
keyboard for the CVI w i t h con trol fu nctions assigned to certa i n
keys.
Alternatively, another RS232C keyboard can be a d a p ted to
in terface with the CVI. The keyboard cable must be fitted with a
2 5-pin female D-mini connector, wired as shown below. The
Power Su pply lines a t t h e CVI RS232C Port may be used t o supply
a limited a mount of power (as shown below) to a keyboard,
provided t h a t no other power supply is connected.
Max imum Load on CVI RS232C Por t Power Su pplies
+12 V 275 rnA

+ 5 V 200 rnA
-12 V 5 rnA
Female
25 p i n D-m i n i
connector '
Pin 18 +12V
P i n 25 +5V
Plugs
directly Pin 1 5
I n to t h e
7
C.V.I.
RS232C p o r t Pin GND
Pin 3 TXD
N o te: T X D = d a t a f r o m k e y bo a r d
conects t o RXD of CVI
2) CV I Receive Only
This cable can be used where the CVI is not required to
transmit a n y data back to the host compu ter. The CVI w i l l be
a ble to receive all commands a n d load all types of data (title,
image, presets, etc.).
Note t h a t the wire marked • may be omitted to give an absolute
minimum link. I f this handshake line is omitted t h e host
computer will not be able t o register the CVI 'busy' status.
The Power Supply li nes o f the CVI must not be connected to a
host compu ter, w i th the exception o f G N D (Ground/Ea rth) which
must be connected.
�
\,
I SOFTWARE UPDATE - 9
R S 2 3 2 C PORT C O N T R O L
Female
2S p i n D - m i n i P l u g toge t h e r
C h e c k p i n n u m bers
r-----t
connector
Pin 7 GND
(G N D ) GND
(OV)
P lugs
into the Pin 3
TXD TX D Y O U R COMPUTER
(RXD)
CVI
RS232C Port
Pin S * RTS Ins
(CTS)
or DTR or D T R
l� _ __ ------"Y--------.)...
3 wire cable
3) Full Duplex Link

This cable allows simultaneous communications i n both
directions between the CVI and the host computer. Full
handshaking is available to con trot data flow in each direction. It
will be necessary to determine w h ich handshaking pins are used
by the host computer.
The lines marked • and # ma y optionally be omitted with a
consequent loss of ha ndshake capability. Note that if the line
marked # is omitted then the CTS pin (pin 5 ) of the CVI must be
tied to + 1 2V (pin 1 8), otherw ise the CVI will not transmit.
T h e Power Supply lines a t the CVI RS232C Port must n o t be.
connected to the host computer, with the exception of GND
(Ground/Earth) w hich must be con nected.
Female
25 p i n D- m i n i Plug toge t h e r
connector C h e c k p i n n u m bers.
Pin 7 r-----t
( G N D) GND < ) GND
Pin 3
( R X D) TX D � TXD
P i ll 2
Plugs < )
(TXD) RXD RXD
i n to t h e P i ll S # R TS RTS Y O U R COMPUTER
CVI
(CTS)
or D T R < ) o r DTR
RS232C Port Pin 4 * CTS CTS
( R TS)
or DSR < :> or D S R
Pin 6
)
(DSR)
Pin 1 8
( + 1 2V)
l __
------y- )
5 w i r e ca b l e
1 10 - S OFTWA R E UPDATE I
r Command And Data Formats

T h e RS232C control system of t h e CVI requires t h e host
computer or the keyboard to send a command to the CVI. This
will cause the CVI to perform the function specified in the
command. All RS232C functions are initiated by the external
computer.
Every command is preceded b y a n @ cha racter (ASCII 40). The
transmission of @ to the CVI a t any time termina tes the current
command. The CVI issues a short beep each time tha t the " @"
commu n i cations opera tion a n d prepares the CVI for a new
character is received. Invalid comma nds will be ignored, a n d the

CVI will then wait to receive another @ cha racter. With the
exception of Load Ti tle mode, input characters may be upper o r
l o w e r case, and bla nks, carriage returns and control cha racters a r e
ignored.
Commands consist of two ASCII characters followed by a
num b er of para meters, as required. The parameters are 2 o r 3-
digit ASCII decimal n umbers and must have leading zeroes
included. The parameters may b e separated by blanks. Full
details of each comma nd are given i n the following sections.
Some examples of commands are:
@CZ P ress the COLOURIZE button

@PS45 Change to Preset 45
@DT 056 1 89 Draw a dot a t screen position (x,y) = ( 5 6, 1 89)
Comma nds fall i nto two categories: those which perform a

CONTROL CONSOLE function, and those which request transfer
o f a block o f data to o r from the CVI.
Control Console Commands

T h e first type of command instructs t h e C V I t o perform a n
CONTROL CONSOLE action, such as pressing a button, moving a
slider, changing a preset or performing one of the Paint Me thods.
Some of these commands must be followed by one or more
para meters to specify a new slider value, a new preset n umber or
a position on the screen. The number of para meters required
varies between commands. A l l para meters a re decimal a n d range
from 000 to 2 5 5 . Leading zeroes must be included. I n the
descriptions below
nn means a 2-digit decimal number,

111m mean s a 3-digit decimal number,
x x x means a 3-digit decimal x co-o rdinate,
yyy means a 3-digi t decimal y co-ordina teo
During the execution of Control Console commands, the CVI

sets its RTS o u t p u t low, as some f u n c t i o n s (p a r t ic u l a r l y P a i n t
Methods) take some time to perform. The CVI will ignore a l l
received data during t h i s time, i n c l u d i n g commands a n d t h e @
cha racter. The CVI will also ignore Control Console commands if
the SEQUENCER is in a Play mode.
I SOFTWARE U P D A T E - 1 1 1
Button presses
No para meters are required. Each command is equiva lent to
pressing the button concerned.
Commands:
CZ - colourize WS - wipe stencil

DC - draw colour US - use stencil
DS - draw stencil IS - invert stencil
UT - use texture ST - stop
WC - wipe colour FZ - freeze
Preset change
One parameter is required to specify the new preset n u mber.
Command: PSlln
Slider moves
One parameter is required to set the new value for the specified
slider. This ranges from 000 for the slider at the bottom to 255
for the slider at the top. The centre click of the slider occurs at
128. The slider value will rema in as set until the slider is
physically moved, or the Preset is changed.
Commands:
HUnnn - hue R 2nnn - rate two

SAnnn - saturatio n HPmrn - horizontal pan
VAmrn - value VP1l111l - vertical pan
CDnnn - colour depth SHmm - stretch
R l nnn - rate one ZMmm - zoom
Paint method s
Two parameters are required to define the location on the
screen at which the painting should occur. The first parameter
defines horizontal posi tion (left side 000, right side
= 255), =
while the second defines vertical position (top 000, bottom

= =
255). These positions are relative to the current PAN position, so

that panning the image changes the absolute position in the field
store.
Commands:
DTxxxyyy - draw dot CNxx xyyy - set rectangle corner

LNxxxyyy - draw l ine R E x x xyyy - draw recta ngle
CExxxyyy - set circle centre CUxxxyyy - cut
CIxx xyyy - d raw circle P A x x xyyy - paste
CEx xxyyy - set ellipse centre F R x x xyyy - copy from
AXxxxyyy - set ellipse axis TOxxxyyy - copy to
ELxxxyyy - draw ell ipse TTxx x)'yy - print title
FIxxxyyy - fill
1 12 - SOFTWARE UP D AT E I
Data transfer commands

The second type of command i n i tia tes the transfer o f a block o f
data t o o r from the CVI. The parameters define the size and
loca tion o f the d a ta block.
When the command indicates that d a ta is to be sent to the CVI,
the cha racters received immediately after the comma nd are
interpreted a s data. These data load modes are termina ted when
the CVI has received the req uired n u mber o f characters, or when
a n @ cha racter is received. The CVI gi ves a short beep when the
full requested block of data h a s been received o r transmi tted.
In commands where data tra nsfer is requested, each byte of
data is transmitted a s two ASCII hexadecimal characters
(0 .. 9,A .. F). For example, a byte with decima l value 6 1 will be
transmitted as two ASCII characters "3D" ( 3 x I 6+ 1 3), decimal 16 as
ASCII " 1 0", decimal 255 as ASCII "FF", and so on. The data
forma t is the same for loading data to or from the CVI.
When a command requests that data be sent from the CVI,
transmission of that data w i l l begin i m mediately after the C V I
receives the l a s t character of t h e command. If t h e computer
requires time to prepare to receive t h e data from t h e CVI then it
should hold the CTS handshake input to the CVI low until it is
ready to receive. The computer may lose some data if this control
line is not set. See the section on Programming Y o u r Compu ter
for more details.
Save Se qu e n c er
Command: SS
This instructs the CVI to transmit the data of the current

Sequence. The Sequencer data block is 3000 by tes long, resulting
i n 6000 transmitted ASCII characters. If the recorded Sequence is
short, then much of this data will be i rrelevant. The recorded
Sequence always ends with a zero byte (two ASCII "0" characters),
and hence the receiving computer can detect the end o f the
relevant Sequence data and ignore t h e remainder o f t h e block.
However, there is Colour Crawl and PAN initialisation d a ta a t the
end o f the Sequencer data block which, a i though not essen t i a l to
Sequencer opera tion, is often useful. It is therefore left to t h e
u s e r to d e c i d e whether the e n t i r e Sequencer data b l o c k or o n l y the
recorded Sequence section is stored in the externa l computer.
Load Sequencer
Command: L S
T h e CVI w i l l receive characters as Sequencer d a t a . The data

(two ASCII characters per byte) w i l l be wri tten to the Sequencer
data a rea, where they are interpreted as Sequencer instructions.
If un recognisable commands a re received they appear as b l a n k
lines in t h e SEQUENCER EDIT m e n u a n d are ignored. The CVI
have been received or a n @ c h a racter is received, initiating a new

w i l l remain in the Load Sequencer mode u n til 6000 characters
command.
command.
I SOFTWARE UPDATE 13 1 -
Save Preset
Command: SPnn
A two-digit decimal para meter specifies the User-defined Preset

to be t ransmi tted. The 25 bytes of data are tra nsmitted as 50
ASCII characters. The 2 5 bytes conta in a l l the information
associated with the selected Preset: menu selections. slider settings
and push-buttons. This information is in a packed format.
detailed under Preset Data Format at the end of this section.
Load Preset
Command: LPnn
The specified Preset i s loaded with d a ta transmitted from the

external computer. This can be used in conjunction with the Save
Preset function. as i t a llows previously saved Presets to be loaded
to augment the 1 00 User Presets stored in the machine. It will
often be desirable to save and load certai n Presets in conjunction
with a Sequence. 50 characters are ex pected to complete one
Preset. The packed format of the Preset data is given under
PRESET DATA FORMAT at the end of this section.
After a Preset has been loaded i n this fashion it can be selected
using the PS command described above. This will activate the
selections contained in the loaded Preset data.
WA R N I N G ! ! The CVI Presets are used directly b y the

Central Processing Unit. If out-of-range values or data errors
are received the CVI will probably crash when that Preset is
selected. destroying all the Presets. the Sequencer program
and the image. The only remedy is then to turn the CVI off
then o n again. and then to Reset A l l Presets. The CVI does
not check for out-of-range Preset da ta. Verify the reliability
of this function with your computer be/ore you use i t in any
critical appl ications. Also take extreme care i f you modify
P reset d a ta. See PRESET DATA FORMAT.
Save I mage
Command: SI xxx yyy m m 111m
The four parameters specify an absolute recta ngle of pixels in

the field store. These pixels are tra nsmitted from the CVI. using
the format described below.
The para meters range in value from 000 to 255. The first two
parameters set the absolute (i.c. not pan-rela tive) posi tion of the
top left cor n er of the rectangle. x x x is horizontal position. yyy is
vertical position. The third and fourth parameters specify the
number of pixels to be saved i n the horizontal and vertical
directions. respectively.
R S 2 3 2 C P O RT CO NTRO L
N OTE: To save 256 pixels horizontally and/or vertically,

set the third and/or fourth para meter respectively, t o 000.
Some sample commands and the CVI's response:
@SI 1 56 1 27 006 004 : transmit a 6x4 block of pixels from the

field store;
@SI 047 2 1 9 001 0 0 1 : transmit a single pixel a t loca tion (x,y) =
(47,2 1 9);
@SI 002 000 001 000 : transmit the third column of pixels from
the field store;
@SI 000 000 000 0 0 0 : transmit the entire field store.
Pixel Data Format:

. Each pixel is represented by four ASCII characters. If the
entire field store is transmitted (256x256 pixels), this will result in
256K ASCII characters.
The first character will be either "S" or "U", indica t i n g stencil on
or stencil off a t the pixel. This character can be used to maintain
d a t a synchronisation between the CVI a n d the computer. The
second, third and fourth characters represent the value of the
blue, green and red components of the pixel colour. These va lues
range from 0 to 1 5 a n d are represented by hexadecimal characters.
For examp le, the characters "S7 7 7 " represent a pixel with stencil
on a n d a colour of mid-grey, a s bl ue, green a n d red are a l l set to
value 7 on a scale of 0 to 1 5 . S i m i larly, "UOFF" represents a pixel
with stencil off and colour saturated yellow, as blue is zero and
green and red are fully on.
The transmi tted characters can be stored a n d edited a s an
ASCII file o n the computer. The file c a n then be transmitted
back to the CVI using the Load Image command.
Load I mage
Com ma nd: LI xxx yyy n ml 1l1l 1l
The four parameters define a n absolute rectangle i n the field

store, a s for Save Image. Four cha racters arc expected for each
pixel, using the same format as descri bed for Save I m age.
The first character of each group of four is used to ma i n t a i n
da ta synchronisation and to i n d ica te the s t e n c i l s t a t u s . In
addition to "S" (stencil Oil) a n d " U " (stencil ofI), the first cha racter
may also be "Z". "Z" i ndica tes that the pixel should not be wri tten
to the field store or to the stencil plane. This allows irregula rly
shaped ima ges to be loaded t o the CVI. The pixel colour data is
"don't care" after "Z".
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CO N T R O L
Load Title
" ,--. "
Command: LT
The CVI title is loaded with a string of ASCII characters. The

ASCI I characters from SPACE (20) to DELETE (7F) can be
printed (with the exception of "@" and "\"). This covers a l l
numbers, letters and ASCII symbols. O n c e the t i t l e is entered, i t
m a y be printed onto t h e image using the P r i n t Title command, TT,
described under P a i n t Me thods above. Titles may be u p to 600
characters i n length, and there is n o restriction on the length or
number of l i nes.
Changes of letter size and style are entered as the title control
character "\" (ASCII 5C) followed by a selection letter. These are
listed below. The selection letter may be either upper or lower
case. The end of the title i s indicated b y transmi tting "\E" to the
CVI.
Title Control Functi ons:
\1 - Size I (smallest) \N - Normal style

\2 - Size 2 \U - Underline
\3 - Size 3 \8 - Drop shadow right
\4 - Size 4 \T - drop shadow left
\S - Size 5 (largest) \B - background
\E - End title \C - background + drop shadow
Progra mming your computer

In order to use your computer with the CVI you must have a
program running on your computer. The nature of this program
will depend on the results that you wish to achieve. For simple
applications you will need a program of only a few lines. On the
other hand a very large program could be written to perform a
virtually u n l i mited variety of functions with the CVI and its
data. There is a wide range of computers available, and each has
different methods of operation and programming. Consequently i t
i s not possible for us to g i v e detailed instructions of how t o
program all computers to w o r k w i t h t h e CVI. However, w e c a n
g i v e details of the type of program that y o u will n e e d for a
number of appl ications with the CVI. It should then be relatively
easy to translate this into a program on any particular compu ter.
Your Computer Dealer may be able to supply a software package
for your computer to perform some of the tasks described.
Virtually all computers can use the Programming Language
called BASIC. BASIC varies slightly from computer to computer
but the capabilities are generally the same. Most versions of
BASIC will have commands to perform the following func tions:
- wait for a key to be pressed on the compu ter keyboard and
record which key was pressed;
- send an ASCII character or a string of ASCII characters to
the RS232C Port or the Printer Port of the computer;
- read an ASCII character which has been received by the
RS232C Port;
- set the handshake lines of the RS232C Port;
- write an ASCII character i n to a file stored in the computer.
1 16 - SOFTWARE UPDATE 1
W i t h t h e se f u n c t i o n s t h e r e s h o u l d b e f e w p r o b l e m s w i t h
transla ting the examples given below into a w o r k i n g computer
program. C o n s u l t t h e Ma n u a l s f o r y o u r c o m p u t e r f o r t h e
a p p r o p r i a t e B A S I C c o m m a n d s.
N OT E : The following examples assume that you have

c o n n e c t e d a n a pp r o p r i a t e c a b l e b e t w e e n t h e C V I a n d y o u
c o m p u t e r (See u n d e r Ma k i n g a C o n n e c t i n g C a b l e ) , a n d t h a t
y o u h a v e s e t t h e p a r a m e t e r s o n t h e C V I 's R S 2 3 2 P o r t C o n t r o l
Men u t o m a t c h y o u r c o m p u t e r.
Exa m p l e 1
T h i s is t h e s i m p l e s t a p p l i c a t i o n . T h is short progra m simply
s e n d s a l l k e y p r esses o n t h e c o m p u t e r k e y b o a r d to t h e C V I v i a t h e
RS232C Port. This w i l l a l low y o u to u s e a l l the Control Console
a n d P a i n t c o m m a n d s , a n d a l so L o a d T i t l e a n d o t h e r d a t a l o a d
comm a n ds. You will know that this system is work ing when the
C V I g i v es a b e e p e a c h t i m e t h a t y o u p r e s s t h e " @" k e y o n y o u r
compu ter.
STA RT
l----
\It'
Read a c h a racter
f r o m k e y board
1
Wri t e t h e c h a ra c t e r
10 the RS232 port
I
Exa m p l e 2
I f y o u r c o m p u t e r h a s w o r d p r o c e s s i n g s o f t w a r e t h e n i t is a n
e a s y t a s k to crea te a file of A S C I I CVI commands a n d d a t a . This
f i l e c a n then be transmitted to the C V I u s i n g t h e P R I N T
comma nd of your word processor. T h e f i l e s h o u l d c o n t a i n t h e "@"
c o m m a n d s f o l l o w e d by a n y d a t a r e q u i re d . This method has the
a d v a n t a ge t h a t l a r ge b l o c k s o f d a t a , s u c h a s t i t l e s o r i m a g e s , c a n
be s a v e d i n the f i l e a n d transmi tted to the CVI whenever
req u i red.
Below is a sample of a file which tra nsmits a new t i tle to the
C V I t h e n p r i n ts i t o n t h e C V I s c r e e n i n P r e s e t 00. See the
c o m m a n d d e s c r i p t i o n s u n d e r Co m m a n d a n d D a t a F o r m a ts. The
f i l e w o u l d a p pea r o n t h e w o r d p r o c e s s i n g s c r e e n as:
@LT
S a m p l e of a long t i t l e s t o r e d
in a file.\E
@P S O O
@TT 0 2 0 1 3 5
1 S O F T WA R E U P D AT E 17 1 -
Example 3
This program sends a comma n d string to the CVI a n d receives
the data w h ich the CVI sends in response. This received data is
stored in an ASCII file in the computer, al though i t could be
printed on the screen or processed in some other fashion. No
hands h aking is used except to ensure that the RTS line is high. If
your computer is not able to keep u p with the transmission rate of
the CVI (Le. d a ta gets lost) try a slower baud rate or use the
program given in Example 4 to implement handshaking.
STA RT
Set RTS h i g h
Prepare f i l e s t o r a g e
Calculate number of
expected charact ers
nchars
Send c o m m a n d to C V I
eg n@SI 0 0 1 0 0 3 1 2 1 1 9 7
NO
Store received
c haracter i n file.
Add 1 to character
cou n t
NO
EN D
Exa mple 4
This progra m sends a c o m m a n d s t r i n g t o the CVI a n d recei ves
t h e d a t a w h i c h t h e C V I s e n d s i n r e s p o n se. The program sets the
RTS ( o r DTR) o u t p u t o f y o u r c o m p u t e r l o w w h i l e i t i s p rocessi n g
the received data. T h i s l i n e s h o u l d b e c o n n ec t e d t o t h e CTS i n p u t
o f t h e C V I t o s t o p t h e C V I f r o m t r a n s m i t t i n g d u r i n g t h ese t i mes.
The B A S I C l a n g u a g e can s o m e t i m e s be a l i t t l e slow in s w i t c h i n g
t h e h a n d s h a k e o u t p u t s o f y o u r c o m p u t e r , a n d i t m a y b e n ecessa r y
t o u s e a s l o w e r b a u d r a t e o r a f a s t e r P ro g r a m m i n g L a n g u a g e i f
y o u s e e m t o be m i ss i n g b i ts o f d a t a . O n c e a g a i n , t h e re m a y b e
so f t w a r e a v a i l a b l e f o r y o u r c o m p u t e r t o o v e r c o m e t h e s e p r o b l ems.
Con s u l t y o u r C o m p u t e r D e a l e r .
Ca l c u l a t e n u m lJ e r o f
c h a r a c t e r s ex p e c t e d
f r o m C V I : " n c h a rs"
NO
NO
R S 2 3 2 C PORT CO N TRO L
Preset data format

The CVI configuration for each Preset is stored as 2 5 8-bit
bytes. Using the Load/Save Preset comma nds, this data is
tra nsmitted as 50 ASCII cha racters.
The packed data format of these 25 bytes is given below. The
ma xim u m va lues, given in decimal, must not be exceeded as they
will cause a Processor Crash in the CVI.
Bytes 1 - 1 0:
Values for ten sliders. Byte I = HUE, Byte 1 0 = ZOOM.
Value range 0 to 2 5 5 .
Byte 1 1 :
Status of 8 switches. 1 = on, 0 =off. From most-significa n t
b i t t o least significa nt b i t : FREEZE, PRESET, MENU, STOP,
DRAW, DRAW LOCK, INVERT STENCIL, USE STENCIL.
Byte 1 2:
Sta tus of 8 switches. 1 = on, 0 off. From most-significa n t
=
b i t t o least significa nt bit: TITLE, PICK COLOUR, WIPE

STENCIL, WIPE COLOUR, USE TEXTURE, DRAW STENCIL,
DRA W COLOUR, COLOURIZE.
Byte 1 3 :
Most significant nybble (4 bi ts): P a i n t Type selection. Max
value 5 .
Least significant nybble: Colour Type selection. Ma x value 8 .
B y t e 1 4:
Brush Shape selection. Max value 5 3 . Value = 2 5 5 selects user
defi nable brush
Byte 1 5:
Textures selection. Max value 5 3 . Value = 2 5 5 selects user
definable textu re.
Byte 1 6:
Most significant nybble: Stencil Wipes selection. Ma x value 8.
Least significant nybble: Colour Wipes selection. Ma x value 7.
Byte 1 7:
Most significant nybble: Paint Method selection. Max value 9.
Least significant nybble: Symmetry selection. Ma x value 8.
Byte 1 8 :
Most significa n t nybble: Stencil Source selection. Max value 3.
Least significa n t nybble: Colourize Type selection. Max value 7.
B y te 1 9 :
F i v e least significant bits: D i s p l a y Control selection. Max
value 1 9.
Bit 7 (MSB): Stencil Draw/Erase fl a g.
Bit 6: Dejag enable flag.
120 - SOFTWARE UPDATE I

RS232C PORT C O N T R O L
B y t e 20:
Screen Control selection. Each b i t independently settable. Bit 7
(MSB) is Slide. Max value 2 5 5.
Byte 2 1 :
Mos t significant nybble: Freeze Control selection. Max value 5 .
Least significant n ybble: Colour ize Control selection. Max
v a l u e 3.
Byte 22:
Mos t significa nt nybble: Colour Control selection. Ma x value 3.
Bi t 2: Show Stencil flag.
Bit 1: Draw O ver/Under flag.
B i t 0: Beeper Off/On f l a g.
Byte 23:
Least significant nybble: Setup selection. Ma x value 4.
Bi t 7: Analog Path select.
Bit 6: Digital Path select.
Bit 5: Chroma key type select.
B i t 4: Extended Blanking select.
B y tes 24 & 25:

Un used.
CV I RS232C S P EC I F I CAT I O N S
B a u d rate menu-selec t a b le: 300, 600, 1 200, 4800, 9600, [ 1 9200]
Parity menu-selectable: none, odd, even, space
Stop b i ts menu-selectable: one, t wo
Wo rd l e n g t h 7 bits (Rev 5 Software)

8 bits (Rev 6 Software)
Signal levels +/- 1 2 volts, RS232C
Handshake l i nes: R TS a n d CTS.
N OTE:
i ) The DSR input should b e tied permanently h i g h (+ 1 2V).
ii) The CTS input i n hibits transmission from the CVI when
held low or if not connected.
iii) The CVI sets its RTS o u t p u t low while execut i n g
CONTROL CONSOLE type commands. Comma nd s issued
while RTS is low will not be received. Note also that the
CVI will i gnore CONTROL CONSOLE comma nds i f the
SEQUENCER is i n a Play mode.
I SOFTWARE UPDATE - 21 I
RS232C PORT CONTR O L
The ASC I I Character Set
0 I 2 3 4 5 6 7
NULL O L E �
0 ,
� @ p "
p
SOH DC I
-
I A •
I
I I A Q a q
S TX DC 2
2 2 B R b
II
•
r
•
E T X DC 3
3 t
� 3 C S c S
EOT D C 4
I
4 # 4 0 T d t
• T
E N Q NAK
5 • '"
it. 5 E U e u
ACK SY N f
6 f v
� 6 F V v
BEU ETB
7 7 G W 0
I
w
, ."
BS CAN
8 ( 8 H X h x
M IC
TA B E M I
9 z 'I ) 9 I Y y
LF SUB ,
A * • J Z j Z
J •
VT ESC k
K
•
8 k t
+ , [ {
FF FS I
C L \
, < L " I
CR GS -
0 M ]
- -
M ] m
}
SO RS A
E ., " > N n "'"
SI US
•
F 0 - / ?
•
0 - 0 •
CV I - EXTERNAL G RA P H I CS PA D
Revision 6 Softwa re
I ntrod uction
The CVI External Gra phics Pad al lows very smooth, simple
and accurate control of painting functions and effects, as well
as easy selection from the menus. In certa in applications the
CVI can be operated from the External Pad with no need to use
the Control Pa nel. The Control Pa nel and its pad are always
available for use in conju nction with, or i n place of, the
External Graphics Pad.
The External Pad can be supplied with eith er a single-bu tton
stylus or a 4-button c u rsor. The stylus gives a more natura l
pen-like action f o r drawing, a n d is good f o r tracing pictures o n
t h e pad. T h e 4-button cursor a l lows extra functions such a s
·preset changes a n d t h e STOP button t o be accessed f r o m the
pad without having to use the Control Panel.
To operate the External Graphics Pad, the CVI must be
equipped with a CVI Memory Module and must have Revision
6 Software installed. Revision 6 software offers the same
features as Revision 5, with the addition of the External
Gra phics Pad capability.
I nstallation
I f your CVI has already been equipped with R6 Software
and a Memory Module, ignore Steps 2 and 3 of the following.
I ) Turn off the CVI power.

2) Install the "R6" CVI l and CVI2 ROMs into the CVI.
3) Connect the CVI Memory Module a t the rea r of the unit.
Remove the two screws from the bottom-centre a n d the
bottom-right of the rear panel, put the Memory Mod u l e i n
place, and replace t h e two screws to h o l d i t securely. P l u g
the ribbon cable of the Menory module into t h e "Expansion
Bus" connector.
4) Plug the External Pad stylus or cursor into the 1 2-pin socket
at the rear of the pad.
5) Plug the RS232 cable into either of the I O-pin sockets a t the
rear of the pad. Ensure that it is the right way up.
6) Plug the other end of the RS232 cable into the RS232C Port
at the rear of the CVI.
7 ) Turn on the CVI power.
N OTE: The CVI will not operate under R6 Software if the

Memory Module is not connected.
An external host computer or a keyboard can be connected to

the CVI i n series with the Graphics Pad b y using an Adaptor
Cable a n d the second t o-pin con nector at the rear o f the pad.
Refer to Connecting a Computer o r Keyboard with t h e Graphics
Pad at the end of this section.
I S OFTWARE UPDATE 23 1 -
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CO N T RO L
U s ing t h e External G raphics Pad
N OT E : T h e following instructions describe a p a d equipped

with a single-button stylus. The 4-button cursor operates
ide n tically, except that the red or blue buttons (top left or
top right) perform the fu nction o f the tip button o n the
stylus. That is, pressing on the pad with the stylus
corresponds to pressi ng the red or blue bu tton on the cursor.
For details on the other functions of the cu rsor but tons, see
the section below.
To Draw
As an example, use preset 0 1 . Whe n the tip of the stylus is
moved lightly over the graphics pad, a cu rsor will appear o n the
screen, following the stylus movements. This allows the posi tion
for a drawing to be esta blished. When the correct position i s
f o u n d , p u s h o n t o the p a d w i t h the stylus. T h i s presses the button
on the tip of the stylus, and drawing will begin. Wh en preesure is
released, the screen cursor will re-appear.
If you wish to make the cursor disappear, simply move the
stylus to the edge of the Graphics Pad. Note that the DRAW and
DRAW-LOCK buttons on the Control Pa nel are no longer needed.
Try P reset 04, using Draw instead of Dots.
If you want to use the touch-pad on the Control Panel instead
of the External Pad, simply move the stylus to the edge the
External Pad and the Control Pa nel's pad will function as usual.
Select Preset 1 8. The "reet.=>" cursor appears on the screen.
Press the stylus button once to establish the position of the first
corner. Move the stylus lightly to get the required recta ngle
shape, and press again to draw it. This press-to-select operation
works i n the same way for rubber-bands, rays, circles, ellipses,
cut-and-paste, fill, copy, title and pick colour.
To U se the M enus
T o access t h e men us, move t h e stylus t o the top right o f t h e pad
and press. The menus will a ppear. If you press again you will
return to the picture. Go to the menus again and move the stylus
back to the screen area a t the bottom of the pad. Selections can
then be made by moving the menu cu rsor a round on the screen
and pressing the stylus button.
If you move to the top left of the pad and press, you will be
taken to the Controls View Menu. Here you can press buttons a n d
move sliders without h a v i n g t o t o u c h the Control Panel.
N o t e t h a t t h e r e is a c h a n g e f r o m earlier S o f t w a r e R e v i s i o n s in
the opera tion o f the Wipe Colour and Wipe Stencil button displays
o n the Controls View Menu. When the small light is on in the
bu tton display, it i ndica tes that the corresponding Colour or
Stencil Wipe will occur when next you return from the menus.
When the Colour or Stencil Wipe bu tton is displayed as a thick
box, it indicates that the current Preset will perform a Colour or
Stencil Wi pe when i t is s e l e c t e d .
RS232C PO RT CONTROL
You can change the status o f the Wipe bu ttons o n this menu by
movi n g the menu cursor there and pressing. It will ta k e four of
these p resses to cycle through the four possibili ties of " l i g h t o n "
a n d "thick box".
For exa mple, i f you wish to start a Colour Wipe without using
the Control Panel, go to the Controls View Men u (top left of the
pad), press the display of the Wipe Colour b u tton until the small
light a ppears, and then return to y o u r i m a ge. The Colour Wipe
will take place immediately.
Here is the procedure to create a Preset which will perform a
Colour or Stencil Wi pe w h e n t h a t Preset is selecte d . Go to the
Controls View Menu, press the req u i red Wipe button u n t i l it has a
thick box, a n d then use either the PRESET/FREEZE combi nation,
or the Set selection on the Presets Control Men u to save your
selection to t h e current Preset. See the Presets Control Me n u
section of the manual f o r m o r e i n formation.
'One other sma ll c h a n ge from Revision 5 Software is found on
the Sequencer Menu. The menu operates exactly as . in Revision 5 ,
except that when y o u select the P l a y , R e p e a t or Step box a n d
return to your image, the External Pad will not dra w onto the
screen until the stylus has first been moved out of the screen area
on the Pad. This stops u n i n tentional drawing intera ctions while
the Sequencer is playing. I f y o u wish to draw while t h e
Sequencer pla ys, simply s e l e c t P l a y f r o m the m e n u a n d m o v e t h e
s t y l u s off the pad then back o n again to draw as u s u a l .
Extra F unctions of the 4-button Cursor

When using t h e 4-button cu rsor i t i s important t o remember that
only one button should be de pressed a t a n y time. Press i n g more
than o n e button will lead to u n e x pected resul ts.
The green (middle) and w h i te (bottom) bu ttons of the cursor
correspond exactly to the STOP and PRESET buttons o n the
Control Panel. Pressing the green bu tton is the same a s pressing
STOP; pressing the w h i te button is the same as pressing the
PRESET bu tton.
The red and blue buttons a re used for drawing a n d selection
functions as described above. I n addition, these two bu ttons take
on a d i fferen t function only after t h e w h i te (or PRESET) bu tton
is pressed. After the PRESET button, a short press of the red
(left) button will decrement t h e current Preset Number by one,
wh i l e the blue (right) button will i n crement the Preset Nu mber by
one.
When the menus a re displayed, holding down the red or blue
button (after the white PRESET button) will f i rst cha nge the
current Preset Number by one, then, after about o n e second, will
rapidly decrement or increment t h e Preset N umber. This allows
you to access quickly any o f t h e 1 00 Presets. Note that the rapid
Preset change function o n l y operates when the menus are
displayed.
RS 2 3 2 C PORT CO NTRO L
Connecting a Computer or K eyboard with the

G ra phics Pad
An externa l host computer o r a key boa r d ca n be connected to
the CYI in series with the Gra p h ics Pad b y using an Ada ptor
Cable and the second I O-pin con nector a t the rea r o f the pad. The
adaptor cable extends most o f the pins of the RS232C Port
connector at the rea r of the C Y I beyond the pad. The RS232C
ca pabilities of the CYI can then be used a l most as i f the Gra phics
Pad were not there. This a l so mea n s that the sa me key boa rd or
computer cable can be used rega rd less of whether it is plu gged
into the Adap�or Ca blc or direct l y i n to the CYI.
��
: D
To k b o a r d
or co m p u l o r
To C V I
The p i n s availa ble a t the Ada ptor Ca ble depend upon which
cable is con nected betwcen the Gra phics Pad a nd thc CYI. Two
such cables are available. The sta ndard cable al lows for a
Keyboard Piggyback, a nd bri ngs the power supply li ncs to the
Adaptor Cablc. The optional cable a l lows for a full computer
interface, b r i n g i n g the handsha ke and transmit data li nes to the
Adaptor Cable. Thc exact pin arra ngements a re given below.
Both cablcs use the same Adaptor Cable.
A d a p t o r C a b l e P i ll o u t s
Wi t h S t a n d a r d C a b l e Wi t h O p t i o n a l C a b l e
Pin
(keyboard) (Co m p u t e r )
2 & 15 - 1 2V TXD
3 RXD RXD
4 & 25 +5Y RTS
5 - .. - -
CT S
7 GND GND
18 + 1 2V + 1 2V
1 26 -
SOFTWA R E U P D A T E 1
There are only three l i m i t a tions to this system. Firstly, the data
r a te is restricted to 9600 baud only.
Secondly, a l l data sent to the CVI from the computer or
keyboard must have the most significant b i t set to zero. This is
not a problem, given that a l l communication from the keyboard or
computer is i n ASCII codes.
The final restriction concerns computer data. Data sent from a
host computer or keyboard connected v i a the Gra phics Pad is first
rece ived by the pad, then retra nsmitted i n terleaved with the pad
co-ord inate data. This is no problem when there are long spaces
between the bytes (such a s with a keyboard), b u t there c a n be loss
of computer data when there is a contin uous data strea m. The
solution to this is to disable the Graphics Pad data prior to
sending a block of d a ta from t h e compu ter. The p a d can be re
enabled after the data has been sent. This is done simply by
transmitting two 3-byte comm a n d s to the Graphics Pad. These
commands are:
(Co n t rolA)RM - Disable Graph ics Pad
(Co n troI A)RS - Enable Gra phics Pad
where (ControlA) is the ASCII character 0 1 , generated by holding

down the CONTROL key o n the keyboard and pressi n g A. The
(ControlA) character signals the Gra phics Pad to take the
following characters as a comma nd, rather tha n simply passing
them o n to the CVI as usual. The use of the (Control A) chara cter
should therefore be avoided, except as described here. The
(Co n troIA)RS command can a l w a ys be used to reset the Graphics
Pad to normal if another (Control A ) command is i n adverta n t l y
issued.
During the loading ti me, the pad is disa bled and the c u rsor will
disappear from the screen. The pad o n the CONTROL CONSOLE
will be active.
For example, the followi n g text sent from a comp uter will
disable the pad, load a title, and then re-enable the pad.
(ControlA)RM
@LT
Loading a title to
the CVI. THE END.
\E
(Con trolA)RS
I SOFTWARE UPDATE - 27 I
R S 2 3 2 C PO RT CO NTROL
Layout of External Gra phics Pad 4-B utton Cursor F u nctions
WHITE Preset
GREEN S top
RED Last / Previous
BLUE Next
Draw
1 28 - SO FTWA R E UPDATE I
CONTENTS
This section describes t h e n e w software fea tures which are

contained i n the Revision 7 software u pdate for the CVI. Only
the cha nges from the Revision 5 software are detailed. All other
functions operate as described previously in the Revision 5 User
Manual.
Revision 7 software is used i n conjunction with a Revision 7

Memory Expansion Module. This module contains the memory for
a l l the user-defined Presets, Sequen ces, Font, Brushes a n d
Textu res. T h i s memory i s retained on power-down, and s o
Me mory Modules ( a n d hence the user-defined d a t a ) may b e
tra nsferred between machines equipped with Revision 7 software.
Always be certa in to turn off the CVI before disconnecting or
reconnecting Memory Mod ules.
The operational fea tures which have been added or upgraded in

Revision 7 software are:
Me nu Selec tion ..................................................................................... 2

Titles Menu Update ............................................................................. 3
Title Edit Menu .................................................................................... 5
Font Edit Menu ..................................................................................... 9
Character Edi t Menu ........................................................................... 1 2
Brush Shape and Textures Me n u ....................................................... 1 4
Brush Edit Menu ................................................................................... 1 6
Grade Colour Wipes .............................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
F i l l Paint Me thod ........................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Presets Control Menu .......................................................................... , 1 9
Seque ncer ........................................ ....................................................... 21
Sequencer O ptions Menu ..................................................................... 23
Sequencer Edit Menu ........................................................................... 25
Hard ware Options ................................................................................ 26
Save and Recall Menu Update ........................................................... 28
Setup Menu ........................................................................................... 30
RS232 Port Control Menu Update ...........•••.•..................•. . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • ' 31
REV. 7 SOFTWARE UPDATE - 1

M E N U S E L E CTI O N T E C H N I Q U E
The lists of options in menus such as the Paint Me thod Men u

a r e n o w selected i n a n e w w a y . T h e nu mbers which used t o
precede each e n t r y h a v e been removed. I t is n o w necessary o n l y
to move t h e cursor o n t o t h e required word to select i t . The whole
word will be highligh ted.
__
[_P_A_'_N_T M E_T_"
_ O_D____OCI3}E
Draw
Dots
Rubber band
[H I .i m
Ellipse
Rectangle
Rays
[ D E .J A G )
C u t &. P a s t e
Fill
Copy
IPAINT �
.UIDEO �
I t is still possible to select entries using the number keys on the

Con trol Panel as before. I t is also possible to make menu
selections from the optional QWERTY keyboard as described l a ter
in this u pdate.
2 - REV. 7 SOFTWARE UPDATE

T I T L ES M E N U U P DAT E
r
[�T�I�T�L�E S
�______________ �
Roma ... o n t Hasserati
..t.. TITLE LIBRARY ]

01 Sample title library ent
02 A n o t h e r s a m p l e
03 a t h i r d s a m p l e
O il-
05
..,. Select TSearch ISave J
[Title ] [ Fo n t E d i t] [ R O L L ]
PA'NT _
- - -
Ed i t
I VIDEO 0 1 2 3 iI- 5 6 7 8 9
The TITLES menu allows access to the Title Libra ry, a s well a s
two o ther menus, f o r title a n d font editing.
Located u nder the menu header is the Current Title. I t is this

t i tle that will appear on the field store when the TITLE button is
used from the control panel. As well, the Current Title is loaded
with the RS-23 2 Load Title (@LT) command. To e d it the Current
Title, use the TITLE EDIT b u t to n on this menu (cf. TITLE EDIT
menu).
Below the Current Title we find the Title Library. Up to 99 titles

may be stored in the library. Five t i tles from the library are
d isplayed a t one time, preceded by their library nu mber. Several
buttons control libraRy access, as follows:
U P TRIANGLE moves the library display back to the five

previous titles in the library.
D O WN TRIANGLE similarly moves forward to the next five

ti tIes.
SELECT copies a library entry into the Current Title . For

exa mple, select library entry 2 by hitting the box containing 02
followed by SELECT. The Current Title will now be the second
l i brary entry.
SEARCH gi ves you d irect access to a n y of the 99 titles i n the

l ibrary. To find library entry 8 5 , select a n y t i tle number by
hitting a numbered box, e.g. 02. Now, as in selecting a preset, hi t
b u t t o n 8 on the con trol panel, followed by 5. The selected n u mber
box now reads 85. Now hit SEARCH. The display shows the
t i t l e s around nu mber 85 in the l i brary.
REV. 7 SOFTWARE U P D AT E - 3
TITLES M E N U U P DATE
SA V E copies the Current Title into the li brary. Select the

n u mber box and then hit SAVE. The previous contents of the
l i bra r y entry are lost.
The entire l i brary may be saved and restored with RS-232

commands, or with the Save & Recall f u ncti on. Refer to relevant
sections of the manual for more i n forma tion.
TITLE EDIT takes you to a menu used to edit the Current Title.
FONT EDIT bri ngs up a menu to view and edit the User
Defined Font.
Scroll i n g Ti tles and S u btitl ing: the ROLL b u t ton
The TITLE button on the con trol panel opera tes q u ite
differently i f ROLL is selected from the TITLES menu. Rather
than posi tioning and displaying the Current Title onto the field
store, a sequence of titles from the Title Li brary is d isplayed, one
by one.
With ROLL selected, hitting TITLE brings u p the first title from
the library at the bottom of the display. The title then rolls u p to
the top of the display, at a rate determined by the RATE 2 slid er.
The ti tle is then erased. The next ti tle from the library is
similarly scrolled u p across the display; the p rocess con tinues until
a null title or the end of the library is reached.
If the RATE 2 slider is at the zero position (all the way DOWN),
of cou rse no scroll will result. The ti tle will sit a t the bottom of
the screen, as a subtitle. In this case, o n e ma y hit the DRAW
button to proceed to the next ti tle.

TITLE EDIT M ENU
r
[��_I_T_L_E E_D__
__ IT ______________ �
Roma font
Masser-ati
,...
... ...
-till ....
00-
1 2 3
.q. 5 6
7 3 9
[ 0 ]
The TITLE EDIT menu allows editing of the Current Title. U p

to a screenful of text, in eight different fonts, five sizes a n d four
character attributes may be created.
Select characters from the on-screen keyboard by moving the

cursor over the desired character and lifting the stylus. The
character will appear in the title edit area at the top of the
keyboard IS connected, characters may be typed in directly (and

display, u n der the flashing cursor. If the optional ASCII
more easily).
As the text edit display area near the top of the menu fills up
with text, the display automatically scrolls down to make more
space available. I f the title increases to an entire screenful of
text, you will notice the scrolling area "wrap around" to the top of
the title; this is what would happen if such a long title were
written to the field store and/or stencil.
Text will appear in lower case unless SHIFT or LOCK (ALPHA

LOCK o n the keyboard) are selected prior to character choice.
These and other control keys are summarized below. The control
button as found o n the screen is listed; if the equivalent keyboard
method differs, it is listed i n [brackets].
LOCK [ALPHA LOCK] produces upper case characters until it is

turned off [or toggled once more].
SHIFT produces a n upper case character only for the next

character selected. [SHIFT on the keyboard must be held down
while simultaneously hitting a cha racter key. As well, many non
alpha betic characters are produced this way; i.e. SHIFT 6
produces " & " (ampersand).)
The SPACE BAR inserts a space in the text.
DEL deletes the last character en tered.
RET [RETURN) moves the flashing text cursor to the start of

the next li ne. The height of the current font determines the
vertical distance moved to start the new line.
CLR [F1 4] erases the entire title so you may start afresh. CLR
must be selected twice: the first time it illumina tes the CLR box,
the second time actually clears the title. This is to preven t
accidental erasure.
Above the digits ( 1 through 9) reside four cursor positioning

keys. UP TRIANGLE moves the flashing cursor u p on e line.
Similarly, DOWN TRIANGLE moves down a line, LEFT
TRIANGLE one character left and RIGHT TRIANGLE one
character right. Positioning the flashing cursor a t any poin t in
the edi ted title allows you to insert more characters at the cursor
poi n t by typing them in, or to delete characters before the cursor
using the DEL key.
To the left of the cursor movement keys are the overstrike keys,
acute accent, grave accent and circumflex [F5-F7), and tilde,
umlaut and degree [SHIFT F5-F7). The overstrikes are centred
and placed above the last character entered into the title.
Left of the accents are four foreign language characters. Used

like any other alphabetic keys, they are available in lower and
upper case. [FI -F4, SHIFT FI -F4)
The bottom row controls character style and size:
Font is selected from the row of A's on the left. The fonts are
respec tively numbered from one to eight from left to right. Each
letter A is indicative of the style of the fon t chosen (cf. FONT
EDIT menu for a list of fonts and font sizes). The currently
selected font is illuminated. The U here refers to the User
Defined Font (font 8). [keyboard: F9 1 for font I , etc.)
Character size is selected from the next group of buttons

containing size box es. They range from S i z e I (sma llest) leftmost
in the group, to Size 5 (la rgest). [ F l O I through F l O 5)

TITLE EDIT M E N U
The last four boxes select character a t tribu tes, which toggle on
and off. They remain in effect u n til de-selected:
Underline [ F l l ] does just that.
Surround [F 1 2] produces a background in the complement of the

colour of the title; e.g. a green title will have purple background.
Drop Shadow Right [F13 2] places a black shadow below a n d to

the right of the character.
Drop Shadow Left [F13 3] places a black shadow below and to

the left of the character. Only one of the drop shadows may be
used a t any one time. [ F 1 3 1 to de-select drop shadow.]
The KERN keys are situated on the extreme sides of the SPACE '
BAR. Kerning refers to pixel-by-pixel movement of a character.
For example, "A W" produced by the sixth font (Roma Font)
contains an excess of white space between the "A" and "W", due t o
the slopes of these letters. By posi tioning the flashing cursor over
the "W" o n the screen, you may kern the "W" left a few pixels with
repeated use of KERN LEFT (the LEFT ARROW beside LOCK).
With Size 1 selected, kerning is done in amounts o f one pixel; Size
2 results in a two-pixel shift, and so forth. [Kern Left: FS; Kern
Righ t : SHIFT FS]
Several European punctuation symbols are accessible via both

the on-screen and a ttached keyboard:
SHIFT ? [Control ?] produces an inverted "?"

SHIFT ! [Control !] produces an inverted " ! "
SHIFT < [Control <] prod uces an open eu ro-Quote, "« "
SHIFT > [Control >] produces a close Quote, " » " .
[When i n menu mode, keyboard users may a l ways jump directly

to the TITLE EDIT menu with the FIS key.]
All titles can appear with paint crawl by selecting Crawl, Trail
Crawl or Crawl/Analog in DISPLAY CONTROL menu before
producing the ti tle.
Procedure for ti tling: (ROLL in TITLES menu is OFF)
a) Create the title using the TITLE EDIT menu.

b) Return to the screen image by pressing the STOP button.
c) Press the TITLE button.
d) Press the stylus on the GRAPHIC PAD. A title cursor w i l l
a p p e a r o n t h e screen, with the s i z e of t he t i t l e ind ica t e d by the
ex tent of the cursor. Move the title cursor to the design position.
H.S.V. sliders may be adjusted at this stage. The c u rsor will show
selected colour.
e) Lift the stylus from the GRAPHIC PAD. The title will appear
on the image.

TITLE EDIT M E N U
I ) The title function a u tomatically t u rns on the DRAW COLOUR

Notes
button. The DRAW STENCIL button controls whether the title is

written to the stencil plane.
2) If the field store is not being d isplayed as the title is w r i tten to

the field store, the title will not be seen. This can happen for
various d isplay selections (see DISPLAY CONTROL menu). Titles
can be displayed over live video (analog or digital) by writing the
title to the stencil plane as well as the field store and making an
appropriate selection i n the DISPLAY CONTROL menu. See the
PRESETS section for more information.
Here is how the title shown with the TITLE EDIT menu on Page
5 was created:
CLR (twice to clear)

Select Font 6 for Roma Font
Select Underline
"Roma font"
De-select Underline
RET (to start new line)

Select Drop Shadow Right
Select Font 7
Select Size 2
"Masserati"
Keyboard Function Keys :

Key (unshifted) SHIFTed Key
FI LC (lower case) beta UC (upper case) Beta

F2 LC c-cedilla UC C-Cedilla
F3 LC � UC ¢
tilde ( )
F4 LC oe ligature UC .A:: ligature
F5 acute accent -
circumflex (A)
F6 grave accent umlaut
F7 degree
F8 KERN Left KERN Right
F9 n select Font 'n' ( 1 to 8) none
FlO n select Size 'n' ( 1 to 5) none
FI I toggle Underline none
F13 I
Fl2 toggle Surround (Background) none
Drop Shadow OFF none
F13 2 Right Drop Shadow none
F13 3 Left Drop Shadow none
Fl4 Clear Title none
Fl5 Go to TITLE EDIT men u none
DATE
FONT E D IT M E N U
I: F O H T E D I T · 1 .... ....
Select Copy
� S a .... e Clear
tA l A l tl .fI. p. lAI R I U J ( F o n t .... i e w)

[Y) - ] + * / < > .� c
�
= '
[! ("ftt $ Z &. ' ( ) .8 IE ""v �
I I O. I W I E I R I T ly I U H 10 p 1 2 3
••
[ I A I S I D I F IGIH IJ I K I L 1; 1 iI- 5 6
©I Z .l X C .... B H M .. . .l : .l
[----"' 7 8 9
r ·I L O C K [S H I Fn [ 0 ]
�
-
PAIHT
. 'J I D E O 0 1 2 3 i1- 5 6 7 8 9
The TITLES menu contaips a button labelled FONT EDIT.

This button tra nsfers control t o the FONT EDIT menu, allowing
access to the seven fonts supplied with the CVI, as well a s a User
Defined Font. The seven supplied fonts and user font are
summarized as follows:
Font RS232 KeyBoard Height

Name code code (pixels)
System y 1 11
Piccolo F 2 7
Pisa G 3 11
Milano H 4 12
Olivetti I 5 13
Roma J 6 20
Masserati K 7 21
User D 8 24 (max)
The small box in the upper left hand a rea contains the currently
we'll call it csc. csc is displayed exactly as it
selected character;
would appear in a title.
The keyboard should look familiar. I t is nearly identical to the

keyboard on the TITLE EDIT menu. Font characters to be
selected for edit are found on this keyboard. Keep in mind the
few "hidden" characters present:
inverted ? is SHIFT ?
inverted ! is SHIFT !
« (euro-quote) is SHIFT <
» (unquote) is SHIFT >
A font is selected from one of the eight font keys under the
box d isplaying csc.
box displaying csc.

FONT E D IT M E N U
CLEAR sets all the characters in the user font to an "undefined"

value. This button must be hit twice, to confirm the destruction
of the existing user font. An undefined character value a p pears
as ".... " in titles. This is NOT the same as a SPACE, which displays
what its name implies: just space, void, nothing. An und efined
character ma y be "ed ited into existen ce" or copied from an
another character.
SELECT copies a character from the current font to esc, using a

keyboard key to specify the character; i.e. to select an upper-case
L from the Roma font,
( 1 ) Hit the sixth font button, the Roma font

(2) Ensure SELECT is highl ighted (it usua lly is)
(3) Hit SHIFT on the keyboard (SHIFT for UPPERCASE)
(4) Hit L on the keyboard
at which stage, "L" should appear in the esc-box.
SAVE places esc (as displa yed in its little box) into the user
font. esc is stored in the next button hit on the keyboard; i.e.,
continuing the above example:
(5) Hit SAVE, so that it is highl ighted

(6) Hit SHIFT on the keyboard
(7) Hit L on the keyboard
Now, the "L" from the system font is stored as the "L" in the user
font. The process could be continued with, say, the "k" from the
Piccolo font, etc.
COPY performs the above procedure for an entire font; i.e. it

makes a copy of an existing font in the user font. For example,
to copy the Roma font into the user font:
( 1 ) Hit the sixth font button, to select Roma font

(2) Hit COpy twice (like CLEAR, a double hit is required)

FONT E D IT M E N U
FONT VIEW offers an entire font a t a glance. Select a font,

then hit FONT VIEW. A portion o f the font will a ppear o n a new
page. The DOWN TRIANGLE on this page moves forward
through the font. Return to the FONT EDIT menu with the
LEFT TRIANGLE button to the right of the menu title.
._
[�F_O
_ N_T V_I_
E_W
__ ___________ �
I
$ (
"
.
# % & '
) * + ,
-
. / 0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .
.
< > ?
© A B C
. -
-
, .
D E F G H I J K [!)
I
PA'NT �
.V I D E O �
The currently selected character, esc, may be edited by hitting

inside its display box i n the upper left h a n d corner. This brings
you to the CHARACTER EDIT menu.
REV. 7 SO FTWARE UPDATE - 11

C H A RACT E R E D I T M E N U
[C H A R A C T E R E D I T �
(1J � fm
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• �IIII-
•• •
Dots •• •
•• •
Lines •• •
•• •
E ra s e •• •
•• •
.1_.......
fM
is
.... ....
· · · · · · ·
•• • •
•• • •
• •• •• •
i 1 •
[ S h u nt] •••••••••• •
•••••••••••••• • • •
CLR
COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fm
�
This menu allows you to edit a character from the User Defined
Font. The largest box on the menu is a magnified view of the
character being edited. You may edit o n a pixel-by-pixel basis, or
dra w and erase lines of pixels.
The KEY CAP in the upper left-hand corner ind icates which
keyboard character is being edited.
Next to KEY CAP is a real-size display of how the cha racter

will a ppear on the field store.
DOTS selects a dot-mode edit: position cursor an ywhere in the

edit area and lift the stylus. A pixel dot will either appear or
disappear.
LINES selects line-mode edit: similar to RUBBER BAND

drawing from the PAINT METHOD menu. Position cursor i n the
edit area - this defines the start o f a series of l i nes. Lift the
stylus and reposition cursor for the end of the first li ne. Repea t
the process for a series of lines. If the stylus lands outside the
edit box, you lose the last line attempt, but may continue line
drawing afresh by repositioning the cursor inside the box.
ERASE functions as does LINES except the "l ines" that a re

drawn erase pixels i n the edit box, rather than producing pixels.

CHARACT E R EDIT M E N U
Below ERASE are the four Shifting Buttons. For example. LEFT
TRIANGLE moves the character image inside the edit box one
pixel to the left. Similarly for the UP. DOWN and RIGHT
triangles. Note that pixels cannot be lost in this way. i.e. a
c h a racter touching the left-hand side o f the edit box cannot be
s h ifted further left.
SHUNT mod ifies the action o f the Shift Buttons: the movement
is done all the way in the d i rection speci f ied.
CLR is used to erase the contents of the edit box. As with CLR
used during Title Edit. it must be hit twice to confirm complete
erasu re.
COM inverts (complements) the contents of the edit box.

Existing pixels are erased. a n d new pixels crea ted where no p i x e l
e x isted.
The previous or next character i n the font may be selected w i t h

the b u t t o n s found below COM. These b u t t o n s i m p l i c i t l y save the
character being ed ited as displa yed by KEY CAP a n d proceed
through the font. LEFT ARROW saves the edited character and
then fetches the character prior to that in KEY CAP for edit;
R I G HT ARROW saves the edited character a n d selects the next
character. KEY CAP. the d i s p l a y box a n d the e d i t box w i l l now
contain the new character thus selected.
REV. 7 SO FTWARE UPDATE - 13

B R U S H S H A P E A N D T E XT U R E S M E N U
(ORUSH SHAPE �
1-1 7.i:-::t:---
II I�II
�
oI!"'!S e-
l-
e� t�
c� E:-
d
L.!:J S a .... e Reset BJ �
• • •
• • • • •
... , "" .. "
[_T_E_X
_ T__R
U _ S_____
E_ · . __ �
III @]
S e l e ct E d i t
S a .... e Reset BJ t3
• • :::: •• � � � ��
... ..
::«.:
- - - -
11111111 1 1 1 1 I I I - - -
-
-- •
�
. .1 . 1 . .1 •. 1 .....
�
: : : : =MIl
.
�
",."
aaaa aaaa
1 1 1 1 1• 1 1
aaaa
1 1 . ... 1
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa ._--- 1=.=.=.: ""-""- �aaaa
aaaa
....
.. .. ..
.. .-. �
:::::::: . . . . M t±:: + � � :;v.:::::: � .

. . . .
...
... ...
III
. ........ .. • ::-:.::'-;::-:.::-:. � = :n :B:8 • m

..../l
.. ..
...
... ... ... ..".
... ... ... ...
. o u ou
m � :::::::: a AA -(} o n o n � �
!
+.+.+.+.
1. ° 1 11 rrrI 55 1 s r l 8 1 9 1
... +.+.+.+.
...-
PAINT
VIDEO 0 2 3 IlJ. 6 7 8 9
These two menus have been modified to allow 1 8 Brush S h a pes

and 1 8 Textu res to be defined a n d saved by the user. The
changes are similar in each menu, so only the Brush Shape Me n u
w i l l b e discussed. T h e description applies a l s o to textures i n t h e
Textures Me nu.
1 4 - REV 7 SOFTWARE UPDATE

B R U S H S H A P E A N D T E XT U R E S M E N U
The 54 brush shapes on display are available for immediate
shape is shown in t h e large box a t the top left. The large box at
selection by hitting them with the cursor. The selected brush
the top right displays the currently selected texture. The left
a r row box copies the selected texture to the selected brush sha pe.
These operations are the same as in Rev ision 5B software.
The bottom two rows o f brushes are all user-definable and may
be altered to suit the needs of the user.
The block of four words at the top o f the menu controls the
action which occurs when you h i t one of the d isplayed brush
shapes.
Select : This box is normally illuminated. When a brush shape

is h i t that brush is selected as the current brush for drawing.
Edit: Whe n this box is illumi nated, you can select any of the
displayed brushes for editing. You may ed i t the current brush by
hitting the large box a t the top left. The menu will change to the
Brush Edit Men u and the brush that was hit is ready to be edi ted.
See the description of the Brush Edit Menu below.
Save: When this box is illuminated you may copy the c u r rently
selected brush to any of the 1 8 user-defined brush stores at the
bottom of the menu.
[ O_R U_S_"
___ _ __E
R _ E_T
S_ ::::
----:::::::::
:: :: ::::-- I!ElE
Resettin
g: I ']:J,'ff, I
L·.·.-j . r:J I!I 1'):
/ €)I �
-c ' •
• , "
.... .... .... ....

•
@ � ....... © � .....
· . .
"
· . .
· . .
· . .
� � , � , � CO ¢ - r.
-- I /' '" • • 0 0 ... .. .. .. .. . .' . .
. .
( • 0 0 0 . .... X ... ... .
• E AT AT
.- + A T I � ,.� •
JO E ' S
[PAIHT �
.... IDEO �
Reset: Hit the user-defined brush which you wish to reset to a
ROM brush shape. The menu will change to the Brush Reset
Menu, displaying 54 new brushes to ch oose from. Select a n y one
o f them, or return to the Brush Shape Men u by hitting the large
box at the top of the menu.
REV. 7 S O FTWARE UPDATE - 15

B R USH E DIT M EN U
R
[ B_ U_
� __ _I_T
S_H E_D __ __________ �
••• • ••••••••••
••• ••••••••••
•••• •••••••••••
••• ••••••••••••
•• ••• •••••••
• •• •••••••
Dots ••••••
•• ••••••
Lines ••• ••••
••• • •• •
�CLRl
E ra s e •••• • •••
•••••• •• •••••
•••••• ••• •••••
•••••• •••• •••
••••• ••••••• •
COM
!PAINT _
••• • •••••••••
VIDEO 0 1 2 3 III 5 6 7 8 9
This menu allows you to edit a User Defined Brush. The .

Texture Edit Menu operates in a similar manner. The large box
on the menu is a magnified view of the 16 by 1 6 pixel bitmap
brush being edited. You may edit on a pixel-by-pixel basis, or
draw and erase lines of pixels.
Next to the edit box is a real-size display of how the brush w i l l

a p p e a r w h e n written to t h e field store.
DOTS selects a dot-mode edit: position cu rsor anywhere in the

edit area and lift the styl us. A pixel dot will either appear or
disappear.
LINES selects line-mode edit: similar to RUBBER BAND

drawing from the PAINT METHOD menu. Posi tion cursor i n the
edit area - this defines the start of a series of lines. Lift the
stylus and reposition cursor for the end of the first line. Repeat
the process for a series of lines. If the stylus lands outside the
edit box, you lose the last line a ttempt, but may continue line
drawing a fresh by repositioning the cursor inside the box.
ERASE functions as does LINES except the "lines" that are

drawn erase pixels in the edit box, rather than producing pixels.
CLR is used to erase the contents of the edit box. This box must
be hit twice to confirm complete erasure.
COM inverts (complements) the contents of the edit box.

Existing pixels are erased, and new pixels created where no pixel
existed.

' G R A D E ' C O LO U R W I P ES
_
l C_D
_ L_ _1P E S____IIDITl
D_U_R_W
White
--..;__
;;
Colour
Texture
Wipe 9
W i p e ..o..
Change
Colour tunnel
Disintegrate
G ...· di d e �>
G r a d e ..o..
f PAINT
, "' I D E O
�
�
These two new wipes on the Colour Wipes Menu allow smoothly
graded backgrounds to be created easily and repea tably. The
grading may be vertical or horizo n tal.
H ow it is done
a) Select Grade=> i n COLOUR WIPES menu.
b) Return to i mage.
c) Press WIPE COLOUR button.
d) Put stylus to pad. The grade=> cursor will be displayed.
e) Use the H UE, SATURATION, VALUE a n d COLOUR DEPTH
sliders to vary the cursor colour to the desired setting.
f) Move the tip of the cursor a rrow to the horizontal screen
position where you wish the selected colour to appear, and lift
the stylus. The colour and horizontal position are recorded.
g) Repeat steps d) to f) as many times as requi red (up to 20) to
enter a number of colours a n d positions.
h ) When the desired entries have been made, press the DRAW
LOCK bu tton.
i) The wipe will proceed from left to right across the screen.
The colour will be smoothly graded between the colours that
you have en tered.
, REV. 7 SOFTWARE UPDATE - 17

G R A D E C O L O U R WI P E S
Notes:
i) The Grade � wipe operates in the same manner but from top
to bottom of the screen.
ii) The USE TEXTURE and USE STENCIL buttons may be used
respectively to add a textured pattern and to protect areas of
the Field Store.
iii) The wipe may be repeated using the same colour and screen
position entries by pressing WIPE COLOUR followed
immedia tely by DRAW LOCK.
iv) The COLOUR DEPTH control will only have an effect if the
Colour Type menu is set to something other than Opaque, for
example Translucent. This would allow a film of varying
translucency to be laid over the Field Store image.
F I LL PAI N T M ET H O D
The Fill selection i n the Paint Method Menu has been slightly
modified. The DRAW COLOUR button is no longer au tomatically
turned on by Fill. This red uces the chance of accidentally filling
with colour when it is not wanted. The DRAW COLOUR button
may be tu rned on or off as required.

P R ES ETS CONTROL M ENY
[PRESETS CONTROL
Set
Reset
Copy USER preset
Copy ROM preset
Controls view
MODE
Sare mode
P .-· o t e c t n... ode
Update mode
Program mode
! PAIHT
.VIDEO
_
�
Several new i tems have been added to this menu.
Set: This allows the current Preset to be set to the current state
of the CVI. Select Set and the menu will change. A t this stage
you may e i ther CANCEL the Set function, o r you may go ahead
with i t by moving the cursor t o the l arge box and lifting the
stylus.
This function has exactly the same effect as using the
PRESET /FREEZE button combination o n the Control Panel. It
has been included to allow the Set function to be achi eved from
the External Graphics Pad without the use of the Control Panel.

P R ESETS CONTRO L
Menu Lock: When this box is selected the operation of the

MENU button is changed slightly. After returning to the image
you will find that the MEN U but ton does not cause the menus to
appear, but instead causes a beep. I t will actually take th ree
rapid presses of the MENU button to enter the menus. The Menu
Lock function is extremely useful in a live situation where the
accidental appearance of the menus is usually undesirable. The
Me nu Lock can be disabled by turning off the box in the menu.
Safe Mode: This Preset Con trol Mode is similar to Protect

except that it disables the PRESET/FREEZE button combination
for s ettin g the user-defined Presets. This is particularly use f u l if
inex perienced operators a r e using the CVI where random button
p ushing can cause drastic a l teration of the Pr esets. Refer to th e
Revision 5 User Ma nual for the meanings of other Preset Control
Modes. Use the Reset all Presets function if you wish to return to
the Factory Presets.
Controls View: This menu has been labelled for easier

iden tification of the sliders a n d but tons. I n add ition, the WIPE
COLOUR and WIPE STENCIL buttons have been a l tered. The
button on the menu may l ight u p with either a small LED, a
heavy border or both. The small LED ind icates that a colour or
stencil wipe will occur as soon as you return to the image. The
heavy border ind icates the status of the WIPE button in the
current Preset. For example, if the WIPE STENCIL button has a
heavy border it means that a Stencil Wipe will occur whenever the
current Preset is selected. This feature is used in many of the
Factory Presets and may be i n corporated into user-defined Presets.
You may step through t h e four LED/border combinations by
repeatedly hitting the displayed WIPE button with the cursor.

S EQ U E N C E R
r
[SEOUENCER �
GM!B5 3 [��
[ R e c o r d lApp e n d Iin s e r t ]
fo
EHC
! PC loanyt i n u eI SLOOP
1 2
tep
l
5 6 7 3 9
START
Normal Edit
Music
External Options
Draw-lock
PAINT 0 1 2
3 iJ. 5 6 " 7"" 3 9
The basic operation of the Sequencer is as described in the

Revision 5 User Ma nual. The Sequ encer functions have been
upgraded and ex panded for easier and more powerful operation.
The most i mportant change is the S e q u e nce N u m b e r selection.

Up to ten distinct seq uences can be recorded and maintained.
Wh e n a S e q u e n ce N u m b e r is selected, a l l Pla y , R e c o r d and E d i t
functions refer solely t o that sequence. T h e o t h e r nine sequences
are una ffected.
The Sequencer memory will hold a total of up to 3000 l i nes.
This memory may be di vided between the ten sequences in a n y
ma nner. There m a y b e o n e extremely l o n g seq u ence, or ten
modera tely long ones, or anything in between.
The record ing and playing fu nction boxes have been separa ted
ph ysically on the men u to eliminate the possibility of accidentally
making wrong selections. These fu nctions operate exactly as in
Revision 5, with two exceptions:
REV. 7 S O F T WA R E U P D A T E - 21
S EQ U E N C E R
L oo p : Repeat has been re-named Loop to simplify the Q WERTY

k e y bo a r d interface to the Sequencer.
C ontinue: If a sequence is stopped with the MENU button

w h i l e it is playin g or sin g le-steppin g , it can be re-started from the
sa me point usin g Continue. Alternatively, use the Sequencer Edit
Me n u to li g h t up the line number where you wish to start playin g ,
t h e n select Continue.
The START modes have been re-named. These apply to both

R e c o r d and Play functions.
N or m al: Previously named Immediate. The Sequencer starts

i m mediately.
M usic: Previously named Audio. The Sequencer starts when a

s h a r p increase in audio level is detected, or when STOP is pressed.
External: The Sequencer starts when a switch connected to the

External input is closed, or when STOP is pressed.
D ra w-lock: The Sequencer returns to the image immediately,

b u t P l a y i n g or Recordin g does not be g in until the DRAW-LOCK
buttton is pressed.
22 - REV. 7 SO FTWARE UPDATE

SEQU E N C E R O PTI ONS M E N U
rSEOUENCER OPTIONS �
(Slider limit )
[I g n o r e t i m e I
(Clear all times )
[PAINT
I E �
'''
�
D O
This menu is accessed through the O p t i o n s box on the ma in

Sequencer Me nu. Three miscellaneous Sequencer options are
listed.
Slider limit : When this box is off, the Sequencer will record
every position of a Con trol Panel slider as it is moved. While this
is necessa ry for some functions (such as graded wi pes and
zoom/stretch moves) i t is often a cu mbersome waste of Sequencer
memory space, especia lly during p a i n t i n g functi ons. When the
Slider limit box is turned on , only the final resting place of any
particular slider is recorded, resulting i n a large sa v ing in memory
and grea ter ease of Sequencer editing.
I gnore time : During Sequencer Play functio ns i t is sometimes

desirable to move through a Sequence wi thout waiting for a l l the
pauses encountered during recording. The Ignore time box will do
this for you, ignoring the t i m e entries in the Sequence and p l a y i n g
as f a s t as poss i ble. This i s useful f o r checking purposes, but w i l l
n o t give accurate reprod uction of wipes, p a n s or zooms.
Clear all times : This box, when h i t , w i l l clear all the recorded
ti mes in the currently selected sequence to zero. This gives a
convenient starting point for adjusting the t i ming of events
within a Sequence. Note that Clear all times makes a perma nent
change to the Sequence, whereas Ignore t i m e s i m p l y acts as if a l l
the t i mes are zero.
R EV. 7 SOFTWA R E U P DATE - 23

SEQ U E NCER EDIT M E N U
[SEOUENCER EDIT
( ... A C T I O N H M
S F
1"0000 P r e s e t 05 00 00 00 0 1
[0 00 1 P r e s e t 00 00 00 04 25
[0002 L i n e 069 082
(0003 L i n e 064 094
[0004 L i n e 088 090
[0005 L i n e 076 1 02
1"0006 L i n e 085 1 02
[0007 T i t l e n o . 34J 00 00 06 38
0008 T i t l e L028 076J
0009 D o t L036 096J
..... Search Delete IBlock
T h e basic operation of this menu is the same as for Revision 5

s o f t w a re. The modifications listed below have been made to
f a c i l itate editing.
The Sequence line numbers have been increased to four figures

to a l lo w for the potentially longer sequences.
When the TITLE button is pressed during Record modes, the

recorded entry reads "Ti tle DO. " followed by a two figure number,
i n i t i a l l y zero. The following "Ti tle" entry specifies the the title
position. The two-figure nu mber may be modified during editing
t o select any title from the Title Library. "00" will select the
c u r r e n t title, while any other number will access the
corresponding Title Library entry.
Delete: T h is operates as previously; that is, select a line n u mber

b o x and then hit Delete to remove it. Delete can also be used in
conju nction with the Block box to delete any number of lines in
t h e Seq uence:
i) Select a line nu mber box.

i i ) Hit Block. It lights up.
i i i ) Search for the other end of the block to be deleted. Use
e i t her the scroll arrows or use the normal technique of typing
i n a line number and hitting Search. The Block box rema ins
l i t up.
i v ) Light up the line number box a t the other end of the block to
be deleted.
v ) Hit Delete. The selected lines are deleted.

SEQ U E N C E R EDIT M E N U
Search : This fu nction may be used as previously to find a

specific line nu mber in a Sequence by lighting up a line nu mber
box, typing in the required n u m ber and then hitting Search.
Search may also be used in conjunction with Block to find the
end of a long run of one particular instruction type. For exa mple,
i f a large n umber of consecutive Do t instructions have been
recorded it is possible to locate the last of them in the following
manner:
i) Light u p the l i ne number box of one of the Dot instructions.

ii) Hit Block.
iii) Hit Search. The last in the run of Dot commands appears at
the selected line position.
R F. V _ 7 � O F T W A R F. l T P n A T F. _ ., CO
H A R DWA R E O PTI O N S
Q W E RTY Keyboard Sequencer Data Entry

The optional Q WERTY keyboard may be used to insert data
i n t o the Sequence. To do this, display the Sequencer Edit Menu
a nd use the Graphics Pad to light up the line number before
w h ich you wish to insert the li nes. Type in the required code and
co-ordina tes from the list given below and then a carriage return.
The corresponding Sequencer instruction will be inserted. The
l i n e n u mber remains illuminated so insertion may continue
i n d efinitely.
If a line number is illuminated, type in a carriage return and

then n umbers may be typed into the box to Search for or Delete a
l i n e n umber. When the number has been entered type in "S", "D"
or "B" plus a carriage return to select Search, Delete or Block as
r e q u i red. All the Edit functions except Block Search may be
ca rried out in this manner.
below. They are the same as those required for RS232 "@"
The Sequencer Edit codes for inserting instructions are listed
c o m mands. In these codes:
nil means
nlln means
a i-digit number,
a 3-digit number,
xxx means a 3-digit x co-ordinate,
yyy means a 3-digit y eo-ordinate.
CZ - colourize WS - wipe stencil

DC - draw colour US - use stencil
UT - use texture
DS - draw stencil IS - invert stencil
FZ -
ST - stop
WC - wipe colour freeze
PSnn - Preset nn
HUnnn - hue R2nnn

SAnnn - saturation HPnnn
- rate two
V Annn VPnnll
- horizontal pan
CDnnn - colour depth SHnnn

value
- - vertical pan
R 1 11nn ZMllnll
- stretch
rate one
- - zoom
DTxxxyyy - draw dot CNxxxyyy set rectangle corner

-
LNxxxyyy - draw line RExxxyyy draw rectangle

-
P Axxxyyy
CExxxyyy - set circle centre CUxxxyyy - cut
Clxxxyyy - draw circle paste-
CExxxyyy - set ellipse centre FRxxxyyy copy from

-
A X xxxyyy - set ellipse axis TOxxxyyy copy to

-
ELxxxyyy - draw ellipse TTxxxyyy print tit le

-
FIxxxyyy - fill
H A R DWA R E O PTIO N S
RS232 S E Q U E N C E R STA RT
The Sequencer may be started from either the QWERTY
keyboard or a n external computer. Three commands are available
to Play, Loop or Stop a Sequence. These commands are only
recognised by the C V I when the image is displayed, that is, when
not in the menus. The th ree commands are:
@BSlI - Begin playing Sequence II
@RSn - Repeat (Loop) Sequence n
@ES - End Sequence Play or Loop
where n is n u mber from 0 to 9.
For a full list of the available n @n commands, refer to the

QWERTY keyboard section of this update.
R E V . 7 SO FTWARE UPDATE - 27
SAVE & R EC A L L M E N U U P DAT E
[ S A ....;;;-
--;;;;;::;;:;
E_&._R
_ E_
C_A_L_L� ______ �
til.,
S a ..... e
S a ..... e D a t a
Recall
Test Data Recall
RECALL: Presets
Se u e n c: e s
Titles
Icu ,11
(OLD] Brushes/Textures
�
II .iliGD
I PA INT
. .... I D E O �
T h e Save & Recall function with Revision 7 has been i mproved.

The ph ysical hookup of the CVI t o a video recorder is identical;
the SAVE & RECALL menu has changed slightly for ease of use.
The controls available on this menu are described as follows:
OFF is used if you do not require the Save & Recall function.
SA V E is used to save everything, data and image, to tape.
SA V E DATA saves only the data, NOT the image.
R E CALL loads data and/or image from the tape, as selected by

t h e Recall Options in the box in the lower half of the menu.
TEST DATA RECALL functions as before, testing whether it is

poss i b l e t o perform an error-free RECALL of the saved data,
w i t h o u t actually altering the data stored in the CVI.
Recall O p t i o ns:
K e e p i n g in mind that SAVE and SAVE DATA save ALL data

i t e rn s to tape, it is possi ble to reca ll only those i tems required, by
s e l e c t i n g one or more of the following Recall Options:
P R ES ET for the 1 00 User Defined Presets

S E Q U ENCER for the ten sequences
T I TLES for the entire 99 titles in the library
USER FONT for the User Defined Font
B R USHES & TEXTURES
I M A G E for the digital field store
2R - R E V. 7 SOFTWA R E UPDATE
SAV E & R E C A L L M E M O R Y U P DAT E
Use the OLD button to reca ll d a t a saved with a CVI running

software prior to Revision 7. "Old" sa ves will not otherwise be
properly recalled. The only d a ta items on old saves are PRESETS
and one SEQUENCE. Requests for TITLES, FONT a n d
BR USHES/TEXTURES w i l l b e ignored.
R E CALL Error Reports:
Error reports have been extended. As documented in the manual,

a messa ge upon completion of R ECALL ind icates whether each
data item was recalled correctly. If the message is preceded by a
R I G HT TRIANGLE, then the ind ica ted data item was corrupted
during an unsuccessful reca ll, a n d thus had to be reset within the
CVI to a predefined val ue, as follows:
Corrupted CVI R esets to ...

Data Item
PR ESETS Factory p resets

SEQUENCER Seque nces a t power-up time
TITLES Title library a t power-u p
USER FONT Font is cleared
BR USH/TEXTURES Va lues a t power-up time
If a data i tem is flagged as a recall f a i l u re WITHOUT the RIGHT

TRIANGLE indicator, then that data item h a s not been a l t ered i n
t h e CVI storage.
REV. 7 SOFTWA R E UPDATE - 29

S ETU P M E N U
[�S;E T U P ��
�;
ul.'
______________
Chroma key levels

Colour bars
Selr test
Test pattern
Music test
Palette display
CHROMA KEY
C h .-- o n1 ..:1 < b l u e >
f.V1 D E O �
Luminance
PAINT
�
There are two new utility functions listed in this menu.
M u sic Test
A visual display of the incoming audio levels is shown on the
screen. The bass. mid and treble levels provide the red. green and
blue components of Music Colour and Colourize control. The
envelope is used for triggering Music freezing and Sequencer Start.
The peak indicators in the display can be reset by pressing the
D R A W button.
Palette Display
This function displays the contents of the 4096 Palette locations
i n a regular array on the screen. In each of the 1 6 squares o n the
screen. the red address increases from left to right and the green
the 1 6 squares i ncreases left to right. top to bottom. The effect of

add ress i ncreases from top to bottom. The blue address of each of
Colourize selections and RS232 Palette operations are easily seen.
30 - R E V. 7 SO FTWARE UPDATE
RS232 P O R T C O N T R O L U P DAT E
This section lists the new RS232 "@" comma nds. The RS232
con trol system is functionally the same as under Revision 5 B
software exceptfor t w o importa n t changes:
1. The CVI now trans m i ts and receives an eigh t-bit data word.
T h i s change has been made to allow the connection o f the
external G ra p h i cs Pad and QWERTY keyboard op tions. All
c o m p u t e r by tes sent to the CVI MUST have the most s i g n i f i c a n t
b i t s e t to zero (standard ASCII), otherw ise t he r e c e i v e d d a t a w i l l
be m i sused.
2. RS232 " @" commands w i l l n o w be recognised o n l y w h e n the

CVI is n o t displaying m e n us. Characters received w h i l e t h e m e n u s
a r e displayed are u s e d for m a k i n g menu selections.
Rev 7 Data Transfer Commands

Save Font
Command: S F
T h i s instructs t h e CVI to transmit t h e d a ta contained i n t h e
User Defined Font. The amount transmitted varies accor d i n g t o
the size o f t h e f o n t resident i n the font a t t h e time, although a
typical size would be 6000 characters. The data consists of ASCII
c h a racters comprising hexadecima l b ytes. This comm a n d is used i n
conjunction with Load Font.
Load F ont
Command: LF
The User Defined Fon t may be loaded from a font saved w i t h
the Save Font command. T h e d a t a ( t w o ASCII cha racters per
byte) will be written into the User Font data area, where they
w i l l be in terpreted as font informa tion. The User Font w i l l be
cleared to null cha racters i f Load Font is used to recei ve data t h a t
could n o t be a valid f o n t . T h i s w i l l h a p p e n i f the data f r o m a
Sav e F ont comma n d is somehow corru pted. T h e C V I rema i n s i n
L o a d F o n t mode until either t h e User Font i s full (about 4000
bytes) or an @ cha racter is received, indicating the start of
a n o t h e r command.
R E V . 7 S O F TWA R E U P D A T E - 31
RS232 PO RT C O N T R O L U P DAT E
Save Character (s)

Com mand: SCmmmt
I n d i vidual characters from the User Defined Fon t are
t r a nsmi tted with this command. mm is the hexadecimal value
speci fying the ASCII code of the first character to be saved whilst
1 1 1 1 specifies the last character. Ensure mm = nn to save a single
c h a racter. Use mm = 00 and nn = FF to save the entire font.
T h e format of a single font character. whether Saved or Loaded.

i s s h o w n in a table at the end of this section. The character data
MUST BE TERMINATED BY A PERIOD; this allows a re
s y n c h roniza tion to the next character if the data is somehow
c o r r u p ted.
Load Character
C o m mand: LC
A n y n u mber of individual font characters may be loaded into
the User Defined Font with this command. The format of the
l o a d e d data matches that described for Save Character EXACTLY.
E a c h character is terminated by a period ".". If an attempt is
made to load a character whose ASCII code does not exist in the
f on t. the cha racter is discarded. A complete list of ASCII codes
section. The CVI will remain in Load Character mode until an @

for the fonts is given i n the ASCII Table at the end of this
c h a racter is received.
Load Title
C o m m and: LT
The Current Title is loaded with a string of ASCII characters.
Mo s t ASCII characters from SPACE to "z" can be used in a title, as
w e l l as accents and a few foreign language characters.
O n ce the title is loaded it may be displayed on the screen i mage

u s i n g the Print Title command. TT, described under the P a i n t
Me thods RS-232 commands. T h e s i z e o f t h e title is restricted t o
a bo u t 300 cha racters in length.
Cha nges of character size. font and style are entered with the
t i t l e control character "\" (ASCII 5C: backslash). followed by the
r e q u i r e d control code. A table of Title Control Codes will be
found a t the end of this section. The end of the title is indicated
Title mode until either the title end is found or a n @ cha racter is
by tra nsmitting II\EII to the CVI. The CVI will remain in Load
recei ved. indicating a new command.
Save Library
Co mmand: SL
The entire contents of the title library are saved with this
command. Title control codes are i ncluded with the saved data. so
font, size and style information are not lost. Each title is
separated from the next with the "Title END" control code. Title
l i bra ries saved i n this manner may be loaded with Load Ti tle.
32 - REV. 7 SOFTWA R E UPDATE

Load Libra ry
Command: LL
Similar to Load Ti tle, this comma nd i s used to load the entire
library of 99 titles i nto the CVI. The section dealing with the
TITLES menu describes the library in more detail. Titles are
loaded consecutively starting with the first. Each title is
separa ted from the next with an "Title END" control code, i.e.
"\E". I f less than 9 9 ti tles are loaded, the remaining ti tles i n the
library are cleared to nothing. The CVI will remain i n Load
L i b r a r y mode until either the libra ry is full (about 3500
cha racters) or an @ character is recei ved.
Save B rus hes and Textures

Command: SB
The entire set of User Defined B rushes a n d User Defined
Textures are transmi tted with this comma nd. There are eighteen
brushes a n d eighteen textures. Each brush/texture bitmap is 1 6
b y 1 6 pixels i n size, which i s 1 6 b y 2 bytes. They are transmit ted
i n column order as two ASCII cha racters per byte.
Load B rus hes and Textures

Command: L B
The e n t i r e s e t of User Defined Brushes a n d U s e r Defined
Textures are loaded into the CVI with this command. The d a t a
f o r m a t is identical to that u s e d by the Save Brushes a n d Textures
command. The CVI rema ins i n this mode until either a l l eighteen
brushes a n d eighteen textures a re loaded, or a n @ character i s
received i n d i c a t i n g a new comma nd.
Load Palette
Command: LMbgrBGR
The Palette RAM performs a colour tra nsformation on a l l

d i g i t a l images. T h e CVI h a s 1 2 b i t s of c o l o u r resolution: f o u r bits
for each of blue, green and red. The Palette RAM is 4Kx 1 2 bits.
The twelve address bits are the i n p u t colour a n d the twelve data
bits are the transformed output colour. Each input colour c a n be
mapped i n d i vidually to a n output colour.
The Palette RAM is normalised whenever the COLOURIZE
button is all; that is, each input colour is mapped to itself, g i v i n g
n o r m a l colouring. When COLOURIZE i s switched o n the p rocessor
c o n t i n u a l l y upda tes the Palette accord i n g to the Colo u r i z e T y p e
R E V . 7 S O FTWA R E U P D A T E - 33
R S232 P O R T C O N T R O L U P DAT E
a nd C o l o u r i z e Cont r o l Menus, to perform the required colour

tra n s formations. When the COLOURIZE button is turned off
a g a i n , the processor performs one normalisation pass through the
P a l e t te RAM.
When using the RS232C link to access the Palette, it is advisable
t o l e a v e the · COLOURIZE button off to stop the processor from
a ccessing the Palette.
The command parameters b,g,r,B,G and R are ASCII hex digits,

a n d supply the lower and upper palette address limits for each of
b l u e , g r e e n and red components. "bgr" specifies the lower limi ts;
"BGR" specifies the upper limits.
S o for example, the instruction
@LM 370 A9F
tells t h e CVI to prepare to load the Pal e t t e locations that have

b l u e a d d ress between 3 and A, green address between 7 and 9, a n d
red a d d ress b e t ween 0 a n d F . The instruction
@LM 1 26 1 26
p r e p a res the CVI to load the single Palette location with blue
a d d ress 1 , green address 2 an d red address 6. The i nstruc tio n
@LMOOO FFF
t e l l s the CVI to prepare to load the entire Palette.
The order of the Palette addresses between the lower add ress
bgr a n d the h i gher address BGR is given by:
for blue = b to B do
for green = g to G do
for red = r t o R do
Load Palette Address (blue,gree n,red)
next red
next green
next blue

For example, Hie instruction
@LM 30A 5FD
will access the specified Palette add resses in the following order:
30A, 30B, 30C, 30D, 3 1 A, 3 1 B, 3 1 C, 3 1 D, 32A, 32B . . . 3FA,

3FB, 3 FC, 3FD, 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, 4 1 A, 4 1 B . . . 4FB, 4FC,
4FD, 50A, 50B, 50C . . . 5FB, 5 FC, 5FD.
P a l e t te D a t a Format
The d a ta for each Palette location is tra nsferred as four ASCII

characters. The first of the group i s always " P " . This a l lows the
CVI and the remote computer to maintain d a ta sy nch ronisation.
The second third and fourth characters are ASCII hex cha racters
specifying respectively the blue, green and red data for the
Palette loca tion.
A s an example, if you w a n ted to ma p a l l the colours which

have only a green component (no red or blue) to the corresponding
shade of grey, the following instruction would be sent to the CVI:
@LM 0 0 0 OFO
POOOP I 1 I P222P 3 3 3P444P 5 5 5P666P7 7 7
P8 8 8 P999PAAAPBBBPCCCPDDDPEEEPFFF
R a p i d P a l e t t e Nor malis at ion
If a rapid normalisation is requ i red, simply turn the

COLOURIZE button on then off again quickly. This w i l l cause
the processor to normal ise the Palette.
This operation can be programmed from the remote compu ter
by transmitting the comma nd
@CZ @CZ.
Save Pa lette
Command: 5 MbgrBGR
This is the reverse opera tion to Load Palette. The add ress
specification and data format are the same as for Load Palette.
REV. 7 S O FTWA R E UPDATE - 35

R S2 3 2 P O R T C O N T R O L U P D AT E
R EV 7 S EQ U ENCER " (0" CO M MAN DS
B egin S equence
C o m m a n d : BSn
This command starts Sequence n playin g . It will play until the

E n d is reached, the MENU button is pressed or the @E S comma n d
i s received.
R epeat S equence
Command: RSn
This command starts Sequence n playin g in Repea t or Loop

mode. It will loop continuously until the MENU button is pressed
o r the @ES command is received.
End Sequence
C o m m a nd: ES
This command stops the current Sequence from playing or

l o o ping. The CVI does not enter the menus when this command is
received.
Save/ Load Character Format

Font characters for the Save and Load Character commands
consists o f two ASCII hexadecimal cha racters per byte of d a ta.
Byte 1:
ASCII code for the cha racter.
e.g. code for "A" is 4 1 .
maximum value: 7 B
Byte 2:
Character w idth i n hexadecimal.
maximum value: 1 0 ( 1 6 decimal)
Byte 3:
Cha racter height i n hex.
maximum va lue: 1 8 (24 decimal)
Byte 4 :
Character descent i n hex, the downwards
vertical displacement of the character
when the character is displayed
maximum value: 1 8 (24 decimal)
B y t e s 5 o n wards:
P i xel bitmap for character, i n row order.
If the cha racter width is less than 9,
one byte is used per row; otherwise two
bytes are used. The number of rows is
equal to the character height.
Term i n a t i n g Character:
After the hex character data, a period "."
must be present to re-synch to the next
c h a racter. I f "." i s missing, the character
da t a wi l l NOT be loaded in to the User
Defined Font.
FONT CHAR ACTER E X A MPLE:

Imagine a letter "a" (ASCII code 6 1 )
defined with the following bitmap:
(* =p i xel ON, 0 pixel OFF):
=
0****000 width: 0 5
*000*000 height: 07
0000*000 descent: 02
0****000
*000*000
*000*000
0****000
Save Character would emit this font character

as follows:
6 1 0 5 070 278880878888878.
0 1 U�U / U � / OOOUO / OOOOO / O.

R S232 P O R T C O N T R O L U P D AT E
CV I ASC I I Character Set
ASCII @LT Character

code char description
02 b LC beta
03 c LC c-cedilla
05 0 LC �
06 a LC oe ligature
14 B UC Beta
¢>
15 C UC C-Cedilla
16 0 UC
17 A UC .L"E ligature
18 acute accent
19 grave accent
....
lA circumflex
IB tilde
lC umlaut
ID degree
20 n/a space
�
21 n/a !
n/a
7A n/a z
•
40 copyright
5C inverted-!
5E < «
SF > »
7B ? inverted-?
T h e @LT column i n dicates how the unu sual font characters are
s p e c i f i e d w i t h a Title Con trol Character (\) when loading a title.
F o r e x a mple, a n inverted ? would be specified by \? (cf. Load
T i t l e command). I n this column, un/an indicates the ASCII
c h a racter may be e n tered without using the Title Con t r o l
C h a r a cter.
38 - R E V. 7 SOFTWARE UPDATE
R S232 P O R T C O N T R O L U P DAT E
Title Control Codes : Preced e by "\" for Load Title
Code Meaning
I Size I (smal lest)

2 Size 2
3 Size 3
4 Size 4
5 Size 5 (la rgest)
y Font I (system)
F Font 2 (piccolo)
G Font 3 (pisa)
H Font 4 (milano)
I Font 5 (olivetti)
J Font 6 (roma)
K Font 7 (massera ti)
D Font 8 (User Defined)
U Underline ON
V Underline OFF
S Surround ON
T Surround OFF
L Drop Shadow LEFT

R Drop Shadow RI GHT
Z Drop Shadow OFF
P Kern LEFT
Q Kern RIGHT
N Carriage Return (newline)

E Title END
As well, there a re control codes for accents a n d foreign l a n guage

characters as shown in the @L T column of the accompa n y i n g
A S C I I table.

QWERTY K EYBOARD FU NCTIO N S
The QWERTY keyboard gives access t o all the RS23 2 input

functions of the CVI. Pixel-precise painting and graphics are
easily acheived. I n addition, with Revision 7 software the
keyboard allows swift and easy selection from the menus and
keyboard entry of titles and Sequence steps.
menus are n o t displayed you can enter any of the "@" commands
The keyboard operates in two different modes. When the
that the CVI has available. These cover such functions as
settings. The useful "@" commands are listed below. The full
graphics entry and setting the precise value of Control Panel
range of these comma nds is listed i n the Revision 5 User Manual

and in the Revision 7 Manual Update.
When the menus are displayed, you can enter commands to
make selections o r to move from menu to menu. Also, the
Sequencer, Titles and Title Edit Menus respond to keyboard input
as described below.
I M PO RTANT NOTE: When the the keyboard i s used in

conjunction with the external Graphics Pad, it is important
that you do not type "Control-A" on the keyboard, as the pad
may become disabled. If this should occur type in "Control-A
RS" to reset the pad.
Special Function Keys

There are 23 special function keys which are coloured light
grey on the keyboard. Across the top of the keyboard are 1 5
function keys labelled F l t o F 1 5. With the exception o f F 1 5, these
keys are used exclusively in the Title Edit Menu as described in
the Revision 7 Manual Update. F 1 5 can be used any time that the
menus are displayed to move to the Title Edit Menu.
The PRESET, MENU, FREEZE and (STOP) keys operate
exactly as their corresponding keys on the Control Panel. So, for
instance, the PRESET key may be pressed followed by two
number keys t o change the Preset; the MENU and STOP keys can
be used to toggle the menu display, and so on.
The four TRIANGLE keys may be used after the PRESET key
to i ncrement or decrement the Preset n u mber. They may also be
used to match a triangle displayed on the menu. For instance, in
the Title Edit menu, the triangle keys perform backspace a n d
cursor movement functions; on the Sequencer Edit Menu, t h e
triangles can be used to scroll up and d o w n , and so on.
M enu Keyboard Functions

The keyboard can move t o a n y of t h e 2 0 major menus w i t h two
keystrokes. For example, to move to the Freeze Control Menu
(Video Men u 3), simply type i n V3 at the start o f a n input line.
To move to the Paint Method Men u (Pai n t Menu 0) type i n PO at
the start of a n input line. The "start of a n i n p u t line" means just
after you have typed a carriage return or just after you have
changed menu.
R E V . 7 S O FTWARE UPDATE - 4 1
QW E RTY K EYBOARD FU N CTI O N S
To select a n item from a menu, you need only type i n the first
few letters of that item followed by a carriage return. The item
will be selected. You only need type in as many letters as are
necessary to distinguish your required item from the others in the
displayed menu. In most cases you will find that one or two
letters of any menu item will distinguish it uniquely.
As an example consider the Paint Method Menu. To select
Circle you could type "Circle''. "Ci" or simply "C" (followed by a
carriage RETURN), as Circle is the only selection starting with
"C". However, to select Rays you must type at least "Ra"
(RETURN) in order to distinguish Rays from Rectangle. If you
type just "R ", Rectangle will be selected. If you type "on you will
select Draw but you will also toggle the DEJAG box.
In addition to selecting items by name, you can select from the
lists of menu items by using the UP and DOWN TRIANGLE keys.
The only exceptions to these selection functions are the
Sequencer Edit Menu, the Title Edit Menu and the Titles Menu.
The Sequencer Edit Me nu functions are described in detail in

the Revision 7 Manual Update. Sequencer steps may be typed in
instead of using the usual Record and Insert techniques.
The Title Edit Menu functions are described in detail in the
Revision 7 Manual Update. Titles may be entered by simply
typing onto the menu. The Function keys F l to F1S are used for
making font, size and format selections, as well as for other Title
Edit functions.
The Titles Me nu allows you to type in any two numbers to
Search automatically for a particular title in the Title Library.
The selected Title Number box is illuminated, allowing the Select
or Save functions to be used by typing Se or Sa respectively. The
UP and DOWN TRIANGLES can be used for scrolling up and
down through the Title Library. Type T to go to the Title Edit
Menu, or hit F 1 S.
Using " G" commands when the image is displayed

There are a number of commands which can be usefully typed
in while the image is displayed on the CVI output; that is, when
the menus are not displayed. These commands must alway be
preceded by the "@" key, and hence they are known as "@"
Commands. They are described in detail in the RS232 References
section of the Revision 5 User Manual and in the Revision 7
Manual Update. It is suggested that the user read these sections to
further understand the use and purpose of "@" commands.
The common useful commands are listed briefly below for

covenience. In these commands
n means a single digit,

nn means a 2-digit number,
nnn means a 3-digit number,
xxx means a 3-digit x co-ordinate,
yyy means a 3-digit y co-ordinate.
42 - R EV.7 SOFTWARE UPDATE

QW ERTY K EYBOARD FU NCTI O N S
@CZ - colourize @WS - wipe stencil

@DC - draw colour @US - use stenci l
@DS - draw stencil @IS - invert stencil
@UT - use texture @ST - stop
@WC - w i pe colour @FZ - freeze
@PSnn - Preset nn
@HUnnn - hue @R 2nnn - ra te two

@SAnnn - saturation @HPnnn - hori zon tal pan
@VAnnn - value @VPnnn - vertical pan
@CDnnn - colour depth @SHnnn - stretch
@R l nnn - rate one @ZMnnn - zoom
@DTxxxyyy - draw dot @CNxxxyyy - set rectangle corner

@LNxxxyyy - draw line @RExxxyyy - draw recta ngle
@CExxxyyy - set circle cen tre @CUxxxyyy - cut
@Clxxxyyy - draw circle @PAxxxyyy - paste
@CExxxyyy - set elli pse centre @FRxxxyyy - copy from
@AXxxxyyy - set ellipse axis @TOxxxyyy - copy to
@ELxxxyyy - draw ell ipse @TTxxxyyy - print title
@Flxxxyyy - fill
@BSn - Begin playing Sequence n

@RSn - Repeat (Loop) Sequence n
@ES - End Sequence Play or Loop
R EV.7 SOFTWARE UPDATE - 43

Glossary .......................•................................................ 1
Index .............................................................................. 5
G LOSSARY
A
a n a l og u n p rocessed v i deo
aspect ratio ratio of horizontal to vertical size of image
B
beta a video tape standard
blanking part of a video signal
brush shape CVI digital equivalent of a p a i n t brush
bug p a r t o f a c o mp u t e r p r o g r a m t h a t d o e s n o t
f u n c t i o n a s i n t e n d e d b y t h e p r o g r a m me r
burst gate ga t i n g s i g n a l f o r su b c a r r i e r
c
. cascade connect one CVI into another
CCU camera control u n i t
character l e t t e r , n u m b e r o r symbol
chroma key video tech n i q u e o f bloc k i n g images o f a
certain colour
colourize recolour digital image
colour black T V - t y p e v i d e o s i g n a l with a t o t a l l y b l a c k
picture
c o l o u r tunnel continuously changing background that
r a d i a tes f r o m screen centre
composite video normal TV-type video signal
c o n to u r C V I c o lo u r i z i n g e f f e c t
cross CVI s y m m e t r y d r a w i n g e f f e c t
cursor r o u n d s p o t on s c r e e n t h a t c o r r e s p o n d s t o
position of stylus on graphics pad
cu t - a n d - p a s t e m o v i n g of image f r o m o n e a r e a t o a n o t h e r
CVI C o m p u t e r V i d eo I n s t r u m e n t
D
delay line d e v i c e t o d e l a y v i d e o by m i c r o s e c o n d s
depth t h i c k n ess o f c o l o u r
digital touch pad g r a p h i cs p a d
digitize l i v e v i d e o i n forma t i o n c o n v e r t e d to d i g i t a l
form
d i s i n t e g r a te random dot d isintegration of screen image
dropou t d i s c o n t i n u i ty i n r e c o r d e d i n f o r m a t i o n
drop shadow shadow behind TITLING characters
R E FERENCES - 1
G LOSSARY
F
field half of a f ra me
field store memory c o n t e n t s o f d i g i t i z ed v i d e o i m a g e
flip CVI symmetry drawing effect
frame one of a s eq u e n c e o f s t i l l p i c t u res f r o m w h i c h
a moving video signal is made
freeze to c a p t u r e a m o v i n g live i mage
G
gen-Iock t i m i n g o f v i d eo e q u i p m e n t f r o m a n e x t e r n a l
video source
·
graphics pad t o u c h s e n s i t i v e p a d used f o r d r a w i n g ,
selecting etc.
H
h i g h band broadcast standard v i d e o
H.S.V hue, saturation, value colour sliders
i m ag e any analog, digital o r still picture

i n v e rt to exchange protected stencil areas
K
kaleidoscope CVI symmetry drawing effect
key stencil defineable area of screen (matte)
L
low band below broadcast standard video
M
matte defineable a r e a of screen (stencil)
menu list of choices from which to select
mosaic effect of zoom control on live image
multi-plane three-dimensi onal e f f e c t
2 - R E F E R ENCES
G LOSSARY
N
NTSC a video broadcast standard (U.S.A.)
p
paint to draw images on t h e graphics pad
PAL a v i d eo broadcast standard (European)
palette selection of colours from which to choose
pan smooth movement of image
pixel smallest u n i t of screen image
plane apparent t h ree-dimensional levels: t h e C V I
can h a v e t h ree planes - background, live video a n d foregrou n d
Poin t i l l ist a n a r t i s t who p a i n t e d pictures u s i n g s m a l l dots
posteriza tion removal of some colour information
preset i n s t a n t setup of C V I for a p a r t i c u l a r effect
protect prevent pre sets from being a l tered
Q
QWERTY standard layout of alpha-numeric
typewriter
R
rack mount equipment 1 9 i nches wide will fit a rack
mou n t
range CVI colourizing effect
RGB red-green-blue video standard
rotary CVI symmetry drawing effect
RS232C a standard of serial communication between
computers
rubber band accur a te straight-line d r a w i ng
S
saturation purity of colour
sepia-tone a light brown shading of a black and white
image
self test the CVI checks i tself
sequ ence a repeatable history of actions o n the CVI
software compu ter p rogram
solarize CVI colourizing effect
spatter CVI paint type
spectrum CVI colourizing effect
SPG sync-pulse generator
spin CVI symmetry drawing effect
stencil protected a rea of digital i mage
stylus pen shaped object used on graphics pad
sub-carrier signal on which colour i n formation i s se n t
symmetry generated by CVI from u s e r d r a w i n g on
-
�
graphics pad
synchronize to lock (equipment) together i n t i me
REFERENCES - 3
G LOSSARY
T
texture a selected repeating pattern
time-base correction re-timing of video signal - used ma i n l y
downstream of video tape recorders
titlin g
tint subtle transparent colouring
edita ble lettering
transl ucen t transparen t colour
U
U-ma tic a video tape forma t
o update modify a preset
V
value . brigh tness of colour
VCR video casse tte recorder
VTR video tape recorder
VHS a video tape standard
W
wash smooth graduation of colour or translucency
wipe clearing the screen and replacing i t with
something else eg., colour, texture
z
zoom close-up effect
14 - REFERENCES
I N DEX
Where two page numbers are given, the d a r k e r page number is

more descr iptive.
A S e c t i o n & Page
alphanumeric keyboard S 3 p.36, S4 p.9, S4 p.26
analog board S l p.20
analog path Sl p . 1 5 , S3 p.45, S3 p . 5 1
aspect ratio S l p.2
B
beeper S3 p.20
blanking S3 p.5 1
brush shape S3 p. l ,S3 p . 1 0
burst S3 p.55
buttons Sl p.O. S l p.3
·. : view S3 p.66, S4 p.24
C
cascade Sl p. 1 9, S3 p.4 5 , S 3 p.49
·. . cas./analog S3 p.49
·. . stencil S3 p.50
change wipe S3 p.30
chroma-key
·. . levels S2 p.8, S 3 p.82
·. . stencil S l p. l l , S3 p.50
ci rcle S 3 p.5
clear
·. colour
. S 3 p.2 8, S3 p.29
·. . stencil S 3 p.3 3, S3 p.35
col o u r
·. . adjustment Sl p.20
·. . bars S3 p.83
·. . control menu S3 p. l , S 3 p. 1 9
·. . controls Sl p.O, S l p.1
·. . depth Sl p. l , S 3 p.22, S3 p.5 8
·. . detect S3 p.34
·. . tunnel S3 p.3 1
·. type . S3 p. l , S3 p.21
· . w i pes
. S3 p.2, S3 p.28
colourize
·. . button Sl p.3
· . control
. Sl p. l
· . control menu
. S3 p.4 l , S3 p.57
·. . type S3 p.4 l , S3 p.58
compu ter control S4 p. l
configuration diagrams SI p.3 1
connecting the CVI Sl p. 1 8
contour S3 p.23, S3 p.60
�
control console Sl p.O
\
controls view S3 p.66, S4 p.24
copy S3 p.8
I R E F E R E N CES - S
I N DEX
C (continued) 8ection&Page
copy p reset 83 p.64, S3 p.67
crawl
· . . colour S3 p.48
· . . t�ail S3 p.49
cross symmetry S3 p.25
c u rsor SI p. 1 4
c u t and paste (copy) 83 p.7, S3 p.8
0
dejag S3 p.3
delay SI p.30
detect edge, colou r S3 p.34
diagonal symmetry S3 p.26
digital path Sl p. 1 S , S3 p.45, S3 p . S 1
digitizing t o u c h p a d SI p . O , S l p.6, S4 p.23
disin tegra te
·. . colour S3 p.3 1
dots S3 p.4
draw SI p.4, S3 p.4
draw over S3 p.20
drawing control SI p.O, Sl p.3, S I p. 1 4
E .�
edge detect S 3 p.34
edit
·. . brush S3 p. 1 2
·. . sequence S3 p.7 1
·. . texture S3 p. 1 7
·. . title S3 p.36
ellipse S3 p.6
error messages S3 p.79, S 3 p. 83
expansion port SI p. 1 9, S4 p.23
external
· connections
. . Sl p. 1 9
·. freeze control
. S3 p.56
· graphics pad
. . S4 p.23
·. . su bcarrier SI p.20
1 6 - REFERENCES
.
I N DEX
""
\
F
field store S l p. 1 5, S 3 p.42
fill
·. . colour S3 p.8
flat paint type S3 p. 1 4
flip symmetry S3 p.25
freeze
·. . b u t ton S I p.3, Sl p . 4
·. . control S 3 p.4 l , S3 p.55
functional overview S I p. I 6
G
genlock SI p.20
glide S3 p.53
glossary S5 p. 1
graphics pad SI p.O, S l p.6, S4 p . 2 3
H
ha rmonic motion S3 p.54
h o rizontal
· . . mirror S3 p.52
· . . pan SI p.2
r · . . symmetry
. . . w i pe
S3
S3
p.24
p.30, S3 p.3 3 , S3 p.53
H.S.V. SI p. I
hue control SI p.O, S l p . 1
h ue-sat paint type S3 p. 1 4
hue, sat., value SI p. 1
· . . colour control S3 p. 1 9
· . . colourize control S3 p.57
internal stencil SI p. I O, S3 p.50

invert stencil S I p.4, S3 p.34
K
kaleidoscope symmetry S 3 p.26
L
live digital S I p. 1 5, S3 p.4 5
logo S I p.2 1
l uminance key S3 p.82
REFEREN CES - 7
I N DEX
M
�
menu select Sl p.5 !
menus Sl p.7
·. quick reference
. S3 p. l , S3 p.40, S3 p.84
microphone input Sl p. 1 9
mirrors S3 p.52
mix S3 p.45, S3 p.48
monochrome S3 p.23, S3 p.60
mosaic Sl p.2
mottled paint type S3 p. 1 4
movement control Sl p.2
music
·. colour control
. S3 p. 1 9
·. . colourize control S3 p.57
·. . freeze control S3 p.56
N
number buttons S l p.3, SI p.7
0
opaque colour type S3 p.22
options S l p.20
option switches S l p.20
P
paint
·. . display control S3 p.46
·. . menus S3 p. l
·. . method S3 p. l , S3 p.3
· . type
. S3 p. l , S3 p. 1 4
pan controls Sl p.O, S I p.2
pan:pen S3 p.53
phase adjust Sl p.20
posteriza tion S3 p.60
presets
·. . control S3 p.4 l , S3 p.6 1
·. . controls view S3 p.66, S4 p.24
·. . description SI p. 1 2, S2 p. 1 4
·. . freeze S3 p.6 1
·. . number S l p.O, SI p.3
·. . quick reference S2 p.39
·. . reset S3 p.6 1
·. . select S2 p.4, S3 p.6 1
·. . set S3 p.6 1
program presets S3 p.67
protect presets S3 p.67
pixel S l p.2
pixelation S I p.2
push buttons S I p.O, S I p.3
�
18 - REFERENCES
I N DEX
(" Q Sect i o n & P a ge

quick reference
. . menus S3 p. l , S3 p40, S3 p.84
.
·
·. presets S2 p.39
quick select menu bar Sl p.8
qwerty keyboard S3 p.36, S4 p.9, S4 p.26
R
ra ndom
·. . colour con trol S3 p. 1 9
·. . colourize control S3 p. 57
range S3 p.23, S3 p.59
rate controls Sl p.O, S l p . l
rays S3 p.7
recal l S3 p.4 l , S 3 p.77
rectangle S3 p.6
remote
·. . control S4 p. l
·. . switch input Sl p. 1 9
reset preset S3 p.63
RGB inputs and outputs Sl p. 1 9
rotary symmetry S3 p.26
RS232C Port S4 p. l
rubber band S3 p.5
S
sa v e and recal l S3 p.4 l , S 3 p.75
saturation control Sl p.O, Sl p . l
screen control S3 p.4 l , S3 p . 5 1
s e l f test S3 p.S3
sequencer
· . . description S l p. 1 3,
· . . operation S3 p .68
set preset S3 p.6 1
setup S3 p.4 l , S3 p. 8 t
shade S3 p.22, S3 p.59
shaded paint types S3 p. 1 4
shatter S3 p.53
single freeze S3 p.56
slide S3 p.54
sliders Sl p.O
. . . view S3 p.66, S4 p.24
solarize S3 p.23, S3 p.60
spatter paint ty p e S3 p. 1 4
REFERENCES -9
I N DEX
S (Continued) Section&Page
spectrum S 3 p.23, S3 p.60 �
spin symmetry S3 p.27
stencil Sl p.10, SI p. I S
. . cascade S 3 p.SO
p.50
·
. . c h roma key SI p. l l , S3
p.50
·
. . control S3 p.4 l , S3
p.4
·
· . . controls S l p.O, Sl
· . . description S l p. I O
. . . draw S l p.3, S 3 p. 1 9
· . . erase S 3 p. 1 9
· . . external i � put S 3 p.SO
· . . internal S3 p. SO
· . . invert S I p.4, S3 p.34
· . . output Sl p. 1 9
· . . plane S l p. 1 5
. . . show S 3 p.20
· . . source S3 p.4 l , S3 p .50
· . . under-over S3 p.5 1
· . . use S l p.4
. . wipes S3 p. l , S3 p.32
p.5
·
stop button S I p.O, S l

store data S3 p.75, S4 p. 1 3
straigh t lines S 3 p.5
stretch control Sl p.O, Sl p.2
strobe S3 p.55
subcarrier
symmetry
S I p.20
S3 p. l , S3 p.24
"'l
T
termina tions Sl p.20
test data recall S3 p.78
test pattern S3 p.83
text S3 p.36
. texture enable Sl p.O, S l p.3
textures S3 p. l , S3p.15
· . . colour wipe S3 p.29
· . . stencil wipe S3 p.33
timing control Sl p.2
tint S3 p.22, S3 p.59
title S3 p.2
· edit
. . S3 p.2, S3 p.36
· . . enable Sl p.4
trails S3 p.46, S3 p.4 7, S3 p.49
translucent S3 p.22, S3 p.S9
translucency control Sl p. l , S 3 p.22, S3 p.58
trigger S3 p.69
turning on the CVI Sl p.2 1
I ... ....
1 10 - REFERENCES I
I N D EX
� U
under-over S3 p.5 1
update presets S3 p.67
use stencil Sl pA
use texture Sl p.3, S3 p. l S
V
value control S l p.O, Sl p. l
vertical
· . . mirror S3 p.52
. . . pan Sl p.2
· . . symmetry S3 p.25
. . . wipe S3 p.5 3, S3 p.30, S3 p.33
video
· . . analog S l p. l S, S3 pA5, S3 p.Sl
.- . . board S l p.20
· . . digital S l p . l S, S3 pA5, S3 p.S l
· . . inputs and outputs Sl p. l 9
· . . menus S3 pAO
· . . source S3 p.5 1
view controls S3 p.66, S4 p.24
W
white wipe S3 p.28
wipe
·. . colour S3 p.28
·. . screen control S3 p.53
wipe enables Sl p.4, S3 p.66
window wipe S3 p.35
Z
zoom control S l p.O, Sl p.2
I REFERENCES - 11 I
WA R RA N TY R E G I ST RATI O N
In order t o effect the warra nty, please complete a n d return t h i s registration
to the authorized Fa i rl i g h t dealer w i th i n 14 d a ys from the date of purchase,
together w i t h your b i l l of sale.
�
______
C Y I SE R IA L N O .
__
_ __
__
_
__
__
__
�I �I ____
D A T E O F PU R C H A S E
___
__
_
__
_ _______
____
�
PUR CHASER INFORMATION
· Name ____________________________________________________
Occupation ________________________________________________
Compan y Na me _______ P hone _____________
Address ___________________________________________________
Dealer Name ___________________________
Dealer Ad d ress ___________________________
When and where did you first hear o f the CVI?
How do you plan to use the C Y I? (please tick a ppropriate boxes)
Dpost production O p hotogra phy
Ol ive performance D storyboarding

Oeduca tion o other (please list)
I
r, IIIII II I III IIIIIIIII:II�III!:! III�II::::" ' I IIII'"

IMPACT NETWORKS
INCORPORATED VICTORIA
PTY. LTD.
IN
C' , 64 CLAR E N DON STREET, SOUTH M E LBOU R N E , VICTORIA 3205, AUSTRALIA P.o. BOX 1076, CITY ROAD, SOUTH M E L B O U R N E 3205.
TELEPHONE: (03) 699 83n FACS I M I L E : (03) 690 5916 TELEX: AA 39388
, ,
, '.
lo r
•
.
�. .
. "
. ' .
\ ; j ...!. ' . : I
" t '"
'
/' . .' , :.- .
. : ': " .
• �, � ?
.. , '
. .
PREFERRED S U P P L I E R TO THE FEDERAL GOVE R N M ENT

Announcing the Fairlight CVI Plus
There is nothing in the video vvorld quite
like the new Fairlight CVI Plus.
It's not just a keyerlswitcher. No t just an
effects or charac te r generator. J'-.Jot just a p a i nt
ing system. It's all of them. And though it may

not be an ADOt Chyron or Paintboxt it isn't
$360, 000 either.
The CVI Plus is the first truly c o mple te
COluputer instrument for video c ompo sers,
fron1 Fairlight the people who led the world tr�I:�lfa�s��g:�:;:��e�da�d�,��o�r�:ts�alitY with 108
with the creation . .of Fairlight C omputer Mu s i c a l Instruments.
CVI Plus is perfect for three-quarter and ,
half-i nch video production facilities. A unique
tool for musi c video, storyboarding, vi de o art,
d i s co video, corporate or educational produc: I
ti o n and even video animation. . '�.\ , \

It can ge ne rate titles in up to eight fonts.
Provide chrorna key. Allow you to paint both
fo re g ro und s and backgrounds and lTIOVe live
a c ti on betwe en the two. You can col ou r ize or
B ig \'j�lJa l impact! Colour w;!'e background, dancers are '
ktyed a nd n'\ollri1.l'o. Ann5 created bi' Trail FX. draw In any 0 f Lle 1 '-tIi , 096( co1ours. P, alllt . WIt . h
1.08 brush shapes and textu re s Edit, retouch, .
reduce or enlarge, strobe, freeze, 1110ntage, you

DeHne it.
Best of all/ you don't need an engineering
degre e to make the mo s t of your CVI . Push a
button, slide a fader or touch the digitizing
p ad cl n d every capab i lity is at your conlmand.
The simplified menu make s the selection
of any function, wel l, silnple.
Anything is possible. CVI Plus has 1 00 ptc·sets thai are. in·
T h e vast array 0 f pre-set programme s put lillltely variable by iadEr tJr touch pad.
.
100 options at your fi nge r

ro.KFairlight, it' :-m:-h;;I�nhav;�

prove Sho
tips, to re duce the time and
keyerlswitcher, paint system, effects and character
c o s t of post-production and
Igenerator all in one package for $9,950. Send me a
to enable slick live cheque
Fairlight CVI Plus demo tape, my is enclosed.
p resent ations . The option I
Name
to input your O'vvn pre-sets I
--
deliver s an eve n t gre at er Address

versati lity. I ,
i'
Postcode _____ ____
S o, . befo re you spend I U · M ATIC VHS BETA
D $1 5 O $15
Ii
$360; 000, send us $30 or U $30

less for a' con1plete demo I
tape of the Fairlight CVI I S�nd to:
Fairlight Instruments Pty Ltd
Plu s. Just p o st the c oupon. I Rushcutters Bay, Street,
b-19 Boundary .
pru s. DttHNep o �O¥Ae e§d�1>11 Tel�nhone : I02t 331 �333 .
NSVV 20 1 1 .
A !' J : J41 1_
I Rusn � utters Bay, NS N 20 1 1 .
_ , _
� '.
_�_ : -eJ;
� .
. ""
.' _, .
��rJf?!!£.:.�:::L�
� ,

User Manual: Computer Video Instrument

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual: Computer Video Instrument

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

��User Manual

Computer Video Instrument

The development o f the FAIRLIGHT CVI (C o mputer Video

The CVI has been designed to embody a high degree of

CVIR'elJjsjoo 7: Title Library Bug 9 Ror 87

Whilst s i m ul t aneo us ly holding doWn t he FREEZE, PRESET, MENU

CUSTOMER SERVICE SUPPORT

.' 'I'''''' This manual is d ivided into four ma i n sections. I t is

recommended that Section One, CVI DESCRIPTION be read

Section One - CVI Description

Section Two - Getting Started

Section Three - Paint and Video Menus

Section Four - Software Updates - Revision 58

Section F ive - References

Console con trols ..................................................•....... 0

Slider con t rois ............................................................. 1

P ush b u t tons .....•.............................•............................ 3

Graph ics pad .....•.....................................•......•...•........ 6

Menus - Wh a t are t h ey? .......................................... 7

Seq u e ncer - Wh a t is i t ? ........... ................................ 13

The C ursor - How to use i t ...................................... 14

Funct ion a l overview ................................................... 16

Conn e c t i n g the CVI •............................•••.••••.•..••••...... 18

Configu r a t ion d i a g rams ............................................ 22

The console controls consist of

10 Slider controls ---,

16 Push buttons ---.......

The slider controls form three groups:

Colour controls: Allow real-time control of colour, for both

The four cont rols in this group are:

Timing controls : These two sliders control the rate at which

i) RATE ONE: This controls the rate of change of random colour

Movement controls : These four sliders control the movement

The four controls i n this group are:

i) HORIZONTAL PAN: Moves image horizontally.

r The push-buttons allow immediate control of a nu mber of

Colourize: push on/push off. Button number O.

Draw colour: push on/push off. B u t ton nu mber 1.

Draw stencil: push on/push off. Button number 2.

Use texture: push o n/p ush o f f. B u t t o n n u mber 3.

See Secti o n 3 - PAINT MENUS u n der TEXTURE.

Wipe colour: Push once to w i pe. B u tton n u m ber 4.

Wipe stencil: Push o n ce to w i pe. B u tton number 5.

Pick colour: P u sh once to pick colour. Button number 6.

Title: Push once to title. Button number 7.

Use stencil: Push on/push off. Button number 8.

Invert stencil: Push once to invert. Button number 9.

Draw: Hold down to draw.

This button doubles as a previous MENU or PRESET selector when

r Draw lock: Push to lock DRAW on, push again to u n l ock.

Sto p: Push once to stop a p rocess.

Menu: Push to enter MEN U mode.

Preset: Push to enter PRESET selection mode.

Freeze: Pus h on, push off.

This the 'heart' of the CVI system.

Th e inbuilt GRAPHICS PAD is a touch sensitive pad which

Drawing will occur when the stylus is held firmly on the

NOTE: Do not use a pen or ballpoint pen with ink on the

1) P A I NT menus are used p r i m a r i l y t o select opti o n s in t h e

2) The VIDEO menus a re p r i m a rily i n te n d e d for t h e c o n t rol of

T h e re i s a considerable degree o f overlap, as l ive and s t i l l

1 ) The PEN and GR APHICS PAD

Lift the stylus from the pad, w i th the cursor o n t h e relevant